Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
E-ClassOperator’s Manual
SymbolsTrademarks®:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.RESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered
trademarks of Daimler.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.The following symbols are found in thisOperator’s Manual:G Warning!Warning notices draw your attention tohazards that may endanger your health orlife, or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result indamage to your vehicle.
i Helpful hints or further information youmay find useful.
X This symbol points to instructionsfor you to follow.
X A number of these symbolsappearing in succession indicatesa multiple-step procedure.
Y page This symbol tells you where to lookfor further information on a topic.
YY This continuation symbol marks awarning or procedure which iscontinued on the next page.
Display Text in displays, such as the controlsystem, are printed in the typeshown here.
Our company and staff congratulate you onthe purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.Your selection of our product is ademonstration of your trust in our companyname. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desireto own an automobile that will be as easy aspossible to operate and provide years ofservice.Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts ofmany skilled engineers and craftsmen. Tohelp assure your driving pleasure, and alsothe safety of you and your passengers, we askyou to make a small investment of time:RPlease read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will behandy for your reference.RPlease follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They aredesigned to acquaint you with theoperation of your Mercedes-Benz.RPlease pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They aredesigned to help improve the safety of thevehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles ofsafe, pleasurable driving.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCA Daimler Company
2
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Safety and security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Controls in detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Contents
3
1, 2, 3 ...4-ETS
see ETS/4-ETS 4MATIC
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) 4-zone automatic climate control
see Climate control system
AABS (Antilock Brake System) . . . . . . . 71
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 312
Accessory weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Active head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 60Air bag deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Distance warning function . . . . . . . 171Emergency calls (Tele Aid) . . . . . . . 225
Active Bi-Xenon headlampsMessages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324see Headlamps
Active head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Adaptive Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Adaptive Damping System
see ADS
AdditivesEngine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Address change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21ADS (Adaptive Damping System) . . . 171Advanced Tire PressureMonitoring System (AdvancedTPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 328
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Emergency call upon deployment . 225Front, driver and passenger . . . . . . . 48Front passenger front air bag offindicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 341Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Side impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Window curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Air conditioning refrigerant andlubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323AIRMATIC DC (Dual Control)
ADS (Adaptive Damping System) . . 171Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Vehicle level control . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Air pressuresee Tire inflation pressure
Air pressure (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Air pump (electric) . . . . . . . . . . 292, 363Air recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . . . 192Air volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Alarm system
see Anti-theft systems Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290, 362All-wheel drive (4MATIC) . . . . . . . . . 174Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
AMG menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Anticorrosion/antifreeze . . . . . . . . . 401Antilock Brake System
see ABS Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . 76Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Aquaplaningsee Hydroplaning
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Aspect ratio (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Audio/DVD menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Auto-dimming rear view mirrors . . . 108
Index
4
Automatic central locking . . . . . 85, 155Automatic climate control
see Climate control system Automatic headlamp mode . . . . . . . 111Automatic interior lighting control . 116Automatic locking when driving . . . 155Automatic shift program . . . . . . . . . 133Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . 130
Automatic shift program . . . . . . . . 133Emergency operation (limp-homemode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Gear range indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 133Gear ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Gearshifting malfunctions (limp-home mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Kickdown (manual shift program) . 137Manual shift program . . . . . . . . . . . 135One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . 134Program mode indicator . . . . . . . . 134Program mode selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 135Shifting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Steering wheel gearshift control . . 134Transmission position indicator . . . 131Transmission positions . . . . . . . . . 131
Axle oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
BBackrest
see Seats Backup lamps
Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Bar (air pressure unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 269BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . 72Batteries, SmartKey
Checking condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Battery, VehicleCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Bead (tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Beverage holders
see Cup holders Bleeding the fuel system (dieselengine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366Brake fluid
Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Brake lampsCleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285High-mounted brake lamp . . . . . . . 348Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Brake padsMessages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275High-performance brake system . . 277Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Bulbs
see Replacing bulbs
CCAC (Customer Assistance Center) . . 23California retail buyers andlessees, important notice for . . . . . . . 20Calls (phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Can holders
see Cup holders Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Cargo compartment
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Storage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Cargo management system . . . . . . . 210Belt reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Cargo tie-down rings . . . . . . . . . . . 211Mounting elements . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Telescoping rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Index
5
Cargo volumesee Trunk/cargo compartment
Carpets, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Central locking
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 155Locking/unlocking from inside . . . . 85
Central locking/unlocking switch . . . 85Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Children in the vehicle
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Blocking of rear window operation . . 69Child seat anchors – LATCH-type . . 68Indicator lamp, front passengerfront air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Infant and child restraint systems . . 63Occupant Classification System(OCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Tether anchorage points . . . . . . . . . 65Top tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Child safetysee Children in the vehicle
Child seat anchors – LATCH-typesee Children in the vehicle
Chrome-plated exhaust tip,cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Climate control
see Climate control system
Climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . 1794-zone automatic climate control . 182Air conditioning, cooling . . . . . . . . 185Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . . . 398Air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Air recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . . 192Air volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Deactivating system . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Front defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Maximum cooling MAX COOL . . . . 191Residual engine heat (REST) . . . . . 192Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 152Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Cold tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . 269Collapsible tire (spare wheel) . . . . . 389Collapsible wheel chock . . . . . . . . . . 290COMAND system
see separate COMAND systemoperating instructions
Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 141Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . 140Resetting to factory settings . . . . . 149
Control system menus . . . . . . . . . . . 142AMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Audio/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Standard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Vehicle status message memory . . 148
Control system submenusConvenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Time/Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Convenience submenuEasy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . . . . 156
CoolantAnticorrosion/antifreeze . . . . . . . . 401Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 319, 321Temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . 138Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps 115Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Last stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Resume function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Customer Assistance Center (CAC) . . 23
Index
6
DDashboard
see Instrument cluster Data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Date, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Daytime running lamp mode . . 112, 153Deep water
see Standing water Defroster
Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Delayed shut-offExterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Department of Transportationsee DOT
Diesel fuelsee Fuel
DifficultiesWhile driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127With starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Digital clocksee Clock
Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Dimensions (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Direction of rotation (tires) . . . . . . . 249Displays
Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Maintenance service indicator . . . . 280Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 141Outside temperature . . . . . . . 143, 152Symbol messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Vehicle status message memory . . 148Vehicle system settings . . . . . . . . . 149
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Cleaning system sensor . . . . . . . . . 285Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Distance warning function . . . . . . . 171Driving hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Resume function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Sensor cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Warning and indicator lamps . 165, 336
Door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Door handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Doors
Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) . . 81Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) . . . . 80Locking/unlocking from outside . . . 80Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Opening from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) . . . . 230Unlocking (Mechanical key) . . . . . . 343
DOT (Department ofTransportation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Drinking and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Driving
Abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 274In winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Through standing water . . . . . . . . . 278With Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Driving and parkingSafety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Driving off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 277Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Adaptive Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72EBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72ETS/4-ETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Driving systemsAIRMATIC DC (Dual Control) . . . . . 171All-wheel drive (4MATIC) . . . . . . . . 174Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Index
7
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Parktronic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Driving tips, automatictransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
EEasy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . 106, 156EBP (Electronic BrakeProportioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Electric air pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Electrical system
Improper work on or modifications . 22Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Electronic Stability Programsee ESP®
Electronic Traction Systemsee ETS/4-ETS
Emergency, in case ofBattery, jump starting . . . . . . . . . . 369First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . 114Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Emergency callsTele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Emergency operationsGear selector lever, unlocking . . . . 345Limp-home mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Locking/unlocking the vehicle . . . 343Remote door unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Tailgate, unlocking and opening . . 344Trunk lid, emergency release . . . . . . 92Trunk lid, unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Emergency Tensioning Devicesee ETD
Emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380System warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
EngineBrake-in recommendations . . . . . . 238Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 338Maximum engine speed . . . . . . . . . 381Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Turning off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Engine coolantsee Coolant
Engine oilAdding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Recommended engine oils and oilfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 72ETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 312Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
ETD (Emergency TensioningDevice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47ETS/4-ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Express operation
Panorama roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Tilt/sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . 107
Parking position . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 109Exterior view of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Index
8
FFastening the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . 57First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Lowering the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 365Mounting the spare wheel . . . . . . . 360Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 355Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355, 389TIREFIT (tire repair kit) . . . . . . . . . . 355
Floormats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Fluids
Automatic transmission fluid . . . . . 395Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Washer and headlamp cleaningsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325, 326Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Four-wheel drivesee All-wheel drive (4MATIC)
Front air bagssee Air bags
Front axle oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Front lampssee Headlamps
Front passenger front air bag . . . . . . 48Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Front passenger front air bag offindicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 341Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400Capacity, fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 396Fuel consumption statistics . . . . . . 157Fuel filler flap and cap . . . . . . . . . . 240Fuel tank reserve warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 337Premium unleaded gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 396, 398Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Fuel filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Fuel system, bleeding (dieselengine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366Fuel tank
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Fuel filler flap and cap . . . . . . . . . . 240Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Fuse box in cargo compartment . . 376
GGarage door opener . . . . . . . . . . 40, 231Gasoline
see Fuel GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) . . 269Gear range
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 133Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Shifting into optimal . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Gearshift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 130Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Shifting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Transmission position indicator . . . 131Transmission positions . . . . . . . . . 131Unlocking in an emergency . . . . . . 345
Generatorsee Alternator
Global locking/unlockingsee Key, SmartKey
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Gross Axle Weight Rating
see GAWR Gross Vehicle Weight
see GVW
Index
9
Gross Vehicle Weight Ratingsee GVWR
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) . . . . . . 269GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
HHalogen headlamps
see Headlamps Hard plastic trim items, cleaning . . 287Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . 114Headlamp cleaning system . . . . . . . 114Headlamps
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps . . . . . . 110Automatic headlamp mode . . . . . . 111Bi-Xenon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 348Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Delayed shut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349High-beam flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 113Low-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 111Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Headliner and shelf below rearwindow, cleaning and care of . . . . . 287Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Active head restraints . . . . . . . 60, 345
Comfort head restraint, adjusting . . 97Folding back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Rear seat, removing and installing . . 98
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 106Height adjustment
Seat belt outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Vehicle level control . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
High-beam flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . 113, 348
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
High-mounted brake lamp . . . . . . . . 348Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
High-performance brake system . . . 277Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29HVAC
see Climate control system Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
IIdentification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Identification number, vehicle(VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95, 125
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Indicator lamps
see Lamps, indicator and warning Infant and child restraint systems
see Children in the vehicle Inflation pressure
see Tires, Inflation pressure Inside door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 138
Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Instrument lightingsee Instrument cluster, Illumination
Instrument panelsee Instrument cluster
Instruments and controlssee Cockpit
Interior lightingDelayed shut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Front reading lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Rear reading lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Interior rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . 107Auto-dimming rear view mirrors . . . 108
Interior storage spacessee Storage compartments
Intermittent wipingWindshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Index
10
JJack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
KKey, Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Loss of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Valet locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Key, SmartKeyBattery check lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Checking batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 83Global locking (KEYLESS-GO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 84Global locking (SmartKey) . . . . . . . . 81Global unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 84Global unlocking (SmartKey) . . . . . . 81Important notes on KEYLESS-GO . . . 82Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Loss of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Opening, Trunk/tailgate . . . . . . . . . . 86Opening and closing the powertilt/sliding sunroof or panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel . 122Opening and closing the windows . 122Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Replacing batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Restoring to factory setting . . . . 81, 84Selective setting . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 84Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . . . 94
KEYLESS-GOStarter switch positions . . . . . . . . . . 94
Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Kickdown (manual shift program) . . 137Kilopascal (air pressure unit) . . . . . . 270
LLabels
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Emission control information . . . . . 380
Lamps, exteriorExterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . 111Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Lamps, indicator and warningABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 331Battery (SmartKey) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Distance warning lamp . 165, 171, 336Engine malfunction . . . . . . . . . 31, 338ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 335
Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Front passenger front air bag off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 49, 341Fuel tank reserve . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 337High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . 31Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Low-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . 31Low tire pressure/TPMSmalfunction telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Seat belt telltale . . . . . . . . 31, 58, 333SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 334Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Language, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151LATCH-type child seat anchors
see Children in the vehicle License plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Light alloy wheels, cleaning . . . . . . . 286Lighter
see Cigarette lighter Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Daytime running lamp mode . . . . . 112Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Limp-home mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Loading
see Vehicle loading Locator lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Index
11
Lock buttonDoor handle (KEYLESS-GO) . . . . . . . 83
Locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 81Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Loss ofKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Service and Warranty Informationbooklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Low-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . 111Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Luggage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
MMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Maintenance System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Service indicator, resetting . . . . . . 281Service indicator display . . . . . . . . 281Service indicator message . . . . . . . 280Service indicator message,clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Service term exceeded . . . . . . . . . 281
Manual headlamp mode (Low-beam headlamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Manual shift program . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Maximum loaded vehicle weight . . . 270Maximum load rating (tires) . . . . . . . 270Maximum permissible tireinflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Menus
see Control system menus Minispare wheel
see Spare wheel Mirrors
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors . . . 108Exterior rear view mirror parkingpositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 109Exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . . . 107Interior rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . 107Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
MON (Motor Octane Number) . . . . . 399Motor Octane Number
see MON Multicontour seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Symbol messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Vehicle status messages . . . . . . . . 295
Multifunction display messagesABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 312Active headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Advanced TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 328
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323AIRMATIC DC (Dual Control) . . . . . 314Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 307Backrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Cargo compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 319, 321Corner-illuminating front foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Display malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316EBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Engine service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 312Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325, 326Front passenger front air bag . . . . 299Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307High-beam lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315License plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Light sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Index
12
Low-beam lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Parking lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325PRE-SAFE® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Reverse lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Side marker lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325SmartKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO . . . . . 316SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307, 328Tire pressure monitor . . . . . . . . . . . 308Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307, 328TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 328Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Multifunction steering wheelAdjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . 106, 156Gearshift control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
NNavigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Net, parcel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Night security illumination . . . 113, 154Normal occupant weight . . . . . . . . . 270Number, vehicle identification(VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
OOccupant Classification System
see OCS Occupant distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Children and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 62Child seat anchors – LATCH-type . . 68Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . 57Front passenger front air bag offindicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 341Infant and child restraint systems . . 63OCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50PRE-SAFE® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 55
OCS (Occupant ClassificationSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Oilsee Engine oil
Oil levelsee Engine oil, Checking level
On-board computersee Control system
One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . . 134Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Ornamental moldings, cleaning . . . . 284Outside temperature
see Displays Overhead control panel . . . . . . . . . . . 40
PPaintwork, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Paintwork code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Roller sunblinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Parcel net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Parktronic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Index
13
Parking positionExterior rear view mirrors . . . 108, 109Transmission position . . . . . . . . . . 131
Parktronic systemCleaning system sensors . . . . . . . . 285Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Minimum distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176System sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Warning indicators . . . . . . . . . . 29, 176
Parts service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
see Front passenger front air bagoff indicator lamp
Passenger safetysee Occupant safety
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Phone
see Telephone Plastic parts, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Power assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Power seats
see Seats Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Power washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Rear door window, Blockingoperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Preglow indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 125PRE-SAFE® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
ProblemsWhile driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127With vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Product information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Production options weight . . . . . . . . 270Program mode selector switch
Automatic shift program . . . . . . . . 133Manual shift program . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Proximity keysee Key, SmartKey
PSI (air pressure unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Push-start
see Tow-start
RRACETIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Radio
Selecting stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Rear axle oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395Rear door ashtray
see Ashtrays Rear door window
Blocking operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Rear fog lamp
see Fog lamps Rear lamps
see Tail lamps Rear seat head restraints
see Head restraints Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . 193Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . 119Recommended tire inflationpressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 270Recovery services, Stolen vehicle(Tele Aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Refrigerant, air conditioning . . . . . . 398Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Regular checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Reminder, Seat belt
see Seat belts, Telltale Remote control
see Key, SmartKey Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) . . . . . 230Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . 23Research Octane Number
see RON
Index
14
Reserve fuelMessages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 138Reset tool (active head restraints) . 346Restraint systems
see Occupant safety Retaining hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 384Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 21, 226Roller sunblinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221RON (Research Octane Number) . . . 399Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Route guidance
see Navigation system Rubber parts, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . 287Run Flat Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
SSafety
Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . 70Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Reporting defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety beltssee Seat belts
Seat belt force limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Automatic comfort-fit feature . . . . . 59Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Proper use of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 333Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Seat cushionsRemoving and installing . . . . . . . . . 103
Seating capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . . . . 106Folding (expanding cargo volume) . 205Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Multicontour seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Seat bench, folding . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Seat cushions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Split rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . 205Third-row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Securing cargoCargo tie-down rings . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Selective settingsee Key, SmartKey
Selector leversee Gear selector lever
Self-testOCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Servicesee Maintenance
Service, parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Service and warranty information . . . 20Service intervals
see Maintenance System, Serviceindicator
Service life (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Settings
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Factory setting (SmartKey) . . . . 81, 83Individual (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Selective setting (SmartKey) . . . 81, 84Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Shelf below rear window, cleaning . 287Side impact air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Side marker lamps
Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Sidewall (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Index
15
Side windowssee Power windows
Ski bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202SmartKey
see Key, SmartKey SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
see Key, SmartKey Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Snow tires
see Winter tires Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293, 384
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 164Speed settings
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Resume function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Split rear seat benchsee Vehicle loading
SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . 31, 45, 334Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Standing water, driving through . . . 278Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . 94Starting difficulties (engine) . . . . . . 125Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Steering column
see Multifunction steering wheel,Adjusting
Steering wheelsee Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel gearshift control . . . 134Stolen Vehicle Recovery services . . 231Storage compartments . . . . . . . . 32, 217Storing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Sunroof
see Power tilt/sliding sunroof Sunshade, rear window . . . . . . . . . . 222Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Suspension tuning
see AIRMATIC DC (Dual Control)
TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 139
Overspeed range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Tailgate
Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315see Trunk/tailgate
Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Tar stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Technical data
Air conditioning refrigerant . . 396, 398Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396, 398
Capacities fuels, coolants,lubricants etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396, 400Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Engine oil additives . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Engine oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394, 397Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Gasoline additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400Identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Premium unleaded gasoline . . . . . . 398Rims and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Washer and headlamp cleaningsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397, 402Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Emergency calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Information button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Initiating an emergency callmanually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Remote door unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Roadside Assistance button . . . . . 226Search and send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229SOS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Stolen Vehicle Recovery services . 231System self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Index
16
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Answering/ending a call . . . . . . . . 158Hands-free microphone . . . . . . . . . . 40Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
TemperatureCoolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Interior temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 186Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 152
Tether anchorage pointssee Children in the vehicle
Tie-down rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Tightening torque
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Time setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152TIN (Tire Identification Number) . . . 270Tire and Loading InformationPlacard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Tire and loading terminology . . . . . . 269TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Tire Identification Number
see TIN Tire inflation pressure
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Important notes on . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Placard on driver’s door B-pillar . . . 249
Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Tire load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Tire ply composition and materialused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 328
Tire repair kitsee TIREFIT
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 384Advanced Tire PressureMonitoring System (AdvancedTPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Advanced TPMS low tire pressuretelltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Air pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 248Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Direction of rotation, spinning . . . . 249Important notes on tire inflationpressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . 254, 255Information placard . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307, 328Ply composition and material used 271Problems under-/overinflation . . . . 254
Retreads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Rims and tires (technical data) . . . 384Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Run Flat Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384, 385Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263, 271Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254, 268Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269TIREFIT (tire repair kit) . . . . . . . . . . 355Tire Identification Number . . . . . . . 270Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257TPMS low tire pressure/malfunction telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268, 271Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 272Treadwear indicators . . . . . . . 248, 271Vehicle maximum load on . . . . . . . 271Wear pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Winter tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272, 384
Tire speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . 263, 271Top tether
see Children in the vehicle Total load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Towing eye bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Index
17
Tow-start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369, 372Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Transmission
see Automatic transmission Transmission fluid level . . . . . . . . . . 245Transmission gear selector lever
see Gear selector lever Transmission positions . . . . . . . . . . . 131Traveling abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Tread (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Tread depth (tires) . . . . . . . . . . 248, 272Treadwear indicators (tires) . . . 248, 271Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Trip odometer, resetting . . . . . . . . . . 139Trunk
Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376Trunk lid emergency release . . . . . . 92
Trunk/cargo compartmentCargo volume, expanding . . . . . . . . 205Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376Third-row seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Tie-down rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Trunk/tailgateClosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Opening/closing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 91, 92
Unlocking in an emergency . . . . . . 343Valet locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Turning off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Additional in mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 348Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Twin roller blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
UUniform Tire Quality GradingStandards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 271Units, Settings
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Unleaded gasoline, premium . . . . . . 398Unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 80, 81
Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343Upholstery, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Useful features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
VValet locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Vehicle
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Individual settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 81Locking/unlocking manually . . . . . 343Lowering (wheel change) . . . . . . . . 365Modifications and alterations,Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Vehicle jacksee Jack
Vehicle level controlsee AIRMATIC DC (Dual Control)
Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Vehicle loading
Cargo tie-down rings . . . . . . . . . . . 204Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Ski bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Split rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . 205Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Vehicle maximum load on the tire . . 271Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen(Tele Aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Vehicle status message memory . . . 148Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Vehicle washing
see Vehicle care
Index
18
WWarning lamps
see Lamps, Indicator and warning Warning sounds
Distance warning function . . . . . . . 171Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt . . . 58Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Parktronic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Seat belt telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Warranty coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Washer and headlamp cleaningsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Washer fluid
Messages in the multifunctiondisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Mixing ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Wiping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Wear pattern (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Wheel
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Wheels, sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384, 385Wheels, Tires and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Window curtain air bags . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Windowssee Power windows
Windows, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Windshield
Cleaning wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . 285Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 402Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Windshield wipersRain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Replacing wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 352
Winter drivingSnow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Winter driving instructions . . . . . . . 273Winter tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272, 384Wood trims, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Index
Operator’s Manual
19
Product Information
Please observe the following in your own bestinterest:We recommend using Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion parts andaccessories explicitly approved by us for yourvehicle model.We have tested these parts to determine theirreliability, safety and special suitability forMercedes-Benz vehicles.We are unable to make an assessment forother products and therefore cannot be heldresponsible for them, even if in individualcases an official approval or authorization bygovernmental or other agencies should exist.Use of such parts and accessories couldadversely affect the safety, performance orreliability of your vehicle. Please do not usethem.Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and pre-approved conversion parts and accessoriesare available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. In addition, you will receivecomprehensive information on permissibletechnical modifications and expertinstallations.
Operator’s Manual
NotesThis Operator’s Manual contains a great dealof useful information. We urge you to read itcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving.For your own safety and longer service life ofthe vehicle, we urge you to follow theinstructions and warnings contained in thisOperator’s Manual. Ignoring them couldresult in damage to the vehicle or personalinjury to you or others. Vehicle damagecaused by failure to follow instructions is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.We continuously strive to improve ourproduct, and ask for your understanding thatwe reserve the right to make changes indesign and equipment. Therefore,information, illustrations and descriptions inthis Operator’s Manual might differ from yourvehicle.
Vehicle equipmentYour vehicle may have some or all of theequipment described in this manual.Therefore, you may find explanations foroptional equipment not installed in yourvehicle. If you have any questions aboutoperating any equipment, any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center will be glad todemonstrate the proper procedures.Optional equipment is also described in thismanual, including operating instructionswherever necessary. Since they are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrationsherein may vary slightly from the actualequipment of your vehicle.If there are any equipment details that are notshown or described in this Operator’sManual, any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter will be glad to inform you of correctcare and operating procedures. TheOperator’s Manual and Maintenance Bookletare important documents and should be keptwith the vehicle.
Introduction
Z
Operator’s Manual
20
Service and warranty informationThe Service and Warranty Informationbooklet contains detailed information aboutthe warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,including:RNew Car Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island, and Vermont EmissionControl System Warranty1
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (LemonLaws)
Important notice for California retailbuyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benzautomobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after areasonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or itsauthorized repair or service facilities fail to fixone or more substantial defects ormalfunctions in the vehicle that are coveredby its express warranty. During the period of18 months from original delivery of thevehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometerof the vehicle, whichever occurs first, areasonable number of repair attempts ispresumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one ormore of the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or
malfunction results in a condition that islikely to cause death or serious bodilyinjury if the vehicle is driven, that defector malfunction has been subject to repairtwo or more times, and you have directly
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC inwriting of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect ormalfunction of a less serious nature thancategory (1) has been subject to repairfour or more times and you have directlynotified us in writing of the need for itsrepair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.
Written notification should not be sent to adealer, it should be addressed toMercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350
1 Applicable to vehicles with gasoline engine only.
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
21
MaintenanceThe Maintenance Booklet describes all thenecessary maintenance work which shouldbe performed at regular intervals.Always have the Maintenance Booklet withyou when you take the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center forservice. The service advisor will record eachservice in the booklet for you.
Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram provides factory-trained technicalhelp in the event of a breakdown. Calls to thetoll-free Roadside Assistance number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)will be answered by Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Representatives24 hours a day, 365 days a year.For additional information refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram brochure (in the USA) or theRoadside Assistance section of the Serviceand Warranty Information Booklet (inCanada) in your vehicle literature portfolio.
Change of address or ownershipIf you change your address, be sure to sendin the “Change of Address Notice” found inthe Service and Warranty InformationBooklet, or simply call the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center (in the USA) at1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service(in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This willassist us in contacting you in a timely mannershould the need arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave allliterature with the vehicle to make it availableto the next operator.If you bought this vehicle used, be sure tosend in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car”found in the Service and WarrantyInformation Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in theUSA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or CustomerService (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Operating your vehicle outside theUSA or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available,Runleaded gasoline for vehicles with
catalytic converters may not be available;the use of leaded fuels will damage thecatalysts,Rgasoline may have a considerably lower
octane rating, and improper fuel can causeengine damage.
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe under our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:In the USA:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In Canada:Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Introduction
Z
Operating safety
22
Operating safety
G Warning!Work improperly carried out on electroniccomponents and associated softwarecould cause them to cease functioning.Because the vehicle’s electroniccomponents are interconnected, anymodifications made may produce anundesired effect on other systems.Electronic malfunctions could seriouslyimpair the operating safety of your vehicle.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter for repairs or modifications toelectronic components.Other improper work or modifications onthe vehicle could also have a negativeimpact on the operating safety of thevehicle.Some safety systems only function whilethe engine is running. You should thereforenever turn off the engine while driving.
G Warning!Heavy blows against the vehicle underbodyor tires/wheels, for example when runningover an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage and impair theoperating safety of your vehicle. If you feela sudden significant vibration or ridedisturbance, or you suspect that damage toyour vehicle has occurred, you should turnon your hazard warning flashers, carefullyslow down, and drive with caution to anarea which is a safe distance from the road.Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicleappears unsafe, have it towed to thenearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeror other qualified maintenance or repairfacility for further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicleProper use of the vehicle requires that you arefamiliar with the following information andrules:Rthe safety precautions in this manualRthe “Technical data” section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
G Warning!Various warning labels are attached to yourvehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of variousrisks. You should not remove any of thesewarning labels unless explicitly instructedto do so by information on the label itself.Removal of any of these labels may causeyou and others to be unaware of certainrisks which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
23
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you tocontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand corrected if required. If the matter is nothandled to your satisfaction, please discussthe problem with the Mercedes-Benz Centermanagement or, if necessary, contact us atone of the following addresses:In the USA:Customer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In Canada:Customer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966”.
Reporting safety defectsIf you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go towww.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromwww.safercar.gov.
Introduction
Z
Vehicle data recording
24
Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronicrecording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code§ 9951)Please note that your vehicle is equipped withdevices that can record vehicle systems dataand, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, maytransmit some data in certain accidents.This information helps, for example, todiagnose vehicle systems after a collision andto continuously improve vehicle safety.Daimler may access the information andshare it with othersRfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposesRwith the consent of the vehicle owner or
lesseeRin response to an official request by law
enforcement or other government agencyRfor use in dispute resolution involving
Daimler, its affiliates or sales/serviceorganization and/orRas otherwise required or permitted by law.Please check the Tele Aid subscriptionservice agreement for details regarding the
information that may be recorded ortransmitted via that system.
Introduction
25
Exterior view ....................................... 26Cockpit ................................................. 28Instrument cluster .............................. 30Storage compartments ....................... 32Multifunction steering wheel ............. 35Center console .................................... 37Overhead control panel ...................... 40Door control panel .............................. 41
At a glance
Exterior view
26
Exterior view
At a glance
Exterior view
27
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Pleasebe aware that your vehicle might not be equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function Page
1 Trunk/tailgate:
Locking and unlocking 80
Opening and closing 86,89
Valet locking 93
Vehicle tool kit 290
2 Rear lamps 349
3 Rear window defroster 193
4 Fuel filler flap 240
Fuel requirements 399
5 Doors:
Locking and unlocking 80
Opening 84
Function Page
Locking and unlockingmanually
343,344
6 Towing eye bolt 372
General information 372
7 Tires and wheels 384
Checking tire inflationpressure 255
Spare wheel 293
Flat tire 355
8 Front lamps 349
9 Hood 241
Engine oil 243
Coolant 245
Function Page
a Wipers:
Wiper blades, replacing 352
Wiper blades, cleaning 285
b Windshield:
Cleaning with washer fluid 119
Cleaning 285
c Roof:
Power tilt/sliding sunroof 194
Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel (sedan) 197
d Exterior rear view mirrors 107
Parking position 109
e Headlamp cleaning system 114
At a glance
Z
Cockpit
28
Cockpit
At a glance
Cockpit
29
Function Page
1 Combination switch:
Turn signals 114
Wipers 118
High beam 113
2 Steering wheel gearshiftcontrol (sedan) 134
Steering wheel gearshiftcontrol(E 63 AMG only), (wagon) 134
3 Cruise control lever:
Cruise control 161
Distronic (E 63 AMG only) 166
4 Instrument cluster 30
5 Multifunction steeringwheel
35,140
6 Horn
Function Page
7 Lever for Voice ControlSystem, see separateoperating instructions
8 Front Parktronic warningindicator (sedan) 176
9 Dual-zone automaticclimate control 180
4-zone automatic climatecontrol 182
a Overhead control panel 40
b Mobile phone/Glasses box 217
c Glove box lid release, glovebox lock 217
d Glove box 217
Function Page
e COMAND system, seeseparate operatinginstructions
f Center console 37
g Starter switch 94
h Steering wheel adjustmentstalk 105
Heated steering wheel(Canada only) 106
j Parking brake pedal 128
k Parking brake release 128
l Door control panel 41
m Exterior lamp switch 111
n On-board diagnostics(OBD) socket
o Hood lock release 241
At a glance
Z
Instrument cluster
30
Instrument cluster
At a glance
Instrument cluster
31
Function Page
1 L Left turn signalindicator lamp
2 v ESP® warning lamp 335
3 Speedometer
4 Multifunction display 141
5 l Distance warninglamp2 336
6 K Right turn signalindicator lamp
7 Coolant temperatureindicator with: 138
D Coolant temperaturewarning lamp 339
8 Tachometer with:
1 SupplementalRestraint System (SRS)indicator lamp 334
Function Page
- Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) indicatorlamp 331
< Seat belt telltale 333
B Low-beam headlampindicator lamp 111
A High-beam headlampindicator lamp 113
9 Main odometer with:
Gear selector lever position 124
Program mode 133
a Clock with: 152
; Brake warning lamp,USA only 331
3 Brake warning lamp,Canada only 332
Function Page
ú Engine malfunctionindicator lamp, USA only 338
± Engine malfunctionindicator lamp, Canada only 338
H Low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale
257,340
q Preglow indicatorlamp, diesel engine only 125
b Fuel display with:
A Fuel tank reservewarning lamp 337
c Reset button for:
Resetting trip odometer 139
Adjusting instrumentcluster illumination 138
Confirming new timesettings 152
2 Vehicles without Distronic: Warning lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running.
At a glance
Z
Storage compartments
32
Storage compartments
At a glance
Storage compartments
33
Function Page
1 Glove box 217
2 Front passenger seatstorage compartment withfirst aid kit 290
3 Door pocket
4 Ashtray 223
5 Storage bag 218
6 Door pocket
7 Storage compartment
8 Luggage box under thetrunk floor (sedan) 294
9 Hook (sedan) 204
a Door pocket
b Storage bag 218
c Ashtray 223
d Door pocket
e Driver’s seat storagecompartment
f Sun visor card clip
Function Page
g Ashtray with cigarettelighter 222
h Mobile phone/Glasses box 217
j Parcel net in frontpassenger footwell 203
k Storage compartment withcup holders 219
l Rear storage compartmentin the rear center console 218
m Cup holder in the reararmrest 220
n Storage compartment inthe rear armrest 218
At a glance
Z
Storage compartments
34
Function Page
1 Storage box (Canada only) 212
2 Storage compartment
3 Folding box (E 63 AMG) 216
4 Storage compartment
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
35
Multifunction steering wheel Function Page
1 Multifunction display 141
2 Press button æ or ç
• to select submenus inthe Settings menu 150
• to set values
• to operate theRACETIMER3 145
• to set the volume
3 Press button s
• to take a call 158
• to dial4 158
• to redial4 158
Press button t
• to end a call 158
• to reject an incomingcall 158
Function Page
4 Press button è or ·to select next/previousmenu 139
5 Press button j or kbriefly
• to move within a menu
• to select previous ornext track, scene orstored station withinAudio/DVD menu 146
• to switch to the phonebook and select a nameor number withinTelephone menu 158
3 AMG vehicles only.4 Function only available in telephone menu.
At a glance
Z
Multifunction steering wheel
36
Function Page
Press and hold buttonj or k
• to select previous ornext track with quick 146
Function Pagesearch or to selectprevious or next stationin station list or wave
Function Pageband within Audio/DVD menu
• to start the quicksearch in the phonebook within Telephonemenu 158
At a glance
Center console
37
Center console
Upper part
At a glance
Z
Center console
38
Function Page
1 Seat heating, driver’s side 102
2 Rear window sunshadeswitch (sedan) 222
3 Rear seat head restraintsswitch, folding down(sedan) 98
4 Hazard warning flasherswitch 114
5 Front passenger front airbag off indicator lamp 53
6 Central unlocking switch 85
7 Alarm system indicatorlamp 76
8 Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP®) controlswitch 74
9 Seat heating, frontpassenger side 102
a Seat ventilation, frontpassenger side 101
Function Page
b Central locking switch 85
c Seat ventilation, driver’sside 101
At a glance
Center console
39
Lower part Function Page
1 Ashtray 222
2 KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton 94
3 Gear selector lever forautomatic transmission 130
4 Parking assist (Parktronicsystem) deactivationswitch (sedan) 177
5 Adaptive Damping System(ADS) switch5 171
6 Vehicle level controlswitch5 172
7 Thumbwheel for settingdistance for Distronic6 168
8 Distance warning functionon/off switch6 171
9 Program mode selectorswitch for automatictransmission 133
5 Only available on E 550, E 550 4MATIC and E 63 AMG.6 Only available on E 63 AMG.
At a glance
Z
Overhead control panel
40
Overhead control panel Function Page
1 Rear interior lighting on/off 116
2 Automatic interior lighting 116
3 Front interior lighting on/off 116
4 Right reading lamp on/off 116
5 Tilt/sliding sunroof or 194
tilt/sliding panel switch(sedan) 197
6 Tele Aid (emergency callsystem) button 226
7 Rear view mirror 107
8 Front reading lamps 116
9 Garage door opener 231
a Hands-free microphone forTele Aid (emergency callsystem), telephone, andVoice Control System, seeseparate operatinginstructions
b Ambient lighting 154
Function Page
c Interior lighting 116
d Left front reading lamp on/off 116
At a glance
Door control panel
41
Door control panel Function Page
1 Inside door handle 84
2 Seat adjustment 97
3 Memory function (forstoring seat, exterior mirrorand steering wheelsettings) 109
4 Exterior rear view mirroradjustment 107
5 Switches for opening/closing front and rear sidewindows, rear windowoverride switch 120
6 Remote trunk releaseswitch, trunk opening/closing system (sedan) 87
Remote tailgate releaseswitch, tailgate openingsystem (wagon) 87
At a glance
Z
42
43
Vehicle equipment .............................. 44Occupant safety .................................. 44Panic alarm .......................................... 70Driving safety systems ....................... 70Anti-theft systems .............................. 76
Safety and security
Occupant safety
44
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes allfeatures, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.
Occupant safety
IntroductionIn this section you will learn the mostimportant facts about the restraint systemcomponents of the vehicle.The restraint systems areRSeat beltsRChild restraintsRLower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH)Additional protection potential is provided by:RSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with
- Air bags- Air bag control unit (with crash sensors)- Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for
seat belts- Seat belt force limiter
RActive head restraintsRPreventive occupant safety (PRE-SAFE®)RAir bag system components with
- Front passenger front air bag offindicator lamp
- Front passenger seat with OccupantClassification System (OCS)
Although the systems are independent, theirprotective functions work in conjunction witheach other.G Warning!Modifications to or work improperlyconducted on restraint systemcomponents or their wiring, as well astampering with interconnected electronicsystems, can lead to the restraint systemsno longer functioning as intended.Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs), for example, could deployinadvertently or fail to deploy in accidentsalthough the deceleration threshold for airbag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,never modify the restraint systems. Do nottamper with electronic components or theirsoftware.
i For information on infants and childrentraveling with you in the vehicle andrestraint systems for infants and children,
Safety and security
Occupant safety
45
see “Children in thevehicle” (Y page 62).
SRS indicator lampThe SRS system conducts a self-test whenthe ignition is switched on and in regularintervals while the engine is running. Thisfacilitates detection of system malfunctions.The 1 indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster comes on when the ignition isswitched on and goes out no later than a fewseconds after the engine has been started.The SRS components are in operationalreadiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not litwhen the engine is running.A malfunction in the system has beendetected if the 1 indicator lampRfails to go out after approximately
4 seconds after the engine is startedRdoes not come on at allRcomes on after the engine was started or
while driving
G Warning!In the event that the 1 indicator lampcomes on while driving or does not comeon at all, the SRS self-check has detected
a malfunction. For your safety, we stronglyrecommend that you contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center immediately tohave the system checked; otherwise theSRS may not deploy when needed in anaccident, which could result in serious orfatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedlyand unnecessarily which could also resultin injury.In addition, improper work on the SRScreates a risk of rendering the SRSinoperative or causing unintended air bagdeployment. Work on the SRS musttherefore only be performed by qualifiedtechnicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.If it is necessary to modify an air bag systemto accommodate a person with disabilities,contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call our Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) for details.
Air bags
G Warning!Air bags are designed to reduce thepotential of injury and fatality in certainfrontal impacts (front air bags), sideimpacts (side impact air bags and windowcurtain air bags), or rollovers (windowcurtain air bags). However, no systemavailable today can completely eliminateinjuries and fatalities.The deployment of the air bags temporarilyreleases a small amount of dust from theair bags. This dust, however, is neitherinjurious to your health, nor does it indicatea fire in the vehicle. The dust might causesome temporary breathing difficulty forpeople with asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, you may wish to getout of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. If you have any breathing difficulty butcannot get out of the vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening awindow or door.
G Warning!To reduce the risk of injury when the frontair bags inflate, it is very important for thedriver and front passenger to always be in
Safety and security
Z
Occupant safety
46
a properly seated position and to wear theirrespective seat belt.For maximum protection in the event of acollision always be in normal seatedposition with your back against the seatbackrest. Fasten your seat belt and makesure it is properly positioned on your body.Since the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at asafe distance from the air bag. Occupantswho are not wearing their seat belt, are notseated properly or are too close to the airbag can be seriously injured or killed by anair bag as it inflates with great forceinstantaneously:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in
a position that is as upright as possiblewith your back against the seat backrest.RMove the driver seat as far back as
possible, still permitting properoperation of vehicle controls. Thedistance from the center of the driver’schest to the center of the air bag coveron the steering wheel must be at least10 inches (25 cm) or more. You shouldbe able to accomplish this by adjusting
the seat and steering wheel. If you haveany difficulties, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.RDo not lean your head or chest close to
the steering wheel or dashboard.RKeep hands on the outside of the steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms insidethe rim can increase the risk andpotential severity of hand/arm injurywhen the driver front air bag inflates.RAdjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboardwhen the seat is occupied.ROccupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean theirheads in the area of the door where theside impact air bag inflates. This couldresult in serious injuries or death shouldthe side impact air bag be deployed.Always sit as upright as possible, wearthe seat belt properly and use anappropriately sized infant restraint,toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight ofthe child.
Failure to follow these instructions canresult in severe injuries to you or otheroccupants.If you sell your vehicle, it is important thatyou make the buyer aware of this safetyinformation. Be sure to give the buyer thisOperator’s Manual.
G Warning!Accident research shows that the safestplace for children in an automobile is in therear seat.There is a possibility for a side impact airbag-related injury if occupants, especiallychildren, are not properly seated orrestrained when next to a side impact airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a sideimpact in order to do its job.To help avoid the possibility of injury,please follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children,should never place their bodiesor lean their heads in the area ofthe door where the side impactair bags inflates. This couldresult in serious injuries or death
Safety and security
Occupant safety
47
should the side impact air bagsbe deployed.
(2) Always sit as upright as possible,properly use the seat belts, andfor children 12 years old andunder, use an appropriatelysized infant restraint, toddlerrestraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size andweight of the child.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.If you believe that, even with the use ofthese guidelines, it would be safer for yourrear seat occupants to have the rearmounted side impact air bags deactivated,then deactivation can be carried out uponyour written request at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center at an additionalcost.Please contact an local authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or call theCustomer Assistance Center (in the USA)at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (inCanada) at 1-800-387-0100 for details.
Air bags are designed to deploy only in certainfrontal impacts (front air bags), side impacts(side impact and window curtain air bags)
which exceed preset deployment thresholds,and in certain rollovers (window curtain airbags). Only in the event of such a situationwill they provide their supplementalprotection.The driver and passengers should alwayswear their seat belts. Otherwise it is notpossible for the air bags to provide theirsupplemental protection.In case of other types of impacts and impactsbelow air bag deployment thresholds, airbags will not deploy. The driver andpassengers will then be protected to theextent possible by a properly fastened seatbelt. A properly fastened seat belt is alsoneeded to provide the best possibleprotection in a rollover.Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.Always wear your seat belt, regardless ofwhether or not your vehicle is equipped withair bags.It is important to your safety and that of yourpassengers that you replace deployed airbags and repair any malfunctioning air bagsto make sure the vehicle will continue toprovide supplemental crash protection foroccupants.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)and air bag
G Warning!RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that
have been subjected to stress in anaccident must be replaced and theiranchoring points must also be checked.Only use seat belts installed or suppliedby an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) containperchlorate material, which may requirespecial handling and regard for theenvironment. Check with your localgovernment’s disposal guidelines.California residents, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to
function on a one-time-only basis. An airbag or ETD that is deployed must bereplaced.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
Safety and security
Z
Occupant safety
48
RDo not make any modification that couldchange the effectiveness of the seatbelts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this
may severely weaken them. In a crashthey may not be able to provide adequateprotection.RNo modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of theSRS. This includes changing or removingany component or part of the SRS, theinstallation of additional trim material,seat covers, badges, etc. over thesteering wheel hub, front passenger frontair bag cover, outboard sides of the seatbackrests, door trim panels, or doorframe trims, and installation of additionalelectrical/electronic equipment on ornear SRS components and wiring. Keeparea between air bags and occupantsfree of objects (e.g. packages, purses,umbrellas, etc.).RDo not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over thedoor. These items may be thrown aroundin the vehicle and cause head and otherinjuries when the window curtain air bagis deployed.
RAir bag system components will be hotafter an air bag has inflated. Do not touchthem.RNever place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RIn addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRSinoperative or causing unintended air bagdeployment. Work on the SRS musttherefore only be performed by qualifiedtechnicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RFor your protection and the protection of
others, when scrapping the air bag unitor ETD, our safety instructions must befollowed. These instructions are availablefrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RGiven the considerable deployment
speed, required inflation volume, and thematerial of the air bags, there is thepossibility of abrasions or other,potentially more serious injuriesresulting from air bag deployment.
If you sell your vehicle, we stronglyrecommend that you inform the subsequent
owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRSand refer them to the applicable section in theOperator’s Manual.
Front air bags
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 47.
1 Driver front air bag2 Front passenger front air bagThe front air bags are designed to provideincreased protection for the driver and frontpassenger against the risk of injuries to thehead and thorax.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
49
Driver and front passenger front air bags aredeployedRin the event of certain frontal impactsRif impact exceeds a preset deployment
thresholdRif the system determines that air bag
deployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRdepending on whether the seat belt is in
useRindependently of the side impact air bags
and/or the window curtain air bagsThe front air bags in this vehicle have beendesigned to inflate in two stages. This allowsthe air bags to have different rates of inflationthat are based on the vehicle decelerationrate as assessed by the air bag control unit.On the front passenger side, front air bag2 deployment is additionally influenced bythe passenger’s weight category as identifiedby the Occupant Classification System (OCS)(Y page 50).The lighter the front passenger sideoccupant, the higher the vehicle decelerationrate required for second stage inflation offront air bag 2.
The air bags will not deploy in impacts whichdo not exceed the system’s presetdeployment thresholds. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belts.The front air bags will not deploy in the eventof a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate oflongitudinal deceleration or accelerationexceeds the preset deployment threshold forthe front air bags.The front passenger front air bag 2 will onlybe deployed ifRthe system, based on OCS weight sensor
readings, detects that the front passengerseat is occupiedRthe 75 indicator lamp in the
center console is not lit (Y page 53)Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
Side impact air bags
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 47.
Example illustration sedan1 Front side impact air bag2 Rear side impact air bagWhen deployed, the side impact air bags aredesigned to provide increased protection forthe thorax (but not the head, neck and arms)of the occupants on the side of the vehicle onwhich the impact occurs.The side impact air bags are deployedRon the impacted side of the vehicleRin side impacts exceeding a preset
deployment thresholdRregardless of whether the seat belt is in use
Safety and security
Z
Occupant safety
50
Rindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsThe side impact air bags are not deployed inside impacts which do not exceed thesystem’s deployment threshold.The side air bags will not deploy in the eventof a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of lateraldeceleration or acceleration exceeds thepreset deployment threshold for the side airbags.G Warning!Only use seat covers which have beentested and approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle model. Using other seat coversmay interfere with or prevent thedeployment of the front side impact airbags. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.
Window curtain air bags
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 47.
Example illustration sedan1 Window curtain air bagWhen deployed, window curtain air bags 1are designed to provide increased protectionfor the head (but not the chest or arms) of theoccupants on the side of the vehicle on whichthe impact occurs.Window curtain air bags 1 are deployedRon the impacted side of the vehicleRin side impacts exceeding a preset
deployment thresholdRindependently of the front air bags
Rregardless of whether the front passengerseat is occupiedRin certain vehicle rollovers, if the system
determines that air bag deployment canoffer additional protection to that providedby the seat belt
Window curtain air bags 1 are not deployedin impacts which do not exceed the system’sdeployment threshold.Window curtain air bags 1 deploy in the areaindicated by the arrows.
Occupant Classification SystemThe Occupant Classification System (OCS)automatically turns the front passenger frontair bag on or off based on the classifiedoccupant weight category determined byweight sensor readings from the frontpassenger seat.The system does not deactivate the frontpassenger side impact air bag, the windowcurtain air bag and the Emergency TensioningDevices (ETDs).Occupants must sit with the seat beltproperly fastened in a position that is asupright as possible with their back against theseat backrest and feet on the floor to becorrectly classified. If the occupant’s weight
Safety and security
Occupant safety
51
is transferred to another object in the vehicle(e.g. by leaning on armrests), the OCS maynot be able to properly approximate theoccupant’s weight category.Furthermore, the occupant weight mayappear to increase or decrease due to thefollowing: objects hanging on the seat, lodgedunderneath the seat, stuffed between theseat and middle console or the seat and door,other passengers pushing on the seat, orobjects applying pressure to the back of theseat. Always make sure the seat hasclearance in all directions at all times.
i If your seat, including the trim cover andcushion, needs to be serviced in any way,take the vehicle to an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
Only seat accessories approved byMercedes-Benz may be used.Both the driver and the front passengershould always use the 75indicator lamp as an indication of whether ornot the front passenger is properlypositioned.G Warning!If the 75 indicator lampilluminates when an adult or someone
larger than a small individual is in the frontpassenger seat, have the front passengerre-position himself or herself in the seatuntil the 75 indicator lampgoes out, or check whether objects arecaught under or around the seat.In the event of a collision, the air bag controlunit will not allow front passenger front airbag deployment when the OCS hasclassified the front passenger seatoccupant as weighting as much as or lessthan a typical 12-month-old child in astandard child restraint or if the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified asbeing up to or less than the weight of atypical 12-month-old child in a standardchild restraint, the 75indicator lamp will illuminate when theengine is started and remain illuminated,indicating that the front passenger front airbag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty,the 75 indicator lamp willilluminate when the engine is started and
remain illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified asbeing heavier than the weight of a typical12-month-old child seated in a standardchild restraint or as being a small individual(such as a young teenager or a small adult),the 75 indicator lamp willilluminate for approximately 6 secondswhen the engine is started and then,depending on occupant weight sensorreadings from the seat, remain illuminatedor go out. With the 75indicator lamp illuminated, the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. Withthe 75 indicator lamp out, thefront passenger front air bag is activated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as anadult or someone larger than a smallindividual, the 75 indicatorlamp will illuminate for approximately 6seconds when the engine is started andthen go out, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is activated.
Safety and security
Z
Occupant safety
52
If the 75 indicator lamp isilluminated, the front passenger front airbag is deactivated and will not be deployed.If the 75 indicator lamp is notilluminated, the front passenger front airbag is activated and will be deployedRin the event of certain frontal impactsRif impact exceeds a preset deployment
thresholdRindependently of the side impact air bagsIf the front passenger front air bag isdeployed, the rate of inflation will beinfluenced byRthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
as assessed by the air bag control unitRthe front passenger’s weight category as
identified by the OCS
For more information on air bag displaymessages, see (Y page 299).G Warning!According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seating positions than in the frontseating position. Thus, we stronglyrecommend that children be placed in the
rear seats whenever possible. Regardlessof seating position, children 12 years oldand under must be seated and properlysecured in an appropriate infant restraint,toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.The infant or child restraint must beproperly secured with the vehicle’s seatbelt, the seat belt and top tether strap, orlower anchors and top tether strap, fully inaccordance with the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions.Occupants, especially children, shouldalways sit as upright as possible, wear theseat belt properly and use an appropriatelysized infant restraint, toddler restraint, orbooster seat recommended for the size andweight of the child.Children can be killed or seriously injuredby an inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to deactivate thefront passenger front air bag in yourvehicle when the system senses the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child orless along with the weight of a standardappropriate child restraint on the frontpassenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the frontpassenger front air bag inflates in acollision which could occur under somecircumstances, even with the air bagtechnology installed in your vehicle. Theonly means to completely eliminate thisrisk is to never place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. Wetherefore strongly recommend that youalways place a child in a rear-facing childrestraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seatbecause circumstances require you to doso, make sure the 75indicator lamp is illuminated, indicatingthat the front passenger front air bag isdeactivated. Should the 75indicator lamp not illuminate or go outwhile the restraint is installed, pleasecheck installation. Periodically check the75 indicator lamp while
Safety and security
Occupant safety
53
driving to make sure the75 indicator lamp isilluminated. If the 75indicator lamp goes out or remains out,do not transport a child on the frontpassenger seat until the system has beenrepaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint onthe front passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the frontpassenger front air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
facing child restraint on the frontpassenger seat, move the seat as farback as possible, use the proper childrestraint recommended for the age, sizeand weight of the child, and secure childrestraint with the vehicle’s seat beltaccording to the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions. For childrenlarger than the typical 12-month-oldchild, the front passenger front air bagmay or may not be activated.
Deployment of the driver front air bag doesnot mean that the front passenger front airbag also should have deployed.
The OCS may have determined:Rthat the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical12-month-old child seated in a standardchild restraint – both instances where thesystem suppresses deployment of the frontpassenger front air bag even though theimpact met the criteria and was ofsufficient severity to deploy the driver frontair bagRthat the seat was occupied by a small
individual (such as a young teenager or asmall adult) or a child who weighs morethan the weight of a typical 12-month-oldchild in a standard child restraint – both ofwhich are instances where the system maysuppress deployment of the frontpassenger front air bag even though theimpact met the criteria and was ofsufficient severity to deploy the driver frontair bag
1 Front passenger front air bag off indicatorlamp
The 75 indicator lamp 1 will beilluminated, except with the SmartKeyremoved from the starter switch or with thestarter switch in position 0.G Warning!If the 1 indicator lamp and the75 indicator lamp are lit at thesame time, there is a malfunction in theOCS. The front passenger front air bag willbe deactivated in this case. Have thesystem checked as soon as possible byqualified technicians. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Only have the seat repaired or replaced atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Safety and security
Z
Occupant safety
54
In order to ensure proper operation of theair bag system and OCS:RDo not place more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into
the storage bag on the back of the frontpassenger seat. Otherwise, the OCS maynot be able to properly approximate theoccupant weight category.RDo not place objects under and/or
around the front passenger seat.RDo not hang anything from or attach any
items to the seats.RDo not stuff objects such as books
between the front passenger seat andthe center console or front passengerdoor.RDo not move the front passenger seat
backwards against stiff objects.RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in
a position that is as upright as possiblewith your back against the seat backrest.RWhile seated, an occupant should not
position him/herself in such a way as tocause the occupant’s weight to be liftedfrom the seat bottom as this may resultin the OCS being unable to correctly
approximate the occupant’s weightcategory.RRead and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
Occupant Classification System Self-testAfter turning the SmartKey in the starterswitch to position 1 or 2 or pressing theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button once ortwice, the 75 indicator lampilluminates. If an adult occupant is properlysitting on the front passenger seat and thesystem classifies the occupant as an adult,the 75 indicator lamp willilluminate and go out after approximately 6seconds.If the seat is not occupied and the systemclassifies the front passenger seat as beingempty, the 75 indicator lampwill illuminate and not go out.G Warning!If the 75 indicator lamp doesnot illuminate, the system is notfunctioning. You must contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center before
seating any child on the front passengerseat.
For more information, see the “Practicalhints” section (Y page 341).G Warning!Never place anything between seat cushionand child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reducesthe effectiveness of the OCS. The bottomand back of the child seat must make fullcontact with the passenger seat cushionand backrest.If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passengerseat backrest.An incorrectly mounted child seat couldcause injuries to the child in case of anaccident, instead of increasing protectionfor the child.Follow the manufacturer’s instructions forinstallation of child seats.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
55
Seat belts
Safety notesThe use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in all 50states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.territories and all Canadian provinces.Even where this is not the case, all vehicleoccupants should have their seat beltsfastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.For information on infants and childrentraveling with you in the vehicle and restraintsystems for infants and children, see“Children in the vehicle” (Y page 62).G Warning!Always fasten your seat belt before drivingoff. Always make sure all of yourpassengers are properly restrained. Youand your passengers should always wearseat belts.Failure to wear and properly fasten andposition your seat belt greatly increasesyour risk of injuries and their likely severityin an accident.If you are ever in an accident, your injuriescan be considerably more severe withoutyour seat belt properly buckled. Withoutyour seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or beejected from it. You can be seriously injuredor killed.In the same crash, the possibility of injuryor death is lessened if you are properlywearing your seat belt. The air bags canonly protect as intended if the occupantsare properly wearing their seat belts.
G Warning!Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined positionas this can be dangerous. You could slideunder the seat belt in a collision. If you slideunder it, the seat belt would apply force atthe abdomen or neck. That could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The seatbackrest and seat belt provide the bestrestraint when the wearer is in a positionthat is as upright as possible and the seatbelt is properly positioned on the body.
G Warning!Never let more people ride in the vehiclethan there are seat belts available. Makesure everyone riding in the vehicle iscorrectly restrained with a separate seatbelt. Never use a seat belt for more thanone person at a time.
G Warning!Damaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced and their anchoringpoints must also be checked.Only use seat belts which have beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.Do not make any modifications to the seatbelts. This can lead to unintendedactivation of the ETDs or to their failure toactivate when necessary.Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.Have all work carried out only by qualifiedtechnicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
Proper use of seat belts
G Warning!USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in anyother way than as described in this
Safety and security
Z
Occupant safety
56
section, as that could result in seriousinjuries in case of an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts helpreduce the likelihood of and potentialseverity of injuries in accidents, includingrollovers. The integrated restraint systemincludes SRS (driver front air bag, frontpassenger front air bag, side impact airbags, window curtain air bags for sidewindows), Emergency TensioningDevices (ETDs), seat belt force limiters,and front seat knee bolsters.The system is designed to enhance theprotection offered to properly beltedoccupants in certain frontal (front airbags and ETDs) and side (side impact airbags, window curtain air bags, and ETDs)impacts which exceed presetdeployment thresholds and in certainrollovers (window curtain air bags andETDs).RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off yourshoulder. In a frontal crash, your bodywould move too far forward. That wouldincrease the chance of head and neckinjuries. The seat belt would also apply
too much force to the ribs or abdomen,which could severely injure internalorgans such as your liver or spleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder (it should nottouch the neck). Never pass the shoulderportion of the seat belt under your arm.For this purpose, you can adjust theheight of the seat belt outlet.RPosition the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across theabdomen. If the lap belt is positionedacross your abdomen, it could causeserious injuries in a crash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing,such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., asthese might cause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
snugly. Take special care of this whenwearing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat beltaround a person and another person orother objects at the same time.
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. Ina crash, you would not have the full widthof the seat belt to distribute impactforces. The twisted seat belt against yourbody could cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use
a lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possibleon the hips to avoid any possiblepressure on the abdomen.RPlace the seat backrest in a position that
is as upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to
make sure it is properly positioned.RNever place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
restraints, toddler restraints, or childrenin booster seats, always follow the childseat manufacturer’s instructions.
G Warning!Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges.They could tear.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
57
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught inthe door or in the seat adjustmentmechanism. This could damage the seatbelt.Never attempt to make modifications toseat belts. This could impair theeffectiveness of the seat belts.
Fastening the seat belts
G Warning!According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seating positions than in the frontseating position. Thus, we stronglyrecommend that children be placed in therear seats whenever possible. Regardlessof seating position, children 12 years oldand under must be seated and properlysecured in an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see“Children in the vehicle”.A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicleand/or the child is not properly secured inthe child restraint.
1 Seat belt outlet2 Latch plate3 Buckle4 Seat belt release button
X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt outof seat belt outlet 1.
X Place the shoulder portion of the seat beltacross the top of your shoulder and the lapportion across your hips.
X Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until itclicks.
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to thecorrect height.
X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to asnug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
Seat belt outlet height adjustment
1 Seat belt height adjuster2 Release button
X Raising: Slide seat belt height adjuster1 upward.Seat belt height adjuster 1 engages indifferent positions.
Safety and security
Z
Occupant safety
58
X Lowering: Press and hold release button2.
X Slide seat belt height adjuster 1downward.
X Release button 2 and make sure seat beltheight adjuster 1 engages into place.
Releasing the seat beltsX Press seat belt release button 4
(Y page 57).Allow the retractor to completely rewindthe seat belt by guiding latch plate 2(Y page 57).
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully sothat the seat belt and/or latch plate cannotget caught or pinched in the door or in theseat mechanism. This can damage the seatbelt and impair its effectiveness, and/orcause damage to the door and/or door trimpanel. Such damage is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.Damaged seat belts must be replaced.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
Enhanced seat belt reminder systemWhen the engine is started, the seat belttelltale < will always illuminate for6 seconds to remind you and your passengersto fasten your seat belts.If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened whenthe engine is started, an additional warningchime will also sound for a maximum of6 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt isfastened.If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or thefront passenger’s seat belt (with the frontpassenger seat occupied) is not fastened withfront doors closed,Rthe seat belt telltale < remains
illuminated for as long as either the driver’sor front passenger’s seat belt is notfastened.Rand if the vehicle speed once exceeds
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale< starts flashing and a warning chimesounds with increasing intensity for amaximum of 60 seconds or until thedriver’s and front passenger’s seat belt arefastened.If you and/or your passenger release theseat belt during driving, the seat belt
telltale < starts flashing and thewarning chime sounds as described before.If the driver’s or the front passenger’s seatbelt remains unfastened after 60 seconds,the warning chime stops sounding, the seatbelt telltale < stops flashing butcontinues to be illuminated.After a vehicle standstill, the warning chimeis reactivated and the seat belt telltale< is flashing again if the vehicle speedonce exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
The seat belt telltale < will only go out ifboth the driver’s and the front passenger’sseat belt (with the front passenger seatoccupied) are fastened, or the vehicle isstanding still and a front door is opened.For more information, see “Practicalhints” (Y page 333).
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD),seat belt force limiterThe seat belts for the front seats and rearouter seats (sedan) or front seats and secondrow outer seats (wagon) are equipped withETDs and seat belt force limiters.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
59
The ETDs are designed to activate in thefollowing cases:Rin frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding
the system’s preset deployment thresholdRin side impacts exceeding the system’s
preset deployment threshold on the farside of the impactRin certain vehicle rolloversRif the restraint systems are operational and
functioning correctly, see 1 indicatorlamp (Y page 45)
The ETDs for the front seats will only activateif the front seat belts are fastened (latch plateproperly inserted into buckle).The ETDs for the rear outer seats (sedan) orsecond row outer seats (wagon) will activatewith or without the respective seat beltsfastened.In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from theseat belts in such a way that the seat belts fitmore snugly against the body. Seat belt forcelimiters, when activated, are employed tohelp reduce the peak force exerted by theseat belts on occupants during a crash.
i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seatposition or incorrectly worn seat belts.
The ETDs do not pull occupants backtoward the seat backrest.
G Warning!Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated mustbe replaced.For your safety, when disposing of thepyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safetyinstructions. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat beltAn automatic comfort-fit feature for the frontseats reduces the retracting force of the seatbelts when they are in normal use.
Preventive occupant safety (PRE-SAFE®)
G Warning!PRE-SAFE® is intended to reduce theeffects of an accident on vehicle occupantswho are wearing their seat belt properly.Despite having the PRE-SAFE® system inyour vehicle, the possibility of injuriesoccurring as a result of an accident cannotbe eliminated. Therefore, you shouldalways drive carefully and adjust your
driving to the prevailing road, weather, andtraffic conditions.
Your vehicle takes preventive measures tobetter protect the occupants in the followinghazardous situations automatically.PRE-SAFE® takes preventive measures inRemergency braking situations, e.g. if the
Brake Assist System (BAS) (Y page 72) isactivatedRcritical dynamic driving situations, e.g.
when the vehicle is understeering oroversteering because it has exceeded itsphysical limitations or in case of evasivesteering maneuvers at speeds aboveapproximately 85 mph (140 km/h)
When you are driving faster than 20 mph(30 km/h), PRE-SAFE® takes the followingmeasures in such situations:RThe front seat belts are pre-tensioned
automatically.RIf the passenger seat is in an unfavorable
position, it will be adjusted to a betterposition.RIf the vehicle is in a critical dynamic driving
situation, the door windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof also closes until only a smallgap remains.
Safety and security
Z
Occupant safety
60
If the closing procedure of the door windowsor tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked, the doorwindows or tilt/sliding sunroof will stop andopen slightly.Once the hazardous situation is over withoutan accident occurring, the seat belt pre-tensioning is deactivated. You can readjust allof the settings made by PRE-SAFE®.If the seat belts do not release:X Adjust the seat backrest or seat slightly to
the rear until the seat belt tension isdiminished.The locking mechanism releases.
! When moving the seats, make sure thereare no items in the footwell or behind theseats. Otherwise, you could damage theseats.
Active head restraintsThe active head restraints are intended tooffer the driver and front passenger increasedprotection from whiplash-type injuries. In theevent of a rear-end collision, the active headrestraints on the driver’s and frontpassenger’s seat are designed to moveforward in the direction of travel, providingthe head with increased support earlier on inthe collision sequence. The active headrestraints move forward whether the seat isoccupied or not.G Warning!Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) tothe head restraint posts. Otherwise, theactive head restraints may not be able tofunction properly or offer the intendeddegree of protection they were designed forin the event of a rear-end collision.
If the active head restraints have beentriggered in an accident, the active headrestraints must be reset. Otherwise, theactive head restraints cannot offer anyadditional protection in the event of anotherrear-end collision.For information on resetting the activatedactive head restraints, see “Resettingactivated head restraints” (Y page 345).
You cannot remove the active head restrainton the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.G Warning!Only use seat or head restraint coverswhich have been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.Using other seat or head restraint coversmay interfere with or prevent the activationof the active head restraints and/or thedeployment of the front side impact airbags.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter for availability.
G Warning!For your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint so that it is asclose to the head as possible and the centerof the head restraint supports the back ofthe head at eye level. This will reduce thepotential for injury to the head and neck inthe event of an accident or similar situation.
For information on head restraint adjustment,see “Head restraints” (Y page 97).
Safety and security
Occupant safety
61
Correct driver seat adjustment
G Warning!In order to avoid possible loss of vehiclecontrol, all seat, head restraint, steeringwheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, aswell as fastening of seat belts, must bedone before the vehicle is put into motion.
1 Steering wheel2 Seat belt3 SeatSteering wheelG Observe Safety notes, see
page 105.X Position steering wheel 1 properly
(Y page 105).
Make sure:RYou can reach steering wheel 1 with your
arms slightly bent at the elbows.RYou can move your legs freely.RAll displays (including malfunction and
indicator lamps) on the instrument clusterare clearly visible.
Seat beltG Observe Safety notes, see
page 55.X Fasten and position your seat belt 2
(Y page 57) correctly.Make sure:RSeat belt 2 is always fitted snugly.RAdjust seat belt 2 so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder.RPlace the lap portion of seat belt 2 as low
as possible on your hips.Seat and head restraintG Observe Safety notes, see
page 95.X Position seat 3 (Y page 96) and head
restraint properly (Y page 97).
Safety and security
Z
Occupant safety
62
Observe the following points:RAlways be in a properly seated position.RThe position should be as far rearward from
the front air bag in steering wheel 1 aspossible, while still permitting properoperation of vehicle controls.RAdjust seat 3 to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach theaccelerator/brake pedal safely.RSeat 3 must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten and position yourseat belt 2.RThe seat backrest must be in a position that
is as nearly upright as possible.RAdjust the seat cushion so that the front
edge of the seat cushion lightly supportsyour legs.RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and thecenter of the head restraint supports theback of the head at eye level.RNever place hands under seat 3 or near
any moving parts while seat 3 is beingadjusted.
Children in the vehicle
Safety notesIf an infant or child is traveling with you in thevehicle:X Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and size ofthe child.
X Make sure the infant or child is properlysecured at all times while the vehicle is inmotion.
G Warning!When leaving the vehicle, always removethe SmartKey from the starter switch.Always take the SmartKey with you andlock the vehicle. Do not leave childrenunattended in the vehicle, even if they aresecured in a child restraint system, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle. A child’sunsupervised access to a vehicle couldresult in an accident and/or seriouspersonal injury. The children couldRinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat orcoldRinjure themselves or cause an accident
with vehicle equipment that can beoperated even if the SmartKey isremoved from the starter switch orremoved from the vehicle, such as seatadjustment, steering wheel adjustment,or the memory function.
If children open a door, they could injureother persons or get out of the vehicle andinjure themselves or be injured by followingtraffic.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
63
Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system’smetal parts, for example, could becomevery hot, and the child could be burned onthese parts.
G Warning!Do not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment, or trunk (sedan),or cargo compartment (wagon) unless theyare firmly secured in place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child’s risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident
For more information on loading, please referto the “Loading and storing” (Y page 200)chapter.
Infant and child restraint systems
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 62.
We recommend all infants and children beproperly restrained at all times while thevehicle is in motion.
All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seatbelt have special seat belt retractors forsecure fastening of child restraints.To fasten a child restraint, follow childrestraint instructions for mounting. Then pullthe shoulder belt out completely and let itretract. During seat belt retraction, aratcheting sound can be heard to indicatethat the special seat belt retractor isactivated. The seat belt is now locked. Pushdown on child restraint to take up any slack.To deactivate, release the seat belt buckleand let the seat belt retract completely. Theseat belt can again be used in the usualmanner.G Warning!Never release the seat belt buckle while thevehicle is in motion, since the special seatbelt retractor will be deactivated.
i Information on child seats with mountingfittings for tether anchorages(Y page 65).For information on LATCH-type child seatanchors (Y page 68).
The use of infant or child restraints is requiredby law in all 50 states, the District of
Columbia, the U.S. territories and allCanadian provinces.Infants and small children should be seatedin an appropriate infant or child restraintsystem, properly secured in accordance withthe manufacturer’s instructions for the childrestraint, that complies with U.S. FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225and Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards 213 and 210.2.A statement by the child restraintmanufacturer of compliance with thesestandards can be found on the instructionlabel on the restraint and in the instructionmanual provided with the restraint.When using any infant restraint, toddlerrestraint, or booster seat, make sure tocarefully read and follow all manufacturer’sinstructions for installation and use.Please read and observe warning labelsaffixed to the inside of the vehicle and toinfant or child restraints.G Warning!According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seating positions than in the frontseating position. Thus, we stronglyrecommend that children be placed in the
Safety and security
Z
Occupant safety
64
rear seats whenever possible. Regardlessof seating position, children 12 years oldand under must be seated and properlysecured in an appropriate infant restraint,toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.The infant or child restraint must beproperly secured with the vehicle’s seatbelt, the seat belt and top tether strap, orlower anchors and top tether strap, fully inaccordance with the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions.Occupants, especially children, shouldalways sit as upright as possible, wear theseat belt properly and use an appropriatelysized infant restraint, toddler restraint, orbooster seat recommended for the size andweight of the child.Children can be killed or seriously injuredby an inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to deactivate thefront passenger front air bag in yourvehicle when the system senses the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child orless along with the weight of a standardappropriate child restraint on the frontpassenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the frontpassenger front air bag inflates in acollision which could occur under somecircumstances, even with the air bagtechnology installed in your vehicle. Theonly means to completely eliminate thisrisk is to never place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. Wetherefore strongly recommend that youalways place a child in a rear-facing childrestraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seatbecause circumstances require you to doso, make sure the 75indicator lamp is illuminated, indicatingthat the front passenger front air bag isdeactivated. Should the 75indicator lamp not illuminate or go outwhile the restraint is installed, pleasecheck installation. Periodically check the75 indicator lamp while
driving to make sure the75 indicator lamp isilluminated. If the 75indicator lamp goes out or remains out,do not transport a child on the frontpassenger seat until the system has beenrepaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint onthe front passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the frontpassenger front air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
facing child restraint on the frontpassenger seat, move the seat as farback as possible, use the proper childrestraint recommended for the age, sizeand weight of the child, and secure childrestraint with the vehicle’s seat beltaccording to the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions. For childrenlarger than the typical 12-month-oldchild, the front passenger front air bagmay or may not be activated.
G Warning!Infants and small children should nevershare a seat belt with another occupant.During an accident, they could be crushedbetween the occupant and seat belt.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
65
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicleand/or the child is not properly secured inthe child restraint.Children too big for a toddler restraint mustride in seats using regular seat belts.Position shoulder belt across chest andshoulder, not face or neck. A booster seatmay be necessary to achieve proper seatbelt positioning for children over 41 lb(18 kg) until they reach a height where alap/shoulder belt fits properly without abooster.When the child restraint is not in use,remove it from the vehicle or secure it withthe seat belt to prevent the child restraintfrom becoming a projectile in the event ofan accident.
Installation of infant and child restraintsystems
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 62.
This vehicle is equipped with tetheranchorages for a top tether strap at each ofthe rear seating positions.
Top tether straps enable an additionalconnection to be made between childrestraint systems secured with LATCH-typeanchors and rear seats. This can furtherreduce the risk of injury.
Sedan: Non foldable rear seat backrest
1 Anchorage ring cover
X Remove anchorage ring cover 1 from theanchorage ring of the seat on which a childseat is to be installed.
X Store anchorage ring cover 1 in aconvenient place (e.g. glove box).
2 Hook3 Anchorage ring
X Guide the top tether strap between thehead restraint and top of the seat backrest.The head restraint must be positioned suchthat the top tether strap can pass freelybetween the head restraint and the top ofthe seat backrest.
X Make sure the top tether strap is nottwisted.
X Securely fasten hook 2, which is part ofthe top tether strap, to anchorage ring 3.
X For safety, make sure hook 2 is attachedto anchorage ring 3 beyond the safetycatch, as illustrated.
Safety and security
Z
Occupant safety
66
Once hook 2 is attached, the child restraintitself can be secured.X Install the child restraint system and
tighten the top tether strap according tothe child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.
After removing the child restraint system andthe top tether strap.X Reinstall anchorage ring cover 1.
Sedan: Foldable rear seat backrestG Warning!Always lock the seat backrest in its uprightposition when the rear seat bench isoccupied by passengers, after installing toptether straps, or the extended cargocompartment is not in use. Make sure thatseat backrest is secured properly bypushing and pulling on the seat backrest. Ifthe seat backrest is not locked properly,the seat backrest could fold. The child seatwould no longer be supported properly orpositioned to provide its intended benefit.That could cause serious or even fatalinjuries.
X Release the respective rear seat backrest(Y page 205).
X Fold the rear seat backrest slightly forward.X Remove anchorage ring cover 1 from the
anchorage ring of the seat on which a childseat is to be installed.
X Store anchorage ring cover 1 in aconvenient place (e.g. glove box).
2 Hook3 Anchorage ring
X Guide the top tether strap between thehead restraint and top of the seat back.The head restraint must be installed andpositioned such that the top tether strapcan pass freely between the head restraintand the top of the seat back.
X Make sure the tether strap is not twisted.
X Securely fasten hook 2, which is part ofthe top tether strap, to anchorage ring 3.
X For safety, make sure hook 2 is attachedto anchorage ring 3 beyond the safetycatch, as illustrated.
2 Hook3 Anchorage ring
X Swing the rear seat backrest to the rearuntil it engages.
X Check the rear seat backrest to be lockedin its upright position (Y page 316).
Once hook 2 is attached, the child restraintitself can be secured.X Install the child restraint system and
tighten the top tether strap according to
Safety and security
Occupant safety
67
the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.
After removing the child restraint system andthe top tether strap.X Reinstall anchorage ring cover 1.
WagonG Warning!Always lock the seat backrest in its uprightposition when the rear seat bench isoccupied by passengers, after installing toptether straps, or the extended cargocompartment is not in use. Make sure thatseat backrest is secured properly bypushing and pulling on the seat backrest. Ifthe seat backrest is not locked properly,the seat backrest could fold. The child seatwould no longer be supported properly orpositioned to provide its intended benefit.That could cause serious or even fatalinjuries.
Prior to installing a tether strap, note thefollowing steps:X Roll up the retractable luggage cover and
the partition net.X Remove the storage box (if so equipped).
If the storage box is not removedRthe top tether anchorage ring ; located
on the floor for use with a child restraint inthe rear center seat position cannot beaccessedRthe hook = of the top tether strap when
attached to the anchorage ring ; on anouter rear seat backrest may push againstthe storage box and prevent the seatbackrest from properly locking intoposition
X If you place a child seat in the left or centerrear seat position, remove the twin rollerblind and return the seat to its originalposition.
! Do not reinstall the twin roller blind witha child seat and top tether installed in theleft and/or center rear seat position.
X If you place a child seat in the right rear seatposition, the twin roller blind can remaininstalled if so desired.
X With a child seat and top tether installed inthe right rear seat position and the twinroller blind installed, make sure the toptether strap is positioned between the seatbackrest and the twin roller blind.
X Fold the rear seat backrest slightly forward.
X Guide the top tether strap between thehead restraint and top of the seat back.The head restraints must be installed (ifremovable) and positioned such that thetop tether strap can pass freely betweenthe head restraint and top of the seat back.
X Make sure the tether strap is not twisted.Anchorage rings 2 are located on the backside of the rear outer seat backrests and onthe floor behind the rear center seat.
2 Anchorage rings3 Hook
X Fold up anchorage ring 2.X Securely fasten hook 3, which is part of
the top tether strap, to anchorage ring ;.
Safety and security
Z
Occupant safety
68
2 Anchorage ring3 Hook
X For safety, make sure hook = hasattached to anchorage ring 2 beyond thesafety catch, as illustrated.
X Swing the rear seat backrest to the rearuntil it engages.
X Check the rear seat backrest to be lockedin its upright position (Y page 316).
Once hook 3 is attached, the child restraintitself can be secured.X Install the child restraint system and
tighten the top tether strap according tothe child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 62.
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH-typeanchors (at each of the rear outer seats) forthe installation of a LATCH-type child seatwith matching mounting fittings.G Warning!Children too big for a toddler restraint mustride in seats using regular seat belts.Position shoulder belt across chest andshoulder, not face or neck.A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for childrenover 41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a heightwhere a lap/shoulder belt fits properlywithout a booster.Install child seat according tomanufacturer’s instructions.The child seat must be firmly attached tothe right and left side anchors.An incorrectly mounted child seat maycome loose during an accident which couldresult in serious injury or death to the child.Damaged or impact damaged child seats orchild seat mounting fittings must bereplaced.
Non-LATCH-type child seats may also be usedand can be installed using the vehicle’s seatbelt system. Install child seat according to themanufacturer’s instructions.The LATCH-type anchors are covered withupholstery blends.
1 Indicates the position of the anchors2 Anchors
X Fold the upholstery blend upward to accessanchors 2.
X Install a LATCH-type child seat accordingto the manufacturer’s instructions.A rigid connection between the child seatand the body of the vehicle is established.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
69
! Make sure the seat belt for the centerseat can operate freely with a child seatinstalled.
Child safety
Override switchG Observe Safety notes, see
page 62.With the override switch you can disable therear door window switches in the rear doorpanels.G Warning!Activate the override switch when childrenare riding in the back seats of the vehicle.The children may otherwise injurethemselves, e.g. by becoming trapped inthe window opening.
1 Override switch2 Indicator lamp
X Activating: Press override switch 1.Indicator lamp 2 comes on.The rear door windows can no longer beoperated using the respective switchlocated in the rear doors.
It is still possible to operate the rear doorwindows using the switches located on thedoor control panel of the driver’s door.X Deactivating: Press override switch 1
again.Indicator lamp 2 goes out.The rear door windows can again beoperated using the respective switchlocated in the rear doors.
For more information on power windows, seethe “Controls in detail” section(Y page 120).
Safety and security
Z
Driving safety systems
70
Panic alarm
1Â button
i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and2. this device must accept any
interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.
Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.
i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,
and2. this device must accept any
interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.
X Activating: Press and hold button 1 for atleast 1 second.An audible alarm and flashing exteriorlamps will operate briefly.
X Deactivating: Press button 1 again.orX Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.orX Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must beinside the vehicle.
Driving safety systems
IntroductionThis section contains information about thefollowing driving safety systems:RABS (Antilock Brake System)RAdaptive BrakeRBAS (Brake Assist System)REBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
i In winter operation, the maximumeffectiveness of most of the drivingsystems described in this section is onlyachieved with winter tires, or snow chainsas required.
Safety notes
G Warning!The following factors increase the risk ofaccidents:RExcessive speed, especially in turnsRWet and slippery road surfacesRFollowing another vehicle too closelyThe driving safety systems described in thissection cannot reduce these risks or
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
71
prevent the natural laws of physics fromacting on the vehicle. They cannot increasebraking or steering efficiency beyond thatafforded by the condition of the vehiclebrakes and tires or the traction afforded.Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver canprevent accidents.The capabilities of a vehicle equipped withthe driving safety systems described in thissection must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner which couldjeopardize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers.Always adjust your driving style to theprevailing road and weather conditions andkeep a safe distance to other road usersand objects on the street.If a driving system malfunctions, otherdriving safety systems may also switch off.Observe indicator and warning lamps thatmay come on as well as messages in themultifunction display that may appear.
ABS
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 70.
G Warning!Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,steady brake pedal pressure instead.Pumping the brake pedal defeats thepurpose of the ABS and significantlyreduces braking effectiveness.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulatesthe brake pressure so that the wheels do notlock during braking. This allows you tomaintain the ability to steer your vehicle.The ABS is functional above a speed ofapproximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independentof road surface conditions.On slippery road surfaces, the ABS willrespond even to light brake pressure.The - indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster comes on when you switch on theignition. It goes out when the engine isrunning.
BrakingAt the instant one of the wheels is about tolock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in theregulating mode.X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake
pedal while you feel the pulsation.Continuous, steady brake pedal pressureyields the advantages provided by the ABS,namely braking power and the ability to steerthe vehicle.The pulsating brake pedal can be anindication of hazardous road conditions andfunctions as a reminder to take extra carewhile driving.
Emergency brake maneuverX Keep continuous full pressure on the brake
pedal.G Warning!If the ABS malfunctions, other drivingsafety systems such as the BAS or theESP® are also switched off. Observeindicator and warning lamps that may comeon as well as messages in the multifunctiondisplay that may appear.If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels maylock during hard braking, reducing steeringcapability and extending the brakingdistance.
Safety and security
Z
Driving safety systems
72
For more information, see “What to doif …?” (Y page 331).
BAS
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 70.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates inemergency situations. If you apply the brakesvery quickly, the BAS automatically providesfull brake boost, thereby potentially reducingthe braking distance.X Apply continuous full braking pressure until
the emergency braking situation is over.The ABS will prevent the wheels fromlocking.
When you release the brake pedal, the brakesfunction again as normal. The BAS is thendeactivated.G Warning!If the BAS malfunctions, the brake systemstill functions, but without the additionalbrake boost available that the BAS wouldnormally provide in an emergency brakingmaneuver. Therefore, the braking distancemay increase.
Adaptive BrakeAdaptive Brake provides a high level ofbraking safety as well as increased brakingcomfort. It is coupled with the ABS, theESP® and the BAS. Adaptive Brake takesdriver and vehicle characteristics intoconsideration, thus achieving an optimalbraking effect.For more information on the brake system,see (Y page 275).
EBP
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 70.
The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP)enhances braking effectiveness by allowingthe rear brakes to supply a greater proportionof the braking effort in straight line brakingwithout a loss of vehicle stability.G Warning!If the EBP malfunctions, the brake systemwill still function with full brake boost.However, the rear wheels could lock upduring emergency braking situations, forexample. You could lose control of thevehicle and cause an accident.
Adapt your driving style to the changeddriving characteristics.
ESP®
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 70.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) isoperational as soon as the engine is runningand monitors the vehicle’s traction (force ofadhesive friction between the tires and theroad surface) and handling.The ESP® recognizes when a wheel isspinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. Byapplying brakes to individual wheels and bylimiting the engine output, the ESP® works tostabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is especiallyuseful while driving off and on wet or slipperyroad surfaces. The ESP® also stabilizes thevehicle during braking and steeringmaneuvers.The ESP® warning lamp v in theinstrument cluster comes on when you switchon the ignition. It goes out when the engineis running.The ESP® warning lamp v in theinstrument cluster flashes when the ESP® isengaged.
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
73
G Warning!Never switch off the ESP® when you see theESP® warning lamp v flashing in theinstrument cluster. In this case proceed asfollows:RWhen driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
pedal.RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
prevailing road conditions.Failure to observe these guidelines couldcause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannotprevent accidents resulting from excessivespeed.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC:Only conduct operational or performancetests on a two-axle dynamometer. If suchtests are necessary, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. You couldotherwise seriously damage the brakesystem or the transfer case which is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC:
Because the ESP® operates automatically,the engine and ignition must be shut off(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button inposition 0 or 1) when the parking brake isbeing tested on a brake test dynamometer.Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brakesystem which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Vehicles without 4MATIC:Because the ESP® operates automatically,the engine and ignition must be shut off(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button inposition 0 or 1) when the parking brake isbeing tested on a brake test dynamometeror the vehicle is being towed with the frontaxle raised.Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brakesystem which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! The ESP® will only function properly if youuse wheels of the recommended tire sizeas specified in the “Technical data” sectionof this Operator’s Manual.
i The Distronic system and cruise controlswitch off automatically when the ESP®
engages.
Electronic Traction System(ETS/4-ETS)
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 70.
The ETS (Electronic Traction System) and4-ETS (four-wheel Electronic TractionSystem, vehicles with 4MATIC only) arecomponents of the ESP®. The ETS/4-ETSimproves the vehicle’s ability to utilizeavailable traction, especially under slipperyroad conditions by applying the brakes to aspinning wheel. Vehicles with 4MATIC alsotransfer more power to the wheel(s) withtraction.Except E 63 AMG:When you switch off the ESP®, theETS/4-ETS is still enabled.
Safety and security
Z
Driving safety systems
74
Switching off the ESP®
1 ESP® switch
Switching off the ESP® (except E 63 AMG)G Warning!The ESP® should not be switched off duringnormal driving other than in thecircumstances described below. Disablingthe system will reduce vehicle stability indriving maneuvers.Do not switch off the ESP® when a sparewheel is mounted.
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch offthe ESP® in driving situations in which itwould be advantageous to have the drivewheels spin and thus cut into surfaces forbetter grip such as:Rwhen driving with snow chainsRin deep snowRin sand or gravel
G Warning!Switch on the ESP® immediately if theaforementioned circumstances do notapply anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will notstabilize the vehicle when it is starting toskid or a wheel is spinning.
When you switch off the ESP®,Rthe ESP® does not stabilize the vehicleRthe engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cutinto surfaces for better gripRthe ETS/4-ETS will still apply the brakes to
a spinning wheelRthe ESP® continues to operate when you
are braking
Ryou cannot activate the cruise control orthe Distronic systemRthe cruise control or the Distronic system
switch off if activated
i When the ESP® is switched off and one ormore drive wheels are spinning, the ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrumentcluster flashes. However, the ESP® willthen not stabilize the vehicle.
X With the engine running, press ESP® switch1 until the ESP® warning lamp v in theinstrument cluster comes on.The ESP® is switched off.G Warning!When the ESP® warning lamp v isilluminated continuously, the ESP® isswitched off or is not operational due to amalfunction. Vehicle stability in standarddriving maneuvers is reduced.Adapt your speed and driving to theprevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP®.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for anextended period with the ESP® switchedoff. This may cause serious damage to the
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
75
drivetrain which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Switching off the ESP® (E 63 AMG only)G Warning!The ESP® should not be switched off duringnormal driving.Disabling of the system will result in thefollowing:Rno restriction to engine torqueRloss of system supported traction control
“ESP® OFF” is designed for driving onclosed tracks when the vehicle’s naturaloversteer and understeer characteristicsare desired and requires a highly skilled andexperienced driver able to handle thesecritical driving situations.You could lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident.Please be aware of these limits when youswitch off the ESP®.Do not switch off the ESP® when a sparewheel is mounted.
When you switch off the ESP®,Rthe ESP® does not stabilize the vehicleRthe engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spinRthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a
spinning wheelRthe ESP® operates while you are brakingRyou cannot activate the cruise control or
the Distronic systemRthe cruise control or Distronic system
switch off if currently activated
i When the ESP® is switched off and one ormore drive wheels are spinning, the ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrumentcluster flashes. However, the ESP® willthen not stabilize the vehicle.
X With the engine running, press ESP® switch1 until the ESP® warning lamp v in theinstrument cluster comes on.The ESP® is switched off.G Warning!When the ESP® warning lamp v isilluminated continuously, the ESP® isswitched off or is not operational due to a
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standarddriving maneuvers is reduced.Adapt your speed and driving to theprevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP®.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for anextended period with the ESP® switchedoff. This may cause serious damage to thedrivetrain which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Switching on the ESP®
X Press ESP® switch 1 until the ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrumentcluster goes out.You are now again in normal driving modewith the ESP® switched on.
Safety and security
Z
Anti-theft systems
76
Anti-theft systems
ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents unauthorizedpersons from starting your vehicle.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
ActivatingX With SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.X With KEYLESS-GO: Turn off the engine and
open the driver’s door.
DeactivatingX Switch on the ignition.
i Starting the engine will also deactivatethe immobilizer.In the event that the engine cannot bestarted (yet the vehicle’s battery ischarged), the system is not operational.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Anti-theft alarm systemOnce the alarm system has been armed, avisual and audible alarm is triggered whensomeone opensRa doorRthe trunk/the tailgateRthe hoodThe alarm will stay on even if the activatingelement (a door, for example) is immediatelyclosed.The alarm system will also be triggered whenRthe vehicle is opened with the mechanical
keyRa door is opened from the insideRthe trunk is opened with the emergency
release button (sedan only)To cancel the alarm after it has beentriggered, see “Canceling thealarm” (Y page 77).
i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, a call to the Response Centeris initiated automatically by the Tele Aidsystem provided that you have subscribedto the Tele Aid service and that it has beenactivated properly, and that the necessary
mobile phone, power supply and GPScoverage are available.
1 Indicator lamp
X Arming: Lock the vehicle with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.The turn signal lamps flash three times andan acoustic warning sounds three times toindicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicatorlamp 1 flashes to indicate that the alarmsystem is armed.
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash threetimes and the acoustic warning does notsound three times, a door or the trunk/tailgate may not be properly closed.
Safety and security
Anti-theft systems
77
Close the respective element.X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.The turn signal lamps flash once and anacoustic warning sounds once to indicatethat the alarm system is disarmed.
i The vehicle will lock and the alarm systemwill rearm automatically again afterapproximately 40 seconds unless you opena door or the trunk/tailgate.
Canceling the alarmTo cancel the alarm, do one of the following:X Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.X Press button k or j on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) ofthe vehicle.
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
Safety and security
Z
78
79
Vehicle equipment .............................. 80Locking and unlocking ....................... 80Starter switch positions ..................... 94Seats .................................................... 95Multifunction steering wheel .......... 105Mirrors ............................................... 107Memory function .............................. 109Lighting .............................................. 110Wipers ................................................ 118Power windows ................................. 120Driving and parking .......................... 124
Automatic transmission ................... 130Instrument cluster ............................ 138Control system .................................. 139Driving systems ................................ 160Climate control system .................... 179Rear window defroster ..................... 193Power tilt/sliding sunroof ............... 194Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel (sedan) ........................ 197Loading and storing .......................... 200Useful features ................................. 219
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
80
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes allfeatures, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.
Locking and unlocking
Notes
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 62.
When unlocking or locking the vehicle withthe SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. Theacoustic signal is activated at the factory. Ifyou wish to deactivate the feature, or adjustits signal volume, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signallamps flash once, an acoustic signal soundsonce, the locking knobs in the doors move up,and the anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lampsflash three times, an acoustic signal soundsthree times, the locking knobs in the doorsmove down, and the anti-theft alarm systemis armed.All doors and the trunk/tailgate must beclosed.
! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehiclewith the SmartKey, the batteries in theSmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey ismalfunctioning, or the vehicle battery isdrained.
RCheck the batteries in the SmartKey andreplace them if necessary.RUse the mechanical key to unlock the
driver’s door and the trunk (sedan only).RUse the mechanical key to lock the
vehicle.RHave the vehicle battery and the vehicle
battery connections checked at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contactRoadside Assistance or an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
SmartKeyYour vehicle comes supplied with twoSmartKeys, each with remote control and aremovable mechanical key.The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lid/tailgateRthe fuel filler flap
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
81
1 j Lock button2 i Unlock button for trunk lid/tailgate3 k Unlock button4 Battery check lamp
i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and2. this device must accept any
interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.
Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.
i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,
and2. this device must accept any
interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.
Factory settingX Global unlocking: Press button k.
The vehicle will lock again automaticallyand rearm the anti-theft alarm systemwithin approximately 40 seconds ofunlocking if neither door nor trunk/tailgateis opened.
X Global locking: Press button j.
Selective settingIf you frequently travel alone, you may wishto reprogramm the SmartKey so that pressing
button k only unlocks the driver’s doorand the fuel filler flap.X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttonsk and j simultaneously forapproximately 6 seconds until batterycheck lamp 4 (Y page 81) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap: Press button k once.X Global unlocking: Press button k
twice.X Global locking: Press button j.
KEYLESS-GOVehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO comewith two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, eachwith remote control and a removablemechanical key.The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated intothe SmartKey. The validity of the SmartKey ischecked every time you pull an outside doorhandle.
Controls in detail
Z
Locking and unlocking
82
When the SmartKey is valid, your vehicleunlocksRthe doorsRthe fuel filler flapRthe trunk lid/tailgate
i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and2. this device must accept any
interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.
Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.
i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,
and2. this device must accept any
interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GORYou can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey(Y page 80).RYou can combine KEYLESS-GO functions
with normal SmartKey functions (e.g.unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and lockingwith button j).RAlways carry the SmartKey with you.RNever store the SmartKey together with:
- Electronic items such as a mobile phoneor another SmartKey
- Metallic objects such as coins or metalfoil
Doing so could impair the function of theKEYLESS-GO system.RTo lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey
must be located outside the vehicle withinapproximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or thetrunk/tailgate.RIf the SmartKey is positioned farther away
from the vehicle, the system may no longerrecognize the SmartKey. The vehiclecannot be locked or the engine started viathe KEYLESS-GO system.RIf the SmartKey is removed from the vehicle
(e.g. if a passenger exits the vehicle withthe SmartKey)- when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button or trying to lock the vehiclewith the lock button on an outside doorhandle the message Key NotDetected appears in the multifunctiondisplay
- with the engine running, the messageKey Not Detected appears in themultifunction display while driving off
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
83
Find the SmartKey or change its presentlocation immediately (e.g. place it on thefront passenger seat or insert it in shirtpocket).RIf you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you canturn it off again by- pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button- inserting the SmartKey into the starter
switch when the vehicle is at a standstilland the automatic transmission is in parkposition P
RThe vehicle could be inadvertentlyunlocked if the SmartKey is within 3 ft (1 m)of the vehicle and- an outside door handle is splashed with
wateror
- you attempt to clean an outside doorhandle
RRemember that the engine can be startedby anyone with a SmartKey that is leftinside the vehicle.Possibility 1 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,one SmartKey outside the vehicle):
If you leave the SmartKey behind whenexiting and locking the vehicle, no messageappears in the multifunction display.Possibility 2 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,no SmartKey outside the vehicle):When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle,the message Key Detected In Vehicleappears in the multifunction display. Thevehicle will not be locked.
Factory settingX Global unlocking: Pull an outside door
handle.The vehicle will lock again automaticallyand rearm the anti-theft alarm systemwithin approximately 40 seconds if neitherdoor nor trunk/tailgate is opened.
1 Lock button on the outside door handle
X Global locking: Press lock button 1 on anoutside door handle.
1 Lock button on the tailgate (wagon)
X Global locking with the lock button onthe tailgate (wagon): Press lock button1 on the tailgate.
Controls in detail
Z
Locking and unlocking
84
If the vehicle was previously centrally lockedwith the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, thetailgate will lock automatically when it isclosed.To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, thetailgate will open automatically if a SmartKeyis recognized inside the vehicle or in the cargocompartment.
Selective settingIf you frequently travel alone, you may wishto reprogram the SmartKey so when you pullthe driver’s outside door handle, only thedriver’s door and the fuel filler flap unlock.X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttonsk and j simultaneously forapproximately 6 seconds until batterycheck lamp 4 (Y page 81) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap: Pull the driver’s outside door handle.X Global unlocking: Pull any outside door
handle other than the driver’s outside doorhandle.
X Global locking: Press lock button 1 on anoutside door handle.
Checking SmartKey batteriesX Press button j or k on the
SmartKey.Battery check lamp 4 (Y page 81) comeson briefly to indicate that the SmartKeybatteries are in order.
If the battery check lamp does not come onbriefly during check, the SmartKey batteriesare discharged.X Replace the batteries (Y page 346).
i You can obtain the required batteries atany authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If the batteries are checked within signalrange of the vehicle, pressing buttonj or k will lock or unlock the vehicleaccordingly.
Loss of the SmartKeyIf you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,you should do the following:X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.X Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key to your car insurancecompany immediately.
X Have the mechanical lock replaced ifnecessary.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will beglad to supply you with a replacement.
Opening the doors from the insideYou can open a locked door from the inside.Open door only when conditions are safe todo so.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
85
Example illustration driver’s door1 Locking knob2 Inside door handleIf the vehicle has previously been locked withthe SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, openinga door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 77).
X Front doors: Pull on inside door handle2 on the respective front door to opendoor.If the door was locked, locking knob 1 willmove up.
X Rear doors: Pull up locking knob on therespective rear door to unlock door.
X Pull on inside door handle on the respectiverear door to open door.
Automatic central lockingThe doors and the trunk/tailgate lockautomatically when the vehicle is set intomotion.You can open a locked door from the inside.Open door only when conditions are safe todo so.The doors are designed to unlockautomatically after an accident if the force ofthe impact exceeds a preset threshold.The vehicle locks automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning at vehicle speeds of approximately9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You couldtherefore lock yourself out when the vehicleis pushed or towed or is on a test stand.
You can deactivate the automatic centrallocking using the control system(Y page 155).
Locking and unlocking from the inside
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 62.
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from insideusing the central locking switches. This canbe useful, for example, if you want to lock thevehicle before starting to drive.The central locking switches do not lock orunlock the fuel filler flap.
1 Central unlocking switch2 Central locking switch
Controls in detail
Z
Locking and unlocking
86
X Locking: Press central locking switch 2.If all doors and the trunk/tailgate areclosed, the vehicle locks.
X Unlocking: Press central unlocking switch1.
You can open a locked door from inside at anytime. Open door only when conditions aresafe to do so.If the vehicle was previously locked with thecentral locking switch:Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
the complete vehicle is unlocked when adoor is opened from the insideRand the SmartKey is set to selective
settings, only the door opened from insideis unlocked
If the vehicle was previously locked centrallywith the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it willnot unlock using the central unlocking switch.
Opening the trunk/tailgate
G Warning!Make sure the trunk/tailgate is closedwhen the engine is running and whiledriving. Among other dangers, deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) gases may entervehicle interior resulting inunconsciousness and death.
You can open the trunk/tailgate when thevehicle is stationary.A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft(1.80 m) sedan or 6.81 ft (2.07 m) wagon isrequired to open the trunk lid/tailgate.
! Vehicles with trunk/tailgate opening/closing system:The trunk lid/tailgate swings open upwardsautomatically. Always make sure there issufficient overhead clearance.
Opening the trunk/tailgate from theoutside
Trunk lid handle (Example sedan)1 Handle
Vehicles without trunk/tailgate opening/closing systemX Sedan: Press and hold button i on the
SmartKey until trunk unlocks and begins toopen.
orX Pull on handle 1.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: Thevehicle must be unlocked.
Sedan: If the trunk does not open, it is stilllocked separately (Y page 93).X Wagon: Lift the tailgate.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
87
Vehicles with trunk/tailgate opening/closing systemX Press and hold button i on the
SmartKey until trunk/tailgate unlocks andbegins to open.
orX Pull on handle 1.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: Thevehicle must be unlocked.
Sedan: If the trunk does not open, it is stilllocked separately (Y page 93).X Stopping the opening procedure: Press
button i on the SmartKey.
Opening the trunk/tailgate from theinside
Opening from the inside automatically(sedan)
Vehicles without trunk opening/closing system1 Indicator lamp; Remote trunk opening switch
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing system1 Indicator lamp; Remote trunk opening/closing switch
X Pull switch ; until the trunk begins toopen.Indicator lamp 1 comes on and remains lituntil the trunk is closed.
If the trunk does not open, it is still lockedseparately (Y page 93).X Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system: To stop the opening procedure,press or pull switch ;.
Controls in detail
Z
Locking and unlocking
88
Opening from the inside automatically(wagon)
1 Indicator lamp; Remote tailgate opening switch
X Pull and hold switch ; untilRthe tailgate is completely open (opened
to its full extent)orRthe tailgate has reached the desired
opening angleIndicator lamp 1 comes on. It remains lituntil the tailgate is closed.
! The tailgate swings open upwards as longas you pull and hold the switch. Alwaysmake sure there is sufficient overhead
clearance. To stop the opening procedure,release switch.
Opening from the inside with handle(wagons with third-row seat only)G Warning!Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle. Children could open the tailgatefrom the inside, which could result in anaccident and/or serious personal injury.
! Always make sure there is sufficientoverhead clearance.
1 Handle2 Catch
X Unlocking/opening: Move catch 2 tothe right.
X Pull handle 1 down and swing tailgateupward.
X Locking: Move catch 2 to the left.
Limiting opening height of tailgate(wagon)Tailgate with opening/closing system:The tailgate opening height can be limitedwhen transporting goods on a roof rack (e.g.presence of an optional MB sport luggagecontainer). When activated, the tailgateopens to approximately the height of the roofedge.
ActivatingX Open tailgate: Pull on handle (Y page 86)
or press and hold button i on theSmartKey until the tailgate opens.
X Stop opening procedure: When thetailgate is in the desired position, pulltailgate closing switch (Y page 91) orpress button i on the SmartKey oncemore.
i You can also press or pull the remotetailgate opening switch (Y page 88) to stopthe opening procedure.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
89
X Move the tailgate to the desired openingheight.
X Press and hold the tailgate closing switch(Y page 91) until an acoustic signalsounds once.The opening height of the tailgate is limited.When you now open the tailgate it will stopat the stored position.
If the acoustic signal does not sound, theposition could not be stored.X Open the tailgate further and press and
hold the tailgate closing switch once moreuntil an acoustic signal sounds once.
DeactivatingX Press and hold the tailgate closing switch
until an acoustic signal sounds twice.
Closing the trunk/tailgate
G Warning!Make sure the trunk/tailgate is closedwhen the engine is running and whiledriving. Among other dangers, deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) gases may entervehicle interior resulting inunconsciousness and death.
G Warning!To prevent possible personal injury, alwayskeep hands and fingers away from thetrunk/cargo compartment opening whenclosing the trunk lid/tailgate. Be especiallycareful when small children are around.
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 62.
Do not leave the SmartKey in the vehicle. Youmay lock yourself out.If the vehicle was previously centrally lockedwith the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the trunklid/tailgate will lock automatically whenclosed. All turn signal lamps flash three timesand an acoustic signal sounds three times toconfirm locking.Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, thetrunk lid/tailgate will open automatically if aSmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognizedinside the vehicle.The vehicle is only locked when the turn signallamps flash three times. If you are carrying asecond SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you,you can still lock the vehicle.
Closing the trunk/tailgate from theoutside manually
Sedan1 Handles
Controls in detail
Z
Locking and unlocking
90
Wagon1 Handles
X Lower trunk lid/tailgate by pulling firmly onhandles 1.
X Close trunk/tailgate with hands placed flaton trunk lid/tailgate.
Closing the tailgate from the insidemanually (wagon)Vehicles with folding third-row seats have astrap on the tailgate to close it from theinside.
1 Strap
Closing the trunk from the insideautomatically (sedan)
G Warning!Maintain sight of the area around the rearof the vehicle while operating the trunk lidwith the door mounted switch. Monitor theclosing procedure carefully to make sure noone is in danger of being injured.To interrupt the closing procedure, press orpull the door mounted remote trunkopening/closing switch.Even with the SmartKey removed from thestarter switch or the SmartKey withKEYLESS-GO removed from the vehicle, theremote trunk opening/closing switch can
be operated. Therefore, do not leavechildren unattended in the vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle. A child’sunsupervised access to a vehicle couldresult in an accident and/or seriouspersonal injury.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with anobject while closing (e.g. luggage that hasbeen piled too high) in the upper motionsequence, the closing procedure is stoppedand the trunk reopens slightly.In vehicles with trunk opening/closingsystem you can close the trunk from theinside using the remote trunk opening/closing switch.
1 Indicator lamp; Remote trunk opening/closing switch
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
91
X Press switch ; until indicator lamp 1goes out and the trunk is closed.
To interrupt the closing procedure:X Release switch ;.
Closing the trunk/tailgate from theoutside automatically
G Warning!Monitor the closing procedure carefully tomake sure no one is in danger of beinginjured. To prevent possible personalinjury, always keep hands and fingers awayfrom the trunk/cargo compartmentopening when closing the trunk lid. Beespecially careful when small children arearound. To stop the closing procedure, doone of the following:RPress button i on the SmartKey.RPress or pull the remote trunk opening/
closing switch (on the driver’s door).RPress or pull the remote tailgate opening
switch (on the driver’s door).RPress the trunk/tailgate closing switch.
RPress the KEYLESS-GO locking/closingswitch.RPull the trunk lid/tailgate handle.Sedan:Even with the SmartKey removed from thestarter switch or the SmartKey withKEYLESS-GO removed from the vehicle, theremote trunk opening/closing switch canbe operated. Therefore, do not leavechildren unattended in the vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle. A child’sunsupervised access to a vehicle couldresult in an accident and/or seriouspersonal injury.
In vehicles with trunk/tailgate opening/closing system you can close the trunk/tailgate separately from the outside using thetrunk/tailgate closing switch.
Example illustration: Sedan without KEYLESS-GO1 Trunk closing switch
Example illustration: Wagon without KEYLESS-GO1 Tailgate closing switch
X Press switch 1 briefly.The trunk/tailgate closes.
Controls in detail
Z
Locking and unlocking
92
Wagon: While the tailgate closes, anacoustic signal sounds.
If the trunk lid/tailgate comes into contactwith an object while closing (e.g. luggage thathas been piled too high) in the upper motionsequence, the closing procedure is stoppedand the trunk lid/tailgate reopens slightly.
Closing the trunk/tailgate and lockingvehicle from outside (vehicles withKEYLESS-GO)In vehicles with trunk/tailgate opening/closing system and KEYLESS-GO, you canclose the trunk/tailgate and lock the vehiclesimultaneously from the outside using theKEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch.
Sedan1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
Wagon1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
X Make sure you have the SmartKey withKEYLESS-GO with you.
X Press switch 1 briefly.With all doors closed:RThe locking knobs in the doors move
down.RThe trunk/tailgate starts to close
automatically.Wagon: While the tailgate closes, anacoustic signal sounds.RAll turn signal lamps flash three times to
confirm locking once the trunk/tailgatehas closed completely.
RAn acoustic signal sounds three times.RThe anti-theft alarm system is armed.
If the trunk lid/tailgate comes into contactwith an object while closing (e.g. luggage thathas been piled too high) in the upper motionsequence, the closing procedure is stoppedand the trunk lid/tailgate reopens slightly.
Trunk lid emergency release (sedan)With the emergency release button, the trunklid can be opened from inside the trunk.
1 Emergency release button
X Briefly press emergency release button1.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
93
The emergency release button unlocks andopens the trunk while the vehicle is standingstill or in motion.Illumination of the emergency release button:RThe button flashes for 30 minutes after
opening the trunk.RThe button flashes for 60 minutes after
closing the trunk.The emergency release button does not openthe trunk, if the vehicle battery is dischargedor disconnected.If the vehicle has previously been centrallylocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,opening the trunk from the inside using theemergency release button will trigger theanti-theft alarm system.To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 77).
Valet locking (sedan)To deny any unauthorized person access tothe trunk, e.g. when you valet park thevehicle, lock it separately with the mechanicalkey. Leave only the SmartKey less itsmechanical key with the vehicle.
$ Neutral position% Locked
X Valet locking: Close the trunk.X Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (Y page 343).X Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid
lock.X Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position % and remove the mechanicalkey in that position to lock the trunk.
The trunk remains locked even when thevehicle is centrally unlocked.You can only cancel the separate trunklocking mode by means of the mechanicalkey.X Canceling: Insert the mechanical key in
the trunk lid lock.X Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise
to neutral position $ and remove themechanical key in that position to unlockthe trunk.You can now open the trunk.
Controls in detail
Z
Starter switch positions
94
Starter switch positions
SmartKey
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 62.
Starter switch} For removing SmartKey (gear selector
lever must be in park position P)$ Power supply for some electrical
consumers, e.g. radio% Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position & Starting positionWhen you switch on the ignition, all lamps(except low-beam headlamp indicator lamp,high-beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turnsignal indicator lamps unless activated) in theinstrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster fails to come on when theignition is switched on, have it checked andreplaced if necessary. If a lamp in theinstrument cluster remains on after startingthe engine or comes on while driving, refer to“Lamps in instrument cluster” (Y page 330).If the SmartKey is left in starter switchposition 0 for an extended period of time, itcan no longer be turned in the starter switch.In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock,remove SmartKey from the starter switch andreinsert.The steering is locked when the SmartKey isremoved from the starter switch.
! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in thestarter switch, the vehicle battery may notbe sufficiently charged.RCheck the vehicle battery and charge it
if necessary.RGet a jump start.To prevent accelerated vehicle batterydischarge or a completely dischargedvehicle battery, always remove theSmartKey from the starter switch when theengine is not in operation.
KEYLESS-GO
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 62.
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GOfeature are supplied with a SmartKey withintegrated KEYLESS-GO function.With the SmartKey present in the vehicle,pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop buttonRwithout the brake pedal depressed
corresponds to the various starter switchpositions (Y page 94)Rwith the brake pedal firmly depressed will
start the engine (Y page 124)The function of the SmartKey overrules theKEYLESS-GO function.The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.X Do not depress the brake pedal.
Controls in detail
Seats
95
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button1 USA only2 Canada only
Position 0Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton, the vehicle’s on-board electronicshave status 0 (as with SmartKey removed).
Position 1X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
once.This supplies power for some electricalconsumers, such as radio functions.
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop buttonRonce more, the ignition (position 2) is
switched onRtwice more the power supply is again
switched off
Ignition (or position 2)X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
twice.This supplies power for all electricalconsumers.All lamps (except low-beam headlampindicator lamp, high-beam headlampindicator lamp, and turn signal indicatorlamps unless activated) in the instrumentcluster come on. If a lamp in the instrumentcluster fails to come on when the ignitionis switched on, have it checked andreplaced if necessary. If a lamp in theinstrument cluster remains on afterstarting the engine or comes on whiledriving, refer to “Lamps in instrumentcluster” (Y page 330).
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once, the power supply is againswitched off.
Seats
Safety notes
G Warning!In order to avoid possible loss of vehiclecontrol, all seat, head restraint, steeringwheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, aswell as fastening of seat belts, must bedone before the vehicle is put into motion.
G Warning!Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.Adjusting the seat while driving could causethe driver to lose control of the vehicle.Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined positionas this can be dangerous. You could slideunder the seat belt in a collision. If you slideunder it, the seat belt would apply force atthe abdomen or neck. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. The seat backrestand seat belts provide the best restraintwhen the wearer is in a position that is asupright as possible and seat belts areproperly positioned on the body.
Controls in detail
Z
Seats
96
G Warning!Your seat must be adjusted so that you cancorrectly fasten your seat belt.Observe the following points:RAdjust the seat backrest until your arms
are slightly angled when holding thesteering wheel.RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach theaccelerator/brake pedal safely. Theposition should be as far back as possiblewith the driver still able to operate thecontrols properly.RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and thecenter of the head restraint supports theback of the head at eye level.RNever place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is beingadjusted.
Failure to do so could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.
G Warning!The power seats can be operated at anytime. Therefore, do not leave childrenunattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in anaccident and/or serious personal injury.
G Warning!According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seating positions than in the frontseating position. Thus, we stronglyrecommend that children be placed in therear seats whenever possible. Regardlessof seating position, children 12 years oldand under must be seated and properlysecured in an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see“Children in the vehicle”.A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicleand/or the child is not properly secured inthe child restraint.
G Warning!For your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint so that it is asclose to the head as possible and the center
of the head restraint supports the back ofthe head at eye level. This will reduce thepotential for injury to the head and neck inthe event of an accident or similar situation.Do not drive the vehicle without the seathead restraints. Head restraints areintended to help reduce injuries during anaccident.
For more information on folding the seats,see “Loading and storing” (Y page 205).
Seat adjustment! When moving the seats, make sure there
are no items in the footwell or behind theseats. Otherwise, you could damage theseats.
Controls in detail
Seats
97
Power seats
1 Seat fore and aft adjustment2 Seat backrest tilt3 Seat height4 Seat cushion tilt5 Head restraint height
i The memory function (Y page 109) letsyou store the settings for the seat positiontogether with the settings for the steeringwheel and the exterior rear view mirrors.
X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press theswitch forward or backward in direction ofarrow 1.
i When moving the seat fore or aft, the headrestraints may readjust automatically.
X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switchforward or backward in direction of arrow2.
X Seat height: Press the switch up or downin direction of arrow 3.
X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up ordown in direction of arrow 4 until yourupper legs are lightly supported.
X Head restraint height: Press the switchup or down in direction of arrow 5.
Head restraint fore and aft adjustment
X While seated, reach behind you with bothhands and find upper edge of the headrestraint.
X Adjust the head restraint to the desiredposition by pushing or pulling on the upperedge of the head restraint cushion.
Comfort head restraintG Warning!When folding back the side cushions, neverreach between the side cushion and themounting post. You could otherwise betrapped.
1 Side cushions2 Fore and aft adjustmentYou can individually adjust the side cushionsof the head restraints.
Controls in detail
Z
Seats
98
X Adjusting side cushions: Pull or push sidecushions 1 into desired position.
X Adjusting forward or backward: Pull orpush head restraint in direction of arrow2.
Lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seat’slumbar support to help enhance support toyour spine.
1 Adjustment lever
X Move adjustment lever 1 in direction ofthe arrows until you have reached acomfortable seating position.
Rear seat head restraints
G Warning!For safety reasons, always drive with therear head restraints in the upright positionwhen the rear seats are occupied.Keep the area around head restraints clearof articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct thefolding operation of the head restraints.
G Warning!For your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint in such a way thatit is as close to the head as possible and thecenter of the head restraint supports theback of the head at eye level. This willreduce the potential for injury to the headand neck in the event of an accident orsimilar situation.With a rear seat occupied, make sure tomove the respective head restraint up fromthe lowest non-use position and have theoccupant adjust the head restraintproperly.Do not drive the vehicle without the seathead restraints installed when the rearseats are occupied. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during anaccident.
G Warning!Make sure the rear seat head restraintsengage when placing them uprightmanually. Otherwise their protectivefunction cannot be ensured.The back of the head will not be supportedin the event of a collision. That could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Rear seatoccupants can be seriously injured orkilled.
i Sedan: The rear seat head restraintscannot be adjusted.
Sedan
Folding rear seat head restraints backThe rear seat head restraints can be foldedbackward for increased visibility.
Controls in detail
Seats
99
1 Head restraint release switch
X Switch on the ignition.X Press the symbol-side on switch 1 to
release the head restraints.
Placing rear seat head restraints upright
X Pull the head restraint forward until it locksinto position.
Removing and installing rear seat headrestraints (vehicles with split rear seatbench only)
1 Release catch
X Removing: Fold the seat backrest forward(Y page 205).
X Fold back head restraint (Y page 98).X Press head restraint release catch 1 and
pull the head restraints out of the guides.X Fold the seat backrest back to its original
position.X Installing: Insert head restraint and push
it down until it engages.X Make sure you place the correct head
restraint on the middle seat. It is marked
with the letter “M” on the outside of themetal bars.
X Make sure the head restraints engage fully.
Wagon
Folding rear seat head restraints back(rear outer seats only)
1 Release button
X Press release button 1 and fold the headrestraints backward.
Controls in detail
Z
Seats
100
Placing rear seat head restraints upright
X Pull the head restraint forward until it locksinto position.
Rear seat head restraint height (rear outerseats only)
1 Release button
X Raising: Adjust the height of the headrestraint manually by pulling it upward.If the head restraint is fully retracted, pressrelease button 1 and pull the headrestraint out.
X Lowering: To lower the head restraint,press release button 1 and push down onthe head restraint.
Rear seat head restraint tilt (rear outerseats only)Two different head restraint angle positionsare available.
1 Release button
X Press release button 1 and tilt the headrestraint to the desired position.
Removing and installing rear seat headrestraints
1 Release button
X Removing: Placing head restraints upright(Y page 100).
X Pull head restraint to its highest position.X Press release button 1 and pull out head
restraint.X Installing: Insert head restraint and push
it down until it engages.X Make sure the proper head restraint for
each seat is installed. The bars of the headrestraint designed for the middle rear seatare of even length and shorter than thosedesigned for use on the outer rear seats.
Controls in detail
Seats
101
X Make sure the head restraints engage fully.X Press release button 1 and adjust head
restraint to desired position.
Multicontour seatThe multicontour seat has a movable seatcushion and inflatable air cushions built intothe seat backrest to provide additionallumbar and side support.
1 Seat backrest side bolster2 Seat backrest center3 Seat backrest bottom4 Seat cushion depth
X Switch on the ignition.X Seat cushion depth: Adjust the seat
cushion depth to the length of your upperleg using switch 4.
X Seat backrest contour: Adjust thecontour of the seat backrest to the desiredposition using + or -.
X Move the seat backrest support cushion tothe bottom with button 3 or to the centerwith button 2.
X Seat backrest side bolsters: Adjust theside bolsters so that they provide goodlateral support using switch 1.
i If, after a period of time, the seat no longerprovides the desired contour, then repeatthe adjustment procedure.
Seat ventilation
1 Seat ventilation switchThe blue indicator lamps in the switch comeon to show which ventilation level you haveselected.
i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seatcan be activated using summer openingfeature (Y page 122).
X Switch on the ignition.X Switching on: Press switch 1.
Three blue indicator lamps in the switchcome on.
X Press switch 1 repeatedly until thedesired ventilation level is set.
X Switching off: Press switch 1 repeatedlyuntil all indicator lamps go out.
Controls in detail
Z
Seats
102
If one or more of the indicator lamps in theseat ventilation switch 1 are flashing, thereis insufficient voltage available since toomany electrical consumers are turned on. Theseat ventilation switches off automatically.The seat ventilation will switch back on againautomatically as soon as sufficient voltage isavailable.
Seat heating
1 Front seat heating switch
1 Rear seat heating switch (Canada only)Depending on production date, your vehiclemay not be equipped with rear seat heating.The red indicator lamps in switch 1 come onto show which heating level you haveselected.The seat heating switches from level 3 (high)to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes.The seat heating switches from level 2 to level1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes.The seat heating automatically switches offfrom level 1 after approximately 20 minutes.X Switch on the ignition.X Switching on: Press switch 1.
Three red indicator lamps in switch 1come on.
X Continue pressing switch 1 until desiredseat heating level is reached.
X Switching off: Press switch 1 repeatedlyuntil all indicator lamps go out.
If one or more of the indicator lamps in seatheating switch 1 are flashing, there isinsufficient voltage available since too manyelectrical consumers are turned on. The seatheating switches off automatically.The seat heating will switch back on againautomatically as soon as sufficient voltage isavailable.
Third-row seat in cargo compartment(wagon)
The third-row seat in the cargo compartmentis approved only for persons up to a height of4.6 ft (1.40 m) and a maximum weight of110 lb (50 kg).The twin roller blind must be installed whenthe third-row seat is in use.G Warning!When using the third-row seat in the cargocompartment, the seats in front of it mustbe in the driving position.Only drive when the head restraints for thethird-row seat have been properly adjusted.
Controls in detail
Seats
103
The head restraints should be adjusted sothat the back of the head is supported atapproximately eye level. This can reduce achild’s risk of injury in the event of anaccident.
G Warning!Make sure the seat belt is positionedcorrectly on the body and is engaged in theseat belt buckle.Damaged covers should be replaced withoriginal covers only.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even when they are secured in achild restraint system.Make sure luggage and other objects areadequately secured. The load couldotherwise injure someone in the event of anaccident, during hard braking or steeringmaneuvers.
Folding out the third-row seat
1 Release handle for seat backrest2 Release handle for seat cushionBefore folding out the seat backrest, youmust:Rfold the rear seat backrests into an upright
position and lock them into placeRmove the handle for the twin roller blind
into the upper position
i The rear seat backrests can be adjustedto a more reclined position to make thethird-row seat more comfortable(Y page 209).
X Pull release handle 1 and fold seatbackrest for the third-row seat upward.
3 Mountings for seat belts
X Hook seat belts into mountings 3.X Pull release handle 2 and fold seat
cushion for the third-row seat into sittingposition.
X Press seat cushion as far down as it will go.The seat backrest will then also engageproperly.
X Fold head restraints into upright position.
Removing and installing seat cushionsYou must remove the seat cushion when youwant to raise the loading floor, e. g. in theevent of a flat tire.
Controls in detail
Z
Seats
104
1 Seat guides2 Seat cushion
X Removing: Fold seat cushion 2 upwardand remove it from seat guides 1.
X Installing: Insert seat cushion 2 into seatguides 1 from behind 3 at a slight angle.
X Fold seat cushion 2 back into originalposition 4 until it engages.
Folding back third-row seat
1 Tab2 Seat backrest
X Pull seat cushion upward using tab 1 andfold it back into original position until itengages.
1 Release knob
X Press release knob 1 and fold headrestraints down.
! To avoid damage, insert the headrestraints completely into their guides andengage the seat belt buckles in theirguides.
Controls in detail
Multifunction steering wheel
105
1 Release catch2 Seat backrest
X Press release catch 1 and push headrestraints as far in as they will go.
X Fold seat backrest 2 of third-row seatback into original position until it engages.
Multifunction steering wheel
Safety notes
G Warning!Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. Adjusting the steering wheel whiledriving could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle.The electrical steering wheel adjustmentfeature can be operated at any time.Therefore, do not leave childrenunattended in the vehicle, or with access toan unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in anaccident and/or serious personal injury.
Make sureRyou can reach the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent at the elbowsRyou can move your legs freelyRall displays (including malfunction and
indicator lamps) on the instrument clusterare clearly visible
Steering wheel adjustment
1 Adjusting steering wheel, in or out2 Adjusting steering wheel, up or down
X Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Movestalk in direction of arrows 1.
X Adjusting steering wheel up or down:Move stalk in direction of arrows 2.
i The memory function (Y page 109) letsyou store the settings for the steeringwheel together with the settings for theseat position and the exterior rear viewmirrors.
Controls in detail
Z
Multifunction steering wheel
106
Easy-entry/exit featureThis feature allows the driver an easier entryinto and exit from the vehicle. When enteringand exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel isin its uppermost position.The easy-entry/exit feature can be activatedor deactivated in the Convenience submenuof the control system (Y page 156).G Warning!You must make sure no one can becometrapped or injured by the moving steeringwheel when the easy-entry/exit feature isactivated.To stop steering wheel movement, movesteering wheel adjustment stalk or pressone of the memory position buttons.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, or with access to an unlockedvehicle. Children could open the driver’sdoor and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in anaccident and/or serious personal injury.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,the steering wheel will return to its last setposition when you close the driver’s door withthe ignition switched on. The steering wheelwill also return to its last set position whenyou insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton once with the driver’s door closed.
i The last set steering wheel position isstored when the ignition is switched off orthe position is stored in memory(Y page 109).
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,the steering wheel tilts upwards when youremove the SmartKey from the starter switch.The steering wheel also tilts upwards whenyou open the driver’s door with the SmartKeyin starter switch position 0 or 1 or theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button in position1.
i When the current position for the steeringwheel is in the uppermost tilt position, thesteering wheel will no longer be able tomove upward when the easy-entry/exitfeature is activated.The adjustment procedure is brieflyinterrupted when the engine is started.
G Warning!Let the system complete the adjustmentprocedure before setting the vehicle inmotion. All steering wheel adjustment mustbe completed before setting the vehicle inmotion. Driving off with the steering wheel
still adjusting could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle.
Heated steering wheelThe steering wheel heating warms up theleather area of the steering wheel.
1 Switching on2 Switching off3 Indicator lamp
X Switch on the ignition.X Switching on: Turn switch at the tip of the
stalk in direction of arrow 1.Indicator lamp 3 comes on.
i The steering wheel heating may besuspended temporarily. However, indicator
Controls in detail
Mirrors
107
lamp 3 remains on. The steering wheelheating is suspended when thetemperature of the vehicle interior is above86‡ (30†). It is also suspended when thetemperature of the steering wheel is above95‡ (35†).When these conditions do not applyanymore, steering wheel heatingcontinues.
X Switching off: Turn switch at the tip ofstalk in direction of arrow 2.Indicator lamp 3 goes out.
i Indicator lamp 3 flashes or goes out incase of power surge or undervoltage or ifthe steering wheel heating malfunctions.
i The steering wheel heating switches offautomatically when you remove theSmartKey from the starter switch or, onvehicles with KEYLESS-GO, when youswitch off the ignition and open the driver’sdoor.
For more information on the steering wheel,see “Multifunction steeringwheel” (Y page 140).
Mirrors
NotesAdjust the interior and exterior rear viewmirrors before driving so that you have a goodview of the road and traffic conditions.
Interior rear view mirrorX Adjust the interior rear view mirror
manually.
Exterior rear view mirrors
G Warning!Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirrorsurface is convex (outwardly curvedsurface for a wider field of view). Objects inmirror are closer than they appear. Checkyour interior rear view mirror and glanceover your shoulder before changing lanes.
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirrorbutton
2 Adjustment button3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
button
X Switch on the ignition.X Press button 1 for the driver’s side
exterior rear view mirror or button 3 forthe passenger-side exterior rear viewmirror.
X Press adjustment button 2 up, down, leftor right according to the desired setting.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forciblyhit from the front, manually snap it backinto place.
Controls in detail
Z
Mirrors
108
i At low ambient temperatures, the exteriorrear view mirrors will be heatedautomatically.
Auto-dimming rear view mirrorsThe exterior rear view mirror on the driver’sside and the interior rear view mirror willrespond automatically to glare when theignition is switched on and incoming lightfrom headlamps falls on the sensor in theinterior rear view mirror.The rear view mirrors will not react if theautomatic transmission is set to reverse gearR or the interior lighting is switched on.G Warning!The auto-dimming function does not reactif incoming light is not aimed directly at thesensors in the interior rear view mirror.The interior rear view mirror and theexterior rear view mirror on the driver’s sidedo not react, for example,Rif the rear window sunshade is in raised
position (sedan)Rwhen transporting cargo which covers
the rear window (wagon)Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
you may not be able to observe trafficconditions and could cause an accident.
Activating exterior rear view mirrorparking position
Follow these steps to activate the mirrorparking position so that the passenger-sideexterior rear view mirror will be turneddownward to the stored position.
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirrorbutton
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirrorbutton
X Make sure you have stored a parkingposition for the passenger-side exteriorrear view mirror (Y page 109).
X Switch on the ignition.
X Press button 2 for the passenger-sideexterior rear view mirror.
X Shift the automatic transmission intoreverse gear R.The passenger-side exterior rear viewmirror will be turned downward to thestored position.
The exterior rear view mirror returns to itspreviously stored driving position:R10 seconds after you have put the gear
selector lever out of position reverse gearRRimmediately once your vehicle exceeds a
speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)Rimmediately when you press button 1 for
driver’s side exterior rear view mirror.
Controls in detail
Memory function
109
Memory function
NotesWith the memory function you can store upto three different configurations per frontseat.Each memory position button on the driver’sside can store all of the following settings:RSeat positionRMulticontour seat: previously saved settingRSteering wheel positionRExterior rear view mirrors’ position
G Warning!Do not activate the memory function whiledriving. Activating the memory functionwhile driving could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle.
Each memory position button on the frontpassenger side can store all of the followingsettings:RSeat positionRMulticontour seat: previously saved setting
M Memory button1, 2, 3 Memory position button
Storing positions into memoryX Adjust the seats.X On the driver’s side, additionally adjust the
steering wheel and exterior rear viewmirrors to the desired positions.
X Press memory button M.X Release memory button M and press
memory position button 1, 2 or 3 within3 seconds.When the settings are stored to theselected position, an acknowledgementsignal sounds.
Recalling positions from memoryX Press and hold desired memory position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat hascompletely moved to the stored position.On the driver’s side, also wait for thesteering wheel and exterior rear viewmirrors to move to the stored position.
i Releasing the memory position buttonstops movement to the stored positionsimmediately.
Storing exterior rear view mirrorparking position
For easier parking, you can adjust thepassenger-side exterior rear view mirror sothat you can see the right rear wheel as soonas you engage reverse gear R.For information on activating the parkingposition, see (Y page 108).
Controls in detail
Z
Lighting
110
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirrorbutton
2 Passenger side exterior rear view mirrorbutton
3 Adjustment button4 Memory button M
X Stop the vehicle.X Switch on the ignition.X Press button 2.
The passenger-side exterior rear viewmirror is selected.
X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rearview mirror with adjustment button 3 sothat you see the rear wheel and the roadcurb.
X Press memory button M 4.X Within 3 seconds, press bottom of
adjustment button 3.The parking position is stored if the mirrordoes not move.
i If the mirror does move, repeat the abovesteps. After the setting is stored, you canmove the mirror again.
Lighting
Notesi If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than thecountry where the vehicle is registered, youmust have the headlamps modified forsymmetrical low beams. Relevantinformation can be obtained at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenonheadlamps:The active Bi-Xenon headlamps monitor thevehicle’s steering angle and speed, thenautomatically shift their beams to eitherside to better follow the curvature of theroad ahead, increasing usable illuminationover conventional headlamps.
Controls in detail
Lighting
111
Exterior lamp switch
$ a Standing lamps, left% g Standing lamps, right& M Off
Daytime running lamp mode( U Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode) C Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
license plate lamps, side markerlamps and instrument panel lamps)
* B Low-beam headlamps or high-beamheadlamps
, ¥ Front fog lamps. † Rear fog lamp
i The exterior lamps go out automaticallywhen you remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch or open the driver’s door withthe ignition switched off.When the parking lamps or the rear foglamp are switched on and you remove theSmartKey from the starter switch and openthe driver’s door, an acoustic signalsounds.In addition the message Switch OffLights appears in the multifunctiondisplay.Switch off the parking lamps or the rear foglamp manually.
! Failure to switch off the parking lampswhen leaving the vehicle may result in adischarged battery.
Low-beam headlampsThe low-beam headlamps can be switched onand off with the exterior lamp switch.X Switch on the ignition.X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position B.The following lamps come on:RLow-beam headlampsRTail lampsRParking lamps
RLicense plate lampsRSide marker lampsRInstrument panel lampsRGreen indicator lamp B in the
instrument clusterX Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position M.
Automatic headlamp modeThe following lamps come on and go outautomatically depending on the brightness ofthe ambient light:RLow-beam headlampsRTail lampsRParking lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lamps
G Warning!If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,the headlamps will not automatically comeon under foggy conditions.To minimize risk to you and to others,activate headlamps by turning exteriorlamp switch to B when driving or when
Controls in detail
Z
Lighting
112
traffic and/or ambient lighting conditionsrequire you to do so.In low ambient lighting conditions, onlyswitch from position U to B with thevehicle at a standstill in a safe location.Switching from U to B will brieflyswitch off the headlamps. Doing so whiledriving in low ambient lighting conditionsmay result in an accident.The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid to the driver. The driver is responsiblefor the operation of the vehicle’s lights atall times.
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lampswitch to position U.With the SmartKey in starter switchposition 1 or the KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton pressed once, the tail and parkinglamps, the license plate lamps and the sidemarker lamps will come on and go outdepending on the brightness of the ambientlight.When the engine is running the low-beamheadlamps, the tail and parking lamps, thelicense plate lamps and the side markerlamps will come on and go out dependingon the brightness of the ambient light.
Canada only: High-beam headlamps are onlyavailable with the exterior lamp switch inposition B.
Daytime running lamp modeIn Canada, the daytime running lamp mode ismandatory and therefore in a constant mode.In the USA, the daytime running lamp modeis deactivated by default. Activate thedaytime running lamp mode using the controlsystem, see “Setting daytime running lampmode (USA only)” (Y page 153).X Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionM or U.When the engine is running, the low-beamheadlamps come on.In low ambient lighting conditions, thefollowing lamps will come on additionally:RTail lampsRParking lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lamps
With the daytime running lamp modeactivated and the engine running, you cannotswitch off the low-beam headlamps manually.
Canada onlyWith the exterior lamp switch in positionM or U, you cannot switch on the high-beam headlamps.The high-beam flasher is available at all times.For nighttime driving turn the exterior lampswitch to position B to permit activationof the high-beam headlamps.When the engine is running, and youRshift from a driving position to park position
P with the vehicle at a standstill, the low-beam headlamps will go out with a delay of3 minutesRturn the exterior lamp switch to positionC, the low-beam headlamps, the tailand parking lamps, the license plate lampsand the side marker lamps come onRturn the exterior lamp switch to positionB, the manual headlamp mode haspriority over the daytime running lampmodeThe corresponding exterior lamps come on(Y page 111).
USA onlyYou can only switch on the high-beamheadlamps in low ambient lighting conditions.The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
Controls in detail
Lighting
113
When the engine is running, and you turn theexterior lamp switch to position C orB, the manual headlamp mode haspriority over the daytime running lamp mode.The corresponding exterior lamps come on(Y page 111).
Fog lampsFog lamps cannot be switched on with theexterior lamp switch in position U. Toswitch on the fog lamps, turn the exteriorlamp switch to position B first.
G Warning!In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,only switch from position U to Bwith the vehicle at a standstill in a safelocation.Switching from U to B will brieflyswitch off the headlamps. Doing so whiledriving in low ambient lighting conditionsmay result in an accident.
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lampsand/or the low-beam headlamps on. Foglamps should only be used in conjunction withlow-beam headlamps. Consult your State orProvince Motor Vehicle Regulationsregarding permissible lamp operation.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionC or B (Y page 111).
X Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out theexterior lamp switch to first stop.The green indicator lamp ¥ in theexterior lamp switch comes on.
X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out theexterior lamp switch to second stop.The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps andthe yellow indicator lamp † in theexterior lamp switch come on.
X Switching off front fog lamps/rear foglamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch toits stop.
Locator lighting and night securityilluminationLocator lighting and night securityillumination are described in the “Controlsystem” section, see “Setting locatorlighting” (Y page 154) and “Setting nightsecurity illumination (Headlamps delayedshut-off feature)” (Y page 154).
Combination switch
1 High beam2 High-beam flasher
High beamX Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionB (Y page 111).
X Switching on: Push the combinationswitch in direction of arrow 1.The high-beam headlamp indicator lampA in the instrument cluster comes on.
X Switching off: Pull the combination switchin direction of arrow 2 to its originalposition.
Controls in detail
Z
Lighting
114
High-beam flasherX Switching on: Pull the combination switch
briefly in direction of arrow 2.
Turn signals
1 Turn signals, right2 Turn signals, left
X Press the combination switch in directionof arrow 1 or 2.The corresponding turn signal indicatorlamp L or K in the instrumentcluster flashes.
The combination switch resets automaticallyafter major steering wheel movements.
i To signal minor directional changes suchas changing lanes, press combination
switch only to point of resistance andrelease. The corresponding turn signallamps will flash three times.
Hazard warning flasherThe hazard warning flasher can be switchedon at all times, even with the SmartKeyremoved from the starter switch.The hazard warning flasher comes onautomatically when an air bag deploys.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
X Switching on: Press hazard warningflasher switch 1.All turn signal lamps are flashing.
i With the hazard warning flasher activatedand the combination switch set for either
left or right turn, only the respective left orright turn signals will operate when theignition is switched on.
X Switching off: Press hazard warningflasher switch 1 again.
i If the hazard warning flasher has beenactivated automatically, press hazardwarning flasher switch 1 once to switchoff.
Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps will be cleaned with a high-pressure water jet automatically when theengine is running and you haveRswitched on the headlamps
andRthe windshield wipers have wiped the
windshield with washer fluid five timesThe counter resets when you switch off theignition.For information on filling up the washerreservoir, see “Washer system and headlampcleaning system” (Y page 246).
Controls in detail
Lighting
115
Corner-illuminating front fog lampsThe corner-illuminating front fog lampsimprove illumination of the area in thedirection into which you are turning.The corner-illuminating front fog lamps willonly operateRin low ambient lighting conditionsRat vehicle speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h)Rwith the front fog lamps switched offRwith the engine is running
Switching onX Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionB or U.
orX Activate the daytime running lamp mode
(Y page 112).X Switch on the left or right turn signal,
depending on whether you are turning leftor right.The respective front fog lamp comes on. Ifyou have switched on the turn signal forone side but turn the steering wheel in theother direction, the corner-illuminating
front fog lamp comes on on the side of theturn signal.
orX Turn steering wheel in the desired
direction.Driving forward: The front fog lamp on theside of your steering direction comes on.Driving in reverse: The front fog lampopposite to your steering direction comeson.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps willcome on automatically depending on thesteering angle, even if you did not switch oneither turn signal. If the corner-illuminatingfront fog lamps came on automatically, theywill also go out automatically depending onthe steering angle and vehicle speed.The corner-illuminating front fog lampstemporarily come on on both sides of thevehicle if you turn the steering wheel in onedirection and then again in the other directionshortly thereafter.The corner-illuminating front fog lampremains lit for a maximum of 3 minutes.Afterward, it goes out even if the turn signalis still switched on.
Switching off
X Switch off the left or right turn signal.orX Steer straight ahead.
i There may be a brief delay before thecorner-illuminating front fog lamps go out.
Controls in detail
Z
Lighting
116
Interior lighting in the front
1X Left front reading lamp on/off2ò Rear interior lighting on/off3¡ Automatic control on/off4ð Front interior lighting on/off 5X Right front reading lamp on/off6 Interior lighting7 Ambient lighting8 Front reading lamps
Automatic controlX Activating: Press switch ¡.
The interior lighting comes on in darkness,when you:Runlock the vehicleRremove the SmartKey from the starter
switchRopen a doorRopen the tailgate (wagon)
X Deactivating: Press switch ¡.The interior lighting goes out after a presettime (Y page 155).
i If a door remains open, the interior lampsgo out automatically after approximately5 minutes when the SmartKey is removedor in starter switch position 0.
Manual control! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ONposition for extended periods of time withthe engine turned off could result in adischarged battery.
X Switching on/off front interiorlighting: Press switch ð.
X Switching on/off rear interior lighting:Press switch ò.
X Switching on/off front reading lamps:Press respective switch X.
Ambient lightingThe brightness of the ambient lighting 7 isadjusted via the “Controlsystem” (Y page 154).
Interior lighting in the rear! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ONposition for extended periods of time withthe engine turned off could result in adischarged battery.
Controls in detail
Lighting
117
Vehicles with power tilt/sliding sunroofThe overhead control panel is located abovethe rear seat bench.
1X Left rear reading lamp on/off2 Left rear reading lamp3 Right rear reading lamp4X Right rear reading lamp on/off5 Right rear interior lamp6 Left rear interior lamp
X Switching on/off rear reading lamps:Press respective reading lamp switchX.
Sedan: Vehicles with panorama roof
1 Left ambient lighting2 Left rear interior lamp3 Ambient lighting switch, to brighten4 Ambient lighting switch, to dim5 Right rear interior lamp6 Right ambient lighting7 Right rear reading lamp8X Right rear reading lamp on/off9X Left rear reading lamp on/offa Left rear reading lamp
X Switching on/off rear reading lamps:Press respective reading lamp switchX.
X Dim or brighten rear ambient lighting:Press ambient lighting switch 3 or 4 until
ambient lighting 1 and 6 has reached thedesired intensity.
You can switch the ambient lighting on andoff, using the “Controlsystem” (Y page 154).
Controls in detail
Z
Wipers
118
Wipers
Notes! Do not operate the wipers when the
windshield/rear window is dry. Dust thataccumulates on a windshield/rear windowmight scratch the glass and/or damage thewiper blades when wiping occurs on a drywindshield/rear window. If it is necessaryto operate the wipers in dry weatherconditions, always operate the wipers withwasher fluid.
Combination switch1 Switching on windshield wipers2 Single wipe
Wiping with washer fluid
X Switch on the ignition.
Windshield wipers
Switching on/off
M Windshield wipers off
U Slow intermittent wipingRain sensor operation with lowsensitivity.
V Fast intermittent wipingRain sensor operation with highsensitivity.
u Slow continuous wiping
t Fast continuous wiping
X Turn the combination switch in direction ofarrow 1 to the desired position,depending on the intensity of the rain.
Intermittent wipingOnly switch on intermittent wiping under wetweather conditions or in the presence ofprecipitation.When you select intermittent wiping, the rainsensor is activated. The rain sensor sets a
suitable wiping interval depending on thewetness of the sensor surface automatically.
! Do not leave windshield wipers on anintermittent setting when the vehicle istaken to an automatic car wash or duringwindshield cleaning. Windshield wipers willoperate in the presence of water sprayedon the windshield, and windshield wipersmay be damaged as a result.
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt onthe surface of the rain sensor or opticaleffects may cause the windshield wipers towipe in an undesired fashion. This couldthen damage the windshield wiper bladesor scratch the windshield. You shouldtherefore switch off the windshield wiperswhen weather conditions are dry.
X Turn the combination switch to positionU or V.After the initial wipe, pauses betweenwipes are controlled by the rain sensorautomatically.
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when thevehicle is at a standstill and a front door isopened. This protects persons getting into orout of the vehicle from being sprayed.Intermittent wiping will be continued when alldoors are closed and
Controls in detail
Wipers
119
Rthe automatic transmission is in driveposition D or reverse gear RorRthe wiper setting is changed using the
combination switch
Single wipeX Press the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 2 to the resistancepoint.The windshield wipers wipe one timewithout washer fluid.
Wiping with washer fluidX Press the combination switch in direction
of arrow 2 past the resistance point.The windshield wipers operate with washerfluid.
i To prevent smears on the windshield ornoisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe withwasher fluid every now and then even whenit is raining.
For information on filling up the washerreservoir, see “Washer system and headlampcleaning system” (Y page 246).
For information on cleaning the headlampswith washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaningsystem” (Y page 114).
Rear window wiper/washer
Combination switch1 Rear window wiper switch% Wiping rear window with washer fluid& Intermittent wiping( Rear window wiper off) Wiping rear window with washer fluid
X Switch on the ignition.The rear window wiper engages automaticallywhen the automatic transmission is shiftedinto reverse gear R with the windshield wipersswitched on.
X Activating intermittent wiping: Turn rearwindow wiper switch 1 to position &.
X Deactivating intermittent wiping: Turnrear window wiper switch 1 to position(.
X Wiping with washer fluid: Turn and holdrear window wiper switch 1 in position% or ) until the rear window is clean.
For information on filling up the washerreservoir, see “Washer system and headlampcleaning system” (Y page 246).
Problems with wipers! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them offimmediately.For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in asafe location, andR- remove the SmartKey from the starter
switchor
- turn off the engine by pressing theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button andopen the driver’s door (with thedriver’s door open, starter switch is in
Controls in detail
Z
Power windows
120
position 0, same as with SmartKeyremoved from starter switch)
- engage the parking brakebefore attempting to remove anyblockage.RRemove blockage.RTurn the windshield wipers on again.If the windshield wipers fail to function atall with the combination switch in positionU or V,Rset the combination switch to the next
higher wiper speedRhave the windshield wipers checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter
Power windows
Opening and closingThe door windows are opened and closedelectrically. The switches for all door windowsare located on the driver’s door control panel.The switches for the respective door windowsare located on the front passenger door andon the rear doors.
i Operating the rear door windows fromthe rear is not possible when you activatethe override switch (Y page 69).
Vehicles equipped with the PRE-SAFE®
system: If the vehicle is in a critical dynamicdriving situation, the door windows close untilonly a small gap remains.G Warning!When opening or closing the door windows,make sure there is no danger of anyonebeing harmed by the opening/closingprocedure.The door windows are equipped with theexpress operation and automatic reversalfunction. If in express operation mode adoor window encounters an obstructionthat blocks its path, the automatic reversal
function will stop the door window andopen it slightly.The door windows operate differently whenthe switch is pressed and held. See the“Closing when a door window is blocked”section in this chapter for details.The closing of the door windows can beimmediately halted by releasing the switchor, if the switch was pulled past theresistance point and released, by eitherpressing or pulling the respective switch.If a door window encounters an obstructionthat blocks its path in a circumstancewhere you are closing the door windows bypressing and holding button j on theSmartKey or by pressing and holding thelock button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) onan outside door handle, the automaticreversal function will not operate.Activate the override switch when childrenare riding in the back seats of the vehicle.The children may otherwise injurethemselves, e.g. by becoming trapped inthe door window opening.
Controls in detail
Power windows
121
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 62.
G Warning!Do not keep any part of your body upagainst the window pane when opening awindow. The downward motion of the panemay pull that part of your body downbetween the window pane and the doorframe and trap it there. If there is a risk ofentrapment, release the switch and pull itto close the window.
i You can also open or close the doorwindows using the SmartKey, see“Summer opening feature” (Y page 122)and “Convenience closingfeature” (Y page 123).
i After switching off the ignition orremoving the SmartKey from the starterswitch, you can operate the door windowsuntil you open the driver’s or frontpassenger door. If no door was opened youcan operate the door windows for up to5 minutes.
1 Left front door window2 Right front door window3 Right rear door window4 Left rear door window
X Switch on the ignition.X Opening/Closing: Press or pull and hold
switch 1 to 4 to the resistance point.The corresponding door window will movedownwards or upwards until you releasethe switch.
X Express operation: Press or pull switch1 to 4 past the resistance point andrelease.The corresponding door window opens orcloses completely.
X Stopping during express operation:Press or pull the respective switch again.
Closing when a door window is blocked
G Warning!Make sure that nobody can becometrapped and be seriously or even fatallyinjured when closing a door window withgreater force or without automatic reversalfunction.
If the upward movement of a door window isblocked during the closing procedure, thedoor window will stop and open slightly.However, the door window will exert greaterforce before reversing than when the doorwindow is closed in express operation. Pleaseexercise caution!X Immediately after the door window has
stopped because it was blocked, pull therespective switch upwards until the doorwindow is fully closed.
Controls in detail
Z
Power windows
122
If the door window is blocked again and opensslightly:X Immediately after the door window was
blocked, pull the respective switchupwards until the door window is fullyclosed.G Warning!Pressing and holding the switch to close thedoor window immediately after it had beenblocked two times will cause the doorwindow to close without any reversalfunction for as long as you hold the switch.
Synchronizing door windowsThe door windows must be synchronized afterthe battery has been disconnected or if thedoor windows cannot be fully closed (expressoperation).Each door window must be synchronizedseparately.X Close all doors.X Switch on the ignition.X Pull and hold switch 1, 2, 3 or 4
(Y page 121) until the respective doorwindow is closed.The door window opens again slightly.
X Pull and hold the respective switch oncemore immediately until the door window iscompletely closed.
X Hold the respective switch forapproximately 1 second.The door window is synchronized.
Summer opening featureIf the weather is warm, you can ventilate thevehicle before driving off by simultaneously:Ropening the door windowsRopening the tilt/sliding sunroofRopening the panorama roof and roller
sunblindsRswitching on the seat ventilation for the
driver’s seatThe summer opening feature can only beactivated via the remote control of theSmartKey. The SmartKey must be in closeproximity to the driver’s outside door handle.X Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the
driver’s outside door handle.
Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroofX Press and hold button k on the
SmartKey until the door windows and thetilt/sliding sunroof have reached thedesired position.The vehicle unlocks.
X Release button k on the SmartKey tointerrupt the opening procedure.
Vehicles with panorama roof (sedan)When roller sunblinds are extended:X Press and hold button k on the
SmartKey.The vehicle unlocks.The door windows open and the rollersunblinds begin to retract afterapproximately 1 second.
X With the door windows opened and theroller sunblinds fully retracted, press andhold button k on the SmartKey again.The tilt/sliding panel opens.
X Release button k on the SmartKey tointerrupt the opening procedure.
When roller sunblinds are retracted:X Press and hold button k on the
SmartKey.The vehicle unlocks.
Controls in detail
Power windows
123
The door windows and the tilt/sliding panelopens after approximately 1 second.
X Release button k on the SmartKey tointerrupt the opening procedure.
Convenience closing featureWhen locking the vehicle, you cansimultaneously closeRthe door windowsRthe tilt/sliding sunroofRthe panorama roofAfterward, you can extend the rollersunblinds of the panorama roof.G Warning!When closing the door windows and thetilt/sliding sunroof or panorama roof, makesure there is no danger of anyone beingharmed by the closing procedure.If potential danger exists, proceed asfollows:RRelease button j to stop the closing
procedure. To open, press and holdbutton k. To continue the closingprocedure after making sure that there isno danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure, press and hold buttonj.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:RRelease the lock button on the outside
door handle to stop the closingprocedure.RImmediately pull on the same outside
door handle and hold firmly. The doorwindows and the tilt/sliding sunroof orpanorama roof will open for as long as thedoor handle is held but the door notopened.
With SmartKeyThe SmartKey must be in close proximity tothe driver’s outside door handle.X Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the
driver’s outside door handle.X Press and hold button j on the
SmartKey until the door windows and thetilt/sliding sunroof or panorama roof arecompletely closed.
X Release button j on the SmartKey tointerrupt the closing procedure.
X Vehicles with panorama roof (sedan):Press and hold button j on theSmartKey once more.The roller sunblinds extend.
X Release button j on the SmartKey tointerrupt the extending procedure.
With KEYLESS-GOThe SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must belocated outside the vehicle withinapproximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door.X Close all doors.X Press and hold the lock button on an
outside door handle (Y page 83) until thedoor windows and the tilt/sliding sunroofor panorama roof are completely closed.
X Release the lock button on the outside doorhandle to interrupt the closing procedure.
X Vehicles with panorama roof (sedan):Press and hold the lock button on anoutside door handle once more.The roller sunblinds extend.
X Release the sensor surface to interrupt theextending procedure.
Controls in detail
Z
Driving and parking
124
Driving and parking
Safety notes
G Warning!Make sure absolutely no objects areobstructing the pedals’ range of movement.Keep the driver’s footwell clear of allobstacles. If there are any floormats orcarpets in the footwell, make sure thepedals still have sufficient clearance.During sudden driving or brakingmaneuvers the objects could get caughtbetween the pedals. You could then nolonger brake or accelerate. This could leadto accidents and injury.
G Warning!With the engine not running, there is nopower assistance for the brake andsteering systems. In this case, it isimportant to keep in mind that aconsiderably higher degree of effort isnecessary to brake and steer the vehicle.Adapt your driving accordingly.
Starting the engine
G Warning!Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous toyour health. All exhaust gas containscarbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it cancause unconsciousness and possibledeath.Do not run the engine in confined areas(such as a garage) which are not properlyventilated. If you think that exhaust gasfumes are entering the vehicle whiledriving, have the cause determined andcorrected immediately. If you must driveunder these conditions, drive only with atleast one window fully open at all times.
Automatic transmission
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmissionÁ Park position with gear selector lever lock Reverse gearÀ Neutral position¿ Drive positionFor more information, see “Automatictransmission” (Y page 130).X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
With SmartKeyX Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
125
X Gasoline engine: Turn the SmartKey in thestarter switch to position 3 (Y page 94) andrelease it.The engine starts automatically.
X Diesel engine: Turn the SmartKey in thestarter switch to position 2 (Y page 94).Preglow indicator lamp q in theinstrument cluster comes on.
X As soon as preglow indicator lamp qgoes out, turn the SmartKey in the starterswitch to position 3 and release it.The engine starts automatically.
i If the engine is at operating temperature,preglow indicator lamp q may not stayon and you can start the engine withoutpreglowing.
With KEYLESS-GO
G Warning!As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle,the vehicle can be started. Therefore, neverleave children unattended in the vehicle, asthey could otherwise accidentally start theengine.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Donot leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlockedvehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to avehicle could result in an accident and/orserious personal injury.
You can start your vehicle without theSmartKey in the starter switch using theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gearselector lever.The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button1 USA only2 Canada only
X Depress the brake pedal during the startingprocedure.
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
X Gasoline engine: Press the KEYLESS-GOstart/stop button once.The engine starts automatically.
X Diesel engine: Press the KEYLESS-GOstart/stop button once.The engine preglows and startsautomatically.
i If the engine is at operating temperature,the time the engine needs to preglow isreduced.
Starting difficulties! Remember that extended starting
attempts can drain the battery.
If the SmartKey is left in starter switchposition 0 for an extended period of time, itcan no longer be turned in the starter switch.In this case, the steering is locked.X To unlock, remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch and reinsert.
The engine does not start. You can hearthe starter.There could be a malfunction in the engineelectronics or in the fuel supply system.
Controls in detail
Z
Driving and parking
126
Carry out the following steps:X If you are starting the engine with the
SmartKey: Turn the SmartKey in the starterswitch to position 0 and repeat the startingprocedure.
X If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that may be open toallow for better detection of the SmartKey.
orX Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio
signals from another source may beinterfering with the KEYLESS-GO function.
X Repeat the starting procedure.
If the engine does not start after severalstarting attempts:X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
The engine does not start. You cannothear the starter.The battery may not be sufficiently charged.X Get a jump start (Y page 369).
If the engine will not start despite a jumpstart:X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
The starter has been exposed to excessivetemperatures.X Let the starter cool for about 2 minutes.X Repeat the starting procedure.
If the engine does not start after severalstarting attempts:X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
Driving off
G Warning!On slippery road surfaces, never downshiftin order to obtain braking action. This couldresult in drive wheel slip and reducedvehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will notprevent this type of loss of control.
! Do not run cold engine at high enginespeeds. Running a cold engine at highengine speeds may shorten the service lifeof the engine. This is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.E 63 AMG: At engine temperatures below68‡ (20†), the engine’s maximum speedis restricted in order to protect it fromdamage. Avoid driving your vehicle at fullspeed when the engine is cold to prevent
premature engine wear and/or diminishedcomfort.
! If an acoustic warning sounds and themessage Release Parking Brakeappears in the multifunction display whendriving off, you have forgotten to releasethe parking brake.Release the parking brake.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This maycause serious damage to the drivetrainwhich is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.
! Simultaneously depressing theaccelerator pedal and applying the brakesreduces engine performance and causespremature brake and drivetrain wear whichis not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.
i Once the vehicle is in motion, theautomatic central locking system engagesand the locking knobs in the doors movedown.The automatic door lock feature can bedeactivated (Y page 155).
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
127
Automatic transmission
G Warning!It is dangerous to shift the automatictransmission out of park position P orneutral position N if the engine speed ishigher than idle speed. If your foot is notfirmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle couldaccelerate quickly forward or in reverse.You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gearwhen the engine is idling normally andwhen your right foot is firmly on the brakepedal.
! Only shift the automatic transmission intoreverse gear R or park position P when thevehicle is stopped. Otherwise theautomatic transmission could be damaged.
X Depress the brake pedal.The gear selector lever lock is released.
X Shift the automatic transmission into driveposition D or reverse gear R.
i Shifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position P is only possible with thebrake pedal depressed.Only depressing the brake pedal releasesthe gear selector lever lock.
X Wait for the gear selection process tocomplete before setting the vehicle inmotion.
X Release the brake pedal.X If engaged, release the parking brake.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.After a cold start, the automatic transmissionshifts at a higher engine revolution. Thisallows the catalytic converter (gasolineengine) or the oxidation catalyst (dieselengine) to reach its operating temperatureearlier.For more information on driving, see “Drivinginstructions” (Y page 274).
Problems while driving
The engine runs erratically and misfiresRGasoline engine: An ignition cable may
be damaged.RThe engine electronics may not be
operating properly.RGasoline engine: Unburned gasoline may
have entered the catalytic converter anddamaged it.
X Give very little gas.X Have the problem checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The coolant temperature is above248‡ (120†)The coolant is too hot and is no longer coolingthe engine.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon
as possible.X Turn off the engine immediately.X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.X Check the coolant level and add coolant if
necessary (Y page 245).
In case of accidentIf the vehicle is leaking fuel:X Do not start the engine under any
circumstances.X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the
roadway.X Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
If the extent of the damage cannot bedetermined:X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
Controls in detail
Z
Driving and parking
128
If no damage on major assemblies, fuelsystem, and engine mount can bedetermined:X Start the engine in the usual manner.
Parking
G Warning!Do not park this vehicle in areas wherecombustible materials such as grass, hayor leaves can come into contact with thehot exhaust system, as these materialscould be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.To reduce the risk of serious personalinjury, or damage to the vehicle or thevehicle drivetrain, as a result of vehiclemovement, always do the following beforeturning off the engine and leaving thevehicle:RKeep right foot on the brake pedal.REngage the parking brake.RShift the automatic transmission into
park position P.RSlowly release the brake pedal.RWhen parked on an incline, always turn
the front wheels towards the road curb.
RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switchto position 0 and remove the SmartKeyfrom the starter switch, or press theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button.RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle when leaving.
G Warning!Vehicles with AIRMATIC: If you haveselected the Comfort suspension tuning,the vehicle lowers slightly when you lock itwithin approximately 60 seconds afterturning off the engine. You should thereforemake sure that no one is standing near thewheel arches or lying underneath thevehicle when it is being locked. Otherwise,personal injury could result.Also, make sure your vehicle cannot comeinto contact with objects, such as a roadcurb, while lowering. Your vehicle couldotherwise be damaged.
Parking brake
G Warning!Engaging the parking brake while thevehicle is in motion can cause the rearwheels to lock up. You could lose control of
the vehicle and cause an accident. Inaddition, the vehicle’s brake lights do notlight up when the parking brake is engaged.
G Warning!When leaving the vehicle, always removethe SmartKey from the starter switch, takeit with you, and lock the vehicle. Do notleave children unattended in the vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle.Children could release the parking brakeand/or shift the automatic transmissionout of park position P, either of which couldresult in an accident and/or seriouspersonal injury.
1 Release handle2 Parking brake pedal
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
129
X Releasing: Pull on release handle 1.When the ignition is switched on or theengine is running, the brake warninglamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canadaonly) in the instrument cluster goes out.
X Engaging: Step firmly on parking brakepedal 2.When the engine is running, the brakewarning lamp ; (USA only) or 3(Canada only) in the instrument clustercomes on.
Turning off the engine
G Warning!Do not turn off the engine before the vehiclehas come to a complete stop. With theengine not running, there is no powerassistance for the brake and steeringsystems. In this case, it is important to keepin mind that a considerably higher degreeof effort is necessary to brake and steer thevehicle.
X Shift the automatic transmission into parkposition P.
X Engage the parking brake.
i Always engage the parking brake inaddition to shifting the automatictransmission into park position P.When parked on an incline, also turn thefront wheels towards the road curb.
With SmartKeyX Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.The immobilizer is activated.
The SmartKey can only be removed from thestarter switch with the automatictransmission in park position P.
With KEYLESS-GOX Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
With the driver’s door closed, the starterswitch is now in position 1. With the driver’sdoor opened, the starter switch is set toposition 0, same as the SmartKey removedfrom the starter switch (Y page 94).
If an acoustic warning sounds, you have triedto turn off the engine with the KEYLESS-GOstart/stop button while the automatictransmission was not in park position P.
Read and observe messages that may appearin the multifunction display (Y page 307).
Controls in detail
Z
Automatic transmission
130
Automatic transmission
IntroductionFor information on driving with an automatictransmission, see “Driving andparking” (Y page 124).G Warning!Make sure absolutely no objects areobstructing the pedals’ range of movement.Keep the driver’s footwell clear of allobstacles. If there are any floormats orcarpets in the footwell, make sure thepedals still have sufficient clearance.During sudden driving or brakingmaneuvers the objects could get caughtbetween the pedals. You could then nolonger brake or accelerate. This could leadto accidents and injury.
! Allow engine to warm up under low loaduse. Do not place full load on the engineuntil the operating temperature has beenreached.Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for anextended period when driving off onslippery road surfaces.This may cause serious damage to theengine and the drivetrain which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.
i During the brief warm-up, transmissionupshifting is delayed. This allows thecatalytic converter (gasoline engine) oroxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to heat upmore quickly to operating temperature.
Gear selector lever
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmissionÁ Park position with gear selector lever lock Reverse gearÀ Neutral position¿ Drive position
G Warning!It is dangerous to shift the automatictransmission out of park position P orneutral position N if the engine speed ishigher than idle speed. If your foot is notfirmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle couldaccelerate quickly forward or in reverse.You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gearwhen the engine is idling normally andwhen your right foot is firmly on the brakepedal.
! Only shift the automatic transmission intoreverse gear R or park position P when thevehicle is stopped. Otherwise theautomatic transmission could be damaged.
i Shifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position P is only possible with thebrake pedal depressed.Only depressing the brake pedal releasesthe gear selector lever lock.
i The current gear selector lever positioncorresponds with the current transmissionposition.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
131
The current transmission position P, R, N,or D appears in the multifunction display(Y page 131).
There are additional indicators on the coverof the shifting gate showing the current gearselector lever position.The indicators come on when you insert theSmartKey into the starter switch, and go outwhen you remove the SmartKey from thestarter switch.
Shifting procedureThe automatic transmission selects individualgears automatically, depending on:Rthe selected gear range (Y page 133)Rthe selected program mode:
C/S (Y page 133)orM (E 63 AMG only) (Y page 135)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe vehicle speed
With drive position D selected, you caninfluence transmission shifting by:Rlimiting the gear rangeRextending the gear rangeRchanging the gears manually (E 63 AMG
only)
Transmission positionsThe current transmission position appears inthe multifunction display.
1 Transmission position indicator
Effect
ì Park positionShift the automatic transmissioninto park position P only when thevehicle is stopped. The parkposition is not intended to serveas a brake when the vehicle isparked. Rather, the driver shouldalways engage the parking brakein addition to shifting theautomatic transmission into parkposition P to secure the vehicle.The SmartKey can only beremoved from the starter switchwith the gear selector lever in parkposition P. With the SmartKeyremoved from the starter switch,the gear selector lever is locked inpark position P.If the vehicle’s electrical system ismalfunctioning, the gear selectorlever could remain locked in parkposition P. To unlock the gearselector lever manually, see“Manually unlocking the gearselector lever” (Y page 345).
í Reverse gear
Controls in detail
Z
Automatic transmission
132
EffectShift the automatic transmissioninto reverse gear R only when thevehicle is stopped.
Effect
ë Neutral positionNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive axle. When thebrakes are released, the vehiclecan be moved freely (pushed ortowed).To avoid damage to thetransmission, never shift theautomatic transmission intoneutral position N while driving.Exception: If the ESP® isdeactivated or malfunctioning,shift the automatic transmissioninto neutral position N if thevehicle is in danger of skidding.
! Coasting the vehicle, ordriving for any other reason withthe automatic transmission inneutral position N can result intransmission damage that is notcovered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.
ê Drive position
EffectThe automatic transmission shiftsautomatically. All forward gearsare available.
Driving tips
KickdownUse the kickdown when you want maximumacceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal past the
point of resistance.Depending on the engine speed theautomatic transmission shifts into a lowergear.
Working on the vehicle
G Warning!When working on the vehicle, engage theparking brake and shift the automatictransmission into park position P.Otherwise the vehicle could roll away whichcould result in an accident and/or seriouspersonal injury.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
133
Gear rangesWith the automatic transmission in driveposition D and driving in automatic programmode C or S, you can limit or extend the gearrange, see “One-touchgearshifting” (Y page 134).The current gear range appears in themultifunction display.
1 Gear range indicator
Effect
è With this selection you can use thebraking effect of the engine.
ç Allows the use of engine’s brakingpower when drivingRon steep downgradesRin mountainous regionsRunder extreme operating
conditions
æ For maximum use of engine’sbraking effect on very steep orlengthy downgrades.
Automatic shift program
Program mode selector switch
C Comfort For comfort driving
S Sport For standard driving
Program mode selector switch on E 63 AMG
C Comfort For standard driving
S Sport For sporty driving
M Manual For manual gearshifting(Y page 135)
Controls in detail
Z
Automatic transmission
134
The current program mode appears in themultifunction display.
1 Program mode indicator You should only change the program modewhen the automatic transmission is in parkposition P.
i The last selected automatic programmode (C or S) is switched on when theengine is restarted.
X Press the program mode selector switchrepeatedly until the letter of the desiredprogram mode appears in the multifunctiondisplay.
Selecting program mode C means:RThe vehicle starts out more gentle, both
forward and reverse, except when drivingoff with full throttle.RTraction and driving stability are improved
on icy roads.RUpshifts occur earlier even when you give
more gas. The engine then operates at
lower revolutions and the wheels are lesslikely to spin.
Selecting program mode S means thatupshifts occur later.
One-touch gearshiftingWith the automatic transmission in driveposition D and driving in automatic programmode C or S, you can limit or extend the gearrange using the gear selector lever or thesteering wheel gearshift contol.E 63 AMG: For information on using the gearselector lever or the steering wheel gearshiftcontrol in manual program mode M, see“Manual shift program” (Y page 135).
Steering wheel gearshift control (exampleillustration)1 Limiting gear range
Downshift (in manual program mode M)2 Extending gear range
Upshift (in manual program mode M)
i You cannot shift with the steering wheelgearshift control when the automatictransmission is in park position P, neutralposition N, or reverse gear R.
Limiting gear range
G Warning!On slippery road surfaces, never downshiftin order to obtain braking action. This couldresult in drive wheel slip and reduced
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
135
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will notprevent this type of loss of control.
X Briefly press the gear selector lever to theleft in the D- direction.
orX Briefly pull left gearshift control 1.
The automatic transmission will shift intothe next lower gear as permitted by theshift program. This action simultaneouslylimits the gear range of the automatictransmission.
i To avoid overrevving the engine whendownshifting, the automatic transmissionwill not shift into a lower gear if the engine’smaximum speed would be exceeded.
Extending gear rangeX Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
right in the D+ direction.orX Briefly pull right gearshift control 2.
The automatic transmission will shift intothe next higher gear as permitted by theshift program. This action simultaneouslyextends the gear range of the automatictransmission.
i If you press on the accelerator pedalwhen the engine has reached therevolution limit of the current gear range,the automatic transmission will upshiftbeyond any gear range limit selected.
Canceling gear range limitX Press and hold the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction until Dreappears in the multifunction display.
orX Pull and hold right gearshift control 2 untilD reappears in the multifunction display.The automatic transmission will shift fromthe current gear range directly into driveposition D.
Shifting into optimal gear rangeX Press and hold the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.orX Pull and hold left gearshift control 1.
The automatic transmission will select thegear range suited for optimal accelerationand deceleration automatically. This willinvolve shifting down one or more gears.
Manual shift programThe manual shift program is available onE 63 AMG only.Manual program mode M differs with regardto spontaneity, response time, and shiftingsmoothness from automatic program modeS.In manual program mode M, system-controlled automatic gearshifting is switchedoff. You need to change the gears by manuallyupshifting or downshifting using the gearselector lever or the steering wheel gearshiftcontrol.
Program mode selector switch
Controls in detail
Z
Automatic transmission
136
C Comfort For standard driving
S Sport For sporty driving
M Manual For manual gearshifting
The current program mode appears in themultifunction display (Y page 134).For information on automatic program mode(C or S), see “Automatic shiftprogram” (Y page 133) and “One-touchgearshifting” (Y page 134).
Activating manual shift programX Press the program mode selector switch
repeatedly until M appears in themultifunction display.The automatic transmission switches tomanual program mode M. Automaticshifting is switched off. The gear range isnot limited.
You can change the gears manually with driveposition D selected. You can upshift ordownshift through the gears in succession.
i Manual program mode M will not bestored. When the engine is turned off withmanual program mode M selected, theautomatic transmission will go to
automatic program mode (C or S) when theengine is restarted.
Upshifting! In manual program mode M, the
automatic transmission will not upshift,even if the engine has reached itsoverrevving range. Shift up into the nextgear before the engine has reached itsoverrevving range. Make absolutely certainthat the engine speed does not reach thered marking on the tachometer. Otherwisethe engine could be damaged which is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.
X Briefly press the gear selector lever to theright in the D+ direction.
orX Briefly pull right gearshift control 2
(Y page 134).The automatic transmission shifts into thenext higher gear.
Upshift indicator
1 Current gear2 Upshift indicatorIn manual program mode M, upshift indicator2 in the multifunction display advises you toupshift before the engine reaches theoverspeed range. In addition, symbol ^ mayappear instead of manual program modesymbol M in the multifunction display. Thusyou can drive at the maximum engine speedfor each gear without overrevving the engine.X Shift the automatic transmission from
current gear 1 into the next higher gear.The fuel supply will otherwise beinterrupted to prevent the engine fromoverrevving.
Downshifting
G Warning!On slippery road surfaces, never downshiftin order to obtain braking action. This couldresult in drive wheel slip and reducedvehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will notprevent this type of loss of control.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
137
X Briefly press the gear selector lever to theleft in the D- direction.
orX Briefly pull left gearshift control 1
(Y page 134).The automatic transmission shifts into thenext lower gear.
i For maximum acceleration, press andhold the gear selector lever to the left in theD- direction or pull and hold the leftgearshift control. Depending on the enginespeed the automatic transmission selectsthe optimal gear for maximumacceleration.
i When you brake or stop, the automatictransmission shifts down into a gear fromwhich you can easily accelerate or take off.
KickdownUsing the kickdown when driving in manualprogram mode M is not possible.
Deactivating manual shift programX Press the program mode selector switch
repeatedly until C or S appears in themultifunction display.
orX Restart the engine.
The automatic transmission will go toautomatic program mode (C or S).
Manual program mode M is not stored.
Emergency operation (limp-homemode)
If vehicle acceleration becomes lessresponsive or sluggish or the automatictransmission no longer shifts, the automatictransmission is most likely operating in limp-home (emergency operation) mode. In thismode only second gear and reverse gear Rcan be selected.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.X Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.X Turn off the engine.X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.X Restart the engine.
X Shift the automatic transmission into driveposition D (for second gear) or reverse gearR.
X Have the automatic transmission checkedat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center assoon as possible.
Controls in detail
Z
Instrument cluster
138
Instrument cluster
IntroductionFor a full view illustration of the instrumentcluster, see “Instrumentcluster” (Y page 30).G Warning!No messages will be displayed if either theinstrument cluster or the multifunctiondisplay is inoperative.As a result, you will not be able to seeinformation about your driving conditions,such as speed or outside temperature,warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning messages or the failure of anysystems. Driving characteristics may beimpaired.If you must continue to drive, please do sowith added caution. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
1 Reset button For information on changing the instrumentcluster settings, e.g. the language, see(Y page 151).
Activating the instrument clusterThe instrument cluster is activated when youRopen a front doorRswitch on the ignitionRpress reset button 1Rswitch on the exterior lamps
Adjusting the instrument clusterillumination
i The instrument cluster illumination isdimmed or brightened automatically to suitambient light conditions.The instrument cluster illumination will alsobe adjusted automatically when you switchon the vehicle’s exterior lamps.
X To brighten illumination: Turn resetbutton 1 clockwise until the desired levelof illumination is reached.
X To dim illumination: Turn reset button1 counterclockwise until the desired levelof illumination is reached.
Coolant temperature indicatorThe coolant temperature indicator is locatedon the right side in the instrument cluster(Y page 30).G Warning!Driving when your engine is overheated cancause some fluids which may have leakedinto the engine compartment to catch fire.You could be seriously burned.
Controls in detail
Control system
139
Steam from an overheated engine cancause serious burns which can occur justby opening the engine hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hear steamcoming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location awayfrom other traffic. Turn off the engine, getout of the vehicle and do not stand near thevehicle until the engine has cooled down.
During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature mayrise close to 248‡ (120†).
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers awarning in the multifunction display and thered coolant temperature warning lampD in the instrument cluster comes on.The engine should not be operated with acoolant temperature above 248‡ (120†).Doing so may cause serious engine damagewhich is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.
Resetting trip odometerX Make sure you are viewing the standard
display (Y page 143) in the multifunctiondisplay.
X Press and hold the reset button in theinstrument cluster (Y page 138) until thetrip odometer is reset.
TachometerThe red marking on the tachometer(Y page 30) denotes excessive engine speed.
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds,as it may result in serious engine damagethat is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply isinterrupted if the engine is operated withinthe red marking.
Control system
IntroductionThe control system is activated as soon as thestarter switch is in position 1 (Y page 94).The control system enables you to call upinformation about your vehicle and to changevehicle settings.For example, you can use the control systemto find out when your vehicle is next due formaintenance service, to set the language formessages in the instrument cluster display,and much more.G Warning!A driver’s attention to the road and trafficconditions must always be his/her primaryfocus when driving.For your safety and the safety of others,selecting features through themultifunction steering wheel should only bedone by the driver when traffic and roadconditions permit it to be done safely.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet(approximately 14 m) every second.
Controls in detail
Z
Control system
140
The control system relays information to themultifunction display.
Multifunction steering wheelThe displays in the multifunction display andthe settings in the control system arecontrolled by the buttons on the multifunctionsteering wheel.
1 Multifunction display
2 Press buttons to take a call
to dial7
to redial7
t to end a callto reject an incoming call
3 Press buttonæç
to select submenus in theSettings menuto set valuesto operate the RACETIMER8
to set the volume
4 Press buttonèÿ
to select next or previous menu
5 Press button brieflyjk
to move within a menuWithin Audio/DVD menu toselect previous or next track,scene or stored stationWithin Telephone menu toswitch to the phone book andselect a name or number
Press and hold buttonjk
Within Audio/DVD menu toselect previous or next trackwith quick search or to selectprevious or next station instation list or wave bandWithin Telephone menu tostart the quick search in thephone book
Depending on the selected menu, pressingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel will alter what appears in themultifunction display.The information available in the multifunctiondisplay is arranged in menus andaccompanying functions and submenus.
7 Function only available in telephone menu.8 AMG vehicles only.
Controls in detail
Control system
141
The individual functions are then found withinthe relevant menu (radio or CD operationsunder Audio/DVD menu, for example).These functions serve to call up relevantinformation or to customize the settings foryour vehicle.It is helpful to think of the menus, and thefunctions within each menu, as beingarranged in a circular pattern.X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly to
pass through each menu one after theother.
X Press button k or j repeatedly topass through each function display, oneafter the other, in the current menu.
In the Settings menu, instead of functions,you will find a number of submenus for calling
up and changing settings. For instructions onusing these submenus, see “Settingsmenu” (Y page 149).The number of menus available in the systemdepends on which optional equipment isinstalled in your vehicle.
Multifunction display
1 Outside temperature indicator2 Trip odometer3 Automatic transmission program mode
indicator4 Main odometer 5 Transmission position/gear range
indicatorFor more information on menus displayed inthe multifunction display, see “Menus andsubmenus” (Y page 142).
Controls in detail
Z
Control system
142
Menus and submenus
i The headings used in the menus table aredesigned to facilitate navigation within the
system and are not necessarily identical tothose shown in the multifunction display.
Controls in detail
Control system
143
The first function displayed in each menuwill automatically show you which part ofthe system you are in.
Function
1 Standard display menu(Y page 143)
2 AMG9 menu (Y page 144)
3 Audio/DVD menu (Y page 146)
4 Navigation menu (Y page 148)
5 Distronic menu (Y page 148)
6 Vehicle status messagememory10 menu (Y page 148)
7 Settings menu (Y page 149)
8 Trip computer menu (Y page 156)
9 Telephone menu (Y page 158)
Standard display menuYou can select whether the digitalspeedometer or the outside temperatureappears in the standard display(Y page 152).
Standard display1 Basic display with outside temperature2 Trip odometer
X If you see another display, press buttonè or ÿ repeatedly until the standarddisplay appears.
X Press button j or k to select thefunctions in the Standard display menu.
The following functions are available:RRestarting the Run Flat Indicator
(Y page 257) (Canada only)RRestarting the TPMS (Y page 260) (USA
only)RChecking tire inflation pressure with the
Advanced TPMS (Canada only)(Y page 259)RCalling up digital speedometer or outside
temperature (Y page 143)RCalling up maintenance service indicator
display (Y page 281)
Calling up digital speedometer oroutside temperatureDepending on the chosen setiing for thestandard display (Y page 152) you can callup the other display here.G Warning!The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for thatpurpose.
9 AMG vehicles only.10 The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
Controls in detail
Z
Control system
144
Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that theroad surface is free of ice. The road may stillbe icy, especially in wooded areas or onbridges.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe digital speedometer or the outsidetemperature appears in the multifunctiondisplay.
1 Basic display with digital speedometer2 Status line display with outside
temperature3 Trip odometerYou can select whether the digitalspeedometer or the outside temperatureappears in the status line display(Y page 152).
AMG menuThis function is only available in AMGvehicles.The main screen of the AMG menu shows youthe gear currently engaged as well as theengine oil temperature.X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in themultifunction display.
1 Gear indicator2 Engine oil temperature indicatorThe engine oil temperature flashes if theengine oil temperature has not yet reached80†. During this time, avoid driving at fullengine speed.If the engine reaches the overspeed range inthe manual shift program, the menu will beshown in red. In addition, you will see UP nextto gear indicator 1 as a reminder to upshift.
Use buttons j or k to select thefollowing functions in the AMG menu:RVehicle supply voltage (Y page 144)RRACETIMER (Y page 145)ROverall analysis (Y page 146)RLap analysis (Y page 146)
Vehicle supply voltageX Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in themultifunction display.
X Press button j repeatedly until thevehicle supply voltage appears in themultifunction display.
1 Gear indicator2 Vehicle supply voltage indicator
Controls in detail
Control system
145
RACETIMER
G Warning!The RACETIMER feature is only for use onroads and in conditions where high speeddriving is permitted. Racing on public roadsis prohibited under all circumstances andthe driver is and must always remainresponsible for following posted speedlimits.
The RACETIMER allows you to time and savedriving stretches.X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in themultifunction display.
X Press button j repeatedly until theRACETIMER appears in the multifunctiondisplay.
1 Gear indicator2 RACETIMER3 Lap number
You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or the starter switch is inposition 2 (Y page 94).While the RACETIMER is being displayed, youcannot adjust the audio volume using buttonsæ or ç.X Starting: Press button æ.X Displaying intermediate time: Press
button ç while the timer is running.The intermediate time is shown for5 seconds.
X Stopping: Press button æ.When you stop the vehicle and turn theSmartKey to position 1 (Y page 94) or, invehicles with KEYLESS-GO, turn off theengine and do not open the driver’s door, theRACETIMER stops timing. Timing is resumedwhen you switch the ignition back on orrestart the engine and then press buttonæ.
Saving lap time and starting a new lapYou can save up to nine laps.
X Press button ç while the timer isrunning.The intermediate time will be shown for5 seconds.
X Press button ç within 5 seconds.The intermediate time shown will be savedas a lap time.The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap.The new lap begins to be timed as soon asthe intermediate time is called up.
1 Gear indicator2 RACETIMER3 Best lap time4 Lap number
Resetting current lapX Press button æ while the timer is
running.The timer stops.
X Press button ç.The lap time is reset to “0”.
Controls in detail
Z
Control system
146
Deleting all lapsIt is not possible to delete a single saved lap.When you turn off the engine, the RACETIMERwill be reset to “0” after 30 seconds. All lapsare deleted.X Press button æ while the timer is
running.The timer stops.
X Press the reset button in the instrumentcluster twice (Y page 138).
X Press button æ.The timer starts. The saved laps aredeleted.
Overall analysisThis function is only available if you havesaved at least one lap and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in themultifunction display.
X Press button j repeatedly until theoverall analysis appears in themultifunction display.
1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER2 Overall driving time3 Maximum speed4 Overall distance driven5 Average speed
Lap analysisThis function is only available if you havesaved at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in themultifunction display.
X Press button j repeatedly until the lapanalysis appears in the multifunctiondisplay.
Each lap is shown in its own submenu. Thefastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol1.
1 Lap number2 Lap time3 Maximum speed during lap4 Lap length5 Average speed during lap
X Press button j or k to see other lapanalyses.
Audio/DVD menuThe functions in the Audio/DVD menuoperate the audio or video equipment whichyou have currently switched on.The following functions are available:RSelecting radio station (Y page 147)ROperating audio devices/audio media
(Y page 147)ROperating video DVD (Y page 148)
Controls in detail
Control system
147
If no audio equipment is currently switchedon, the message AUDIO Off appears in themultifunction display.
Selecting radio stationThe HD Radio with SIRIUS Satellite Radio istreated as a radio application.For more information on HD Radio withSIRIUS Satellite Radio, refer to separateCOMAND system operating instructions.Additional optional satellite radio equipmentand a subscription to satellite radio serviceprovider are required for satellite radiooperation. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details and availability foryour vehicle.X Switch on the COMAND system and select
radio. Refer to separate COMAND systemoperating instructions.
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly untilthe currently tuned station appears in themultifunction display.
Example illustration for FM radio1 Wave band setting2 Station frequency
X Select next or previous stored station:Press button k or j briefly to selecta stored station.
X Select next or previous station in thestation list: Press and hold button k orj to select a station.
X Select next or previous station in waveband (Only if no station list is available):Press and hold button k or j toselect a station.
You can only store new stations using thecorresponding feature on the radio. Refer toseparate COMAND system operatinginstructions.You can also operate the radio in the usualmanner.
Operating audio devices/audio mediaX Switch on the COMAND system and select
the audio device or audio media. Refer toseparate COMAND system operatinginstructions.
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly untilthe Audio/DVD menu appears in themultifunction display.
Example illustration1 Disc number2 Current track
X Selecting previous or next track: Pressbutton k or j briefly.
X Selecting a track from the track list(quick search): Press and hold buttonk or j.
The current track does not appear duringAudio AUX mode operation.
Controls in detail
Z
Control system
148
Operating video DVDX Switch on the COMAND system and select
DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMANDsystem operating instructions.
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly untilthe Audio/DVD menu appears in themultifunction display.
1 Disc number2 Current scene
X Press button k or j to select ascene.
Navigation menuThe Navigation menu contains the functionsneeded to operate your navigation system.X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the Navigation menu appears in themultifunction display.The message shown in the multifunctiondisplay depends on the status of thenavigation system:RWith the COMAND system switched off,
the message NAVI Off appears in themultifunction display.RWith the COMAND system switched on
but route guidance not activated, thedirection of travel and, if applicable, thename of the street currently traveled onappear in the multifunction display.RWith the COMAND system switched on
and route guidance activated, thedirection of travel and maneuverinstructions appear in the multifunctiondisplay.
Please refer to seperate COMAND systemoperating instructions for instructions on howto activate the route guidance system.
Distronic menuUse the Distronic menu to display thecurrent settings for your Distronic system.The information shown in the multifunctiondisplay depends on whether the Distronicsystem is activated or deactivated.Please refer to the “Driving systems” sectionof this manual (Y page 162) for instructionson how to activate Distronic.
Vehicle status message memorymenu
Use the Vehicle status message memorymenu to scan malfunction and warningmessages that may be stored in the memory.Such messages appear in the multifunctiondisplay and are based on conditions orsystem status the vehicle’s system hasrecorded.The Vehicle status message memory menuonly appears if messages have been stored.G Warning!Malfunction and warning messages areonly indicated for certain systems and areintentionally not very detailed. Themalfunction and warning messages aresimply a reminder with respect to the
Controls in detail
Control system
149
operation of certain systems. They do notreplace the owner’s and/or driver’sresponsibility to maintain the vehicle’soperating safety. Have all requiredmaintenance and safety checks performedon the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center toaddress the malfunction and warningmessages.
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly untilthe Vehicle status message memorymenu appears in the multifunction display.If conditions have occurred causing statusmessages to be recorded, the number ofmessages appears in the multifunctiondisplay.
X Press button j or k.The stored messages will now be displayedin the order in which they have occurred.
For malfunction and warning messages,see “Vehicle status messages in themultifunction display” (Y page 295).
Should the vehicle’s system record anyconditions while driving, the number ofmessages will reappear in the multifunctiondisplay when the SmartKey in the starterswitch is turned to position 0 or removedfrom the starter switch. With KEYLESS-GO,the number of messages will reappear whenyou turn off the engine by pressing theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open thedriver’s door.Except for high-priority messages, the vehiclestatus message memory will be cleared whenyou switch off the ignition.
Settings menu
IntroductionIn the Settings menu there are twofunctions: The function To reset, pressreset button for 3 seconds., with whichyou can reset all the settings to the originalfactory settings and a collection of submenuswith which you can make individual settingsfor your vehicle.
The following settings and submenus areavailable in the Settings menu:RResetting to factory settings
(Y page 149)RSubmenus in the Settings menu
(Y page 150)RInstrument cluster submenu
(Y page 151)RTime/Date submenu (Y page 152)RLighting submenu (Y page 153)RVehicle submenu (Y page 155)RConvenience submenu (Y page 156)
Resetting to factory settingsYou can reset the functions of all submenusto the factory settings.For safety reasons, the function HeadlampMode in the Lighting submenu cannot bereset while driving.X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in themultifunction display.
Controls in detail
Z
Control system
150
X Press the reset button in the instrumentcluster for approximately 3 seconds.The request to press the reset button oncemore to confirm appears in themultifunction display.
X Press the reset button once more.The functions of all the submenus will bereset to factory settings.
The settings you have changed will not bereset unless you confirm the action bypressing the reset button a second time. Afterapproximately 5 seconds, the Settingsmenu reappears in the multifunction display.
Submenus in the Settings menuX Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in themultifunction display.
X Press button j.The collection of the submenus appears inthe multifunction display. There are more
submenus than can be simultaneouslydisplayed.
X Press button ç.The selection marker moves to the nextsubmenu.
X Scroll down with button ç, scroll upwith button æ.
X With the selection marker on the desiredsubmenu, use button j to access theindividual functions within that submenu.
X Once within the submenu, use buttonj to move to the next function or buttonk to move to the previous functionwithin that submenu.
X Use button æ or ç to change thesettings of the respective function.
The following lists show what settings can bechanged within the various menus. Detailedinstructions on making individual settings canbe found on the following pages.
Instrument cluster submenuRSelecting speedometer display mode
(Y page 151)RSelecting language (Y page 151)RSelecting display (speed or outside
temperature) for status line (Y page 152)RSelecting display (speed or outside
temperature) for standard display(Y page 152)
Time/Date submenuRSetting the time (Y page 152)RSetting the date (Y page 153)
Lighting submenuRSetting daytime running lamp mode (USA
only) (Y page 153)RSetting locator lighting (Y page 154)RSetting ambient lighting (Y page 154)RSetting night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature)(Y page 154)RSetting interior lighting delayed shut-off
(Y page 155)
Controls in detail
Control system
151
Vehicle submenuRSetting automatic central locking
(Y page 155)
Convenience submenuRActivating easy-entry/exit feature
(Y page 156)
Instrument cluster submenuAccess the Instr. Cluster submenu viathe Settings menu. Use the Instr.Cluster submenu to change the instrumentcluster display settings.The following functions are available:RSelecting speedometer display mode
(Y page 151)RSelecting language (Y page 151)RSelecting display (speed or outside
temperature) for status line (Y page 152)RSelecting display (speed or outside
temperature) for standard display(Y page 152)
Selecting speedometer display modeX Move the selection marker with buttonæ or ç to the Instr. Clustersubmenu.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message Display Unit Speed-/Odometer appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.
X Press button æ or ç to setspeedometer unit to Km or Miles.
Selecting languageX Move the selection marker with buttonæ or ç to the Instr. Clustersubmenu.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message Language appears in themultifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.
X Press button æ or ç to select thelanguage to be used for the multifunctiondisplay messages.
Controls in detail
Z
Control system
152
Selecting display (speed or outsidetemperature) for status lineX Move the selection marker with buttonæ or ç to the Instr. Clustersubmenu.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message Status Line Displayappears in the multifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.
X Press button æ or ç to select thestatus line to Speed or Outside Temp..You will see the status line display whenyou have called up a different display fromthe standard display.
Selecting display (speed or outsidetemperature) for standard displayX Move the selection marker with buttonæ or ç to the Instr. Clustersubmenu.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message Basic Display appears inthe multifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.
X Press button æ or ç to select thedisplay shown in the standard display.The other display now appears in theStandard display menu (Y page 143).
Time/Date submenuAccess the Time/Date submenu via theSettings menu. Use the Time/Datesubmenu to change the time and date displaysettings.
The following functions are available:RSetting the time (Y page 152)RSetting the date (Y page 153)
Setting the timeThis function is only available if your vehicleis not equipped with navigation module.X Move the selection marker with buttonæ or ç to the Time/Date submenu.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message Time - Hours Press R ToConfirm or Time - Minute(s) Press RTo Confirm appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.
Example illustration for setting the hour
X Press button æ or ç to set the hoursor minute(s).
X Press the reset button to confirm.
Controls in detail
Control system
153
Setting the dateThis function is only available if your vehicleis not equipped with navigation module.X Move the selection marker with buttonæ or ç to the Time/Date submenu.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message Set Date Month, Set DateDay, or Set Date Year appears in themultifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.
Example illustration for setting the month
X Press button æ or ç to set themonth, day, or year.
Lighting submenuAccess the Lighting submenu via theSettings menu. Use the Lighting submenuto change the lamp and lighting settings onyour vehicle.
The following functions are available:RSetting daytime running lamp mode (USA
only) (Y page 153)RSetting locator lighting (Y page 154)RSetting ambient lighting (Y page 154)RSetting night security illumination
(Y page 154)RSetting interior lighting delayed shut-off
(Y page 155)
Setting daytime running lamp mode (USAonly)X Move the selection marker with buttonæ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message Headlamp Mode appears inthe multifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.
X Press button æ or ç to selectmanual operation (Manual) or daytimerunning lamp mode (Constant).
With daytime running lamp mode activatedand the exterior lamp switch in positionM or U, the low-beam headlamps areswitched on when the engine is running.In low ambient light conditions the followinglamps will come on additionally:RParking lampsRTail lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lampsFor more information on the daytime runninglamp mode, see “Lighting” (Y page 112).For safety reasons, resetting all the functionsof all submenus to the factory settings whiledriving (Y page 149) will not deactivate thedaytime running lamp mode.The following message appears in themultifunction display:Lighting - Cannot be completelyreset to factory settings whiledriving.
Controls in detail
Z
Control system
154
Setting locator lightingWith the locator lighting feature activated andthe exterior lamp switch in position U, thefollowing lamps will come on during darknesswhen the vehicle is unlocked using buttonk on the SmartKey:RParking lampsRTail lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lampsRFront fog lampsThe locator lighting goes out when the driver’sdoor is opened.If you do not open the driver’s door afterunlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, thelamps will go out automatically afterapproximately 40 seconds.X Move the selection marker with buttonæ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message Surround Light.Function appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.
X Press button æ or ç to switch thelocator lighting function On or Off.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionU when exiting the vehicle.The locator lighting feature is activated.
Setting ambient lightingUse this function to adjust the brightness ofthe ambient lighting.X Move the selection marker with buttonæ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message Ambient Light Levelappears in the multifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.
X Press button æ or ç to select thedesired brightness of the ambient lighting.The setting 1 represents the darkest leveland setting 5 the brightest level. Theambient light is switched off at setting 0.
Setting night security illumination(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature)Use this function to set whether you wouldlike the exterior lamps to remain on for15 seconds during darkness after exiting thevehicle and closing all doors.With the headlamps delayed shut-off featureactivated and the exterior lamp switch inposition U before the engine is turned off,the following lamps will come on when theengine is turned off:RParking lampsRTail lampsRLicense plate lamps
Controls in detail
Control system
155
RSide marker lampsRFront fog lampsIf, after turning off the engine, you do notopen a door or do not close an opened door,the lamps will automatically go out after60 seconds.X Move the selection marker with buttonæ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message Headlamps Delayed Shut-off appears in the multifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.
X Press button æ or ç to switch theheadlamps delayed shut-off feature On orOff.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionU before turning off the engine.The headlamps delayed shut-off feature isactivated.
You can temporarily deactivate theheadlamps delayed shut-off feature:X Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to position0.
X Then turn it to position 2 and back toposition 0.The headlamps delayed shut-off feature isdeactivated. It will reactivate as soon asyou start the engine.
Setting interior lighting delayed shut-offUse this function to set whether you wouldlike the interior lighting to remain on for10 seconds during darkness after you haveremoved the SmartKey from the starterswitch.X Move the selection marker with buttonæ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message Interior LightingDelayed Shut-off appears in themultifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.
X Press button æ or ç to switch theinterior lighting delayed shut-off featureOn or Off.
Vehicle submenuAccess the Vehicle submenu via theSettings menu. Use the Vehicle submenuto set the automatic central locking.
Setting automatic central lockingUse this function to activate or deactivate theautomatic central locking. With the automaticcentral locking system activated, the vehicleis centrally locked at a vehicle speed ofapproximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
Controls in detail
Z
Control system
156
X Move the selection marker with buttonæ or ç to the Vehicle submenu.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message Automatic Door Lockingappears in the multifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.
X Press button æ or ç to switch theautomatic central locking On or Off.
Convenience submenuAccess the Convenience submenu via theSettings menu. Use the Conveniencesubmenu to activate the easy-entry/exitfeature.
Activating easy-entry/exit featureUse this function to activate and deactivatethe easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 106).
G Warning!You must make sure no one can becometrapped or injured by the moving steeringwheel when the easy-entry/exit feature isactivated.To stop steering wheel movement, movesteering wheel adjustment stalk or pressone of the memory position buttons.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, or with access to an unlockedvehicle. Children could open the driver’sdoor and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in anaccident and/or serious personal injury.
X Move the selection marker with buttonæ or ç to the Conveniencesubmenu.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message Easy-entry Functionappears in the multifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.
X Press button æ or ç to switch theeasy-entry feature On or Off.
Trip computer menuUse the Trip computer menu to call upstatistical data on your vehicle.The following information is available:RFuel consumption statistics since start
(Y page 157)RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
(Y page 157)RResetting fuel consumption statistics
(Y page 157)RDistance to empty (Y page 157)
Controls in detail
Control system
157
Fuel consumption statistics since startX Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the first function of the Trip computermenu appears in the multifunction display.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message From Start appears in themultifunction display.
1 Distance driven since start2 Time elapsed since start3 Average speed since start4 Average fuel consumption since startAll statistics stored since the last engine startwill be reset approximately 4 hours after theSmartKey in the starter switch is turned toposition 0 or removed from the starter switch.Resetting will not occur if you turn theSmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within thistime period.
Fuel consumption statistics since lastresetX Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the first function of the Trip computermenu appears in the multifunction display.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message From Reset appears in themultifunction display.
1 Distance driven since last reset2 Time elapsed since last reset3 Average speed since last reset4 Average fuel consumption since last reset
Resetting fuel consumption statisticsX Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the first function of the Trip computermenu appears in the multifunction display.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe reading that you want to reset appearsin the multifunction display.
X Press and hold the reset button in theinstrument cluster until the respectivevalues are reset to 0.
The fuel consumption statistics resetautomatically to 0 after 99 999 miles or9 999 hours, whichever occurs first.
Distance to emptyX Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the first function of the Trip computermenu appears in the multifunction display.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe message Range: appears in themultifunction display.The calculated remaining driving rangebased on the current fuel tank levelappears in the multifunction display.If only very little fuel is left in the tank, avehicle at the fuel pump ¿ appearsinstead of the remaining driving range.
Controls in detail
Z
Control system
158
Telephone menu
G Warning!A driver’s attention to the road must alwaysbe his/her primary focus when driving. Foryour safety and the safety of others, werecommend that you pull over to a safelocation and stop before placing or takinga telephone call. If you choose to use thetelephone while driving, please use thehands-free device and only use thetelephone when weather, road and trafficconditions permit.Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a mobile phone while driving avehicle.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet(approximately 14 m) every second.
Never operate radio transmitters equippedwith a built-in or attached antenna (i.e.without being connected to an externalantenna) from inside the vehicle while theengine is running. Doing so could lead to amalfunction of the vehicle’s electronicsystem, possibly resulting in an accidentand/or personal injury.
You can connect your telephone to theCOMAND system via Bluetooth®, seeseparate COMAND system operatinginstructions.X Switch on the COMAND system.
Refer to separate COMAND systemoperating instructions.
X Press button ÿ or è repeatedly untilthe message TEL appears in themultifunction display.One of the following messages will appearin the multifunction display:RNo Service: No network is available.RBluetooth Ready: The telephone has
not been connected to the COMANDsystem via Bluetooth® yet.
X Connect the telephone to theCOMAND system via Bluetooth®.
RReady or name of the network provider(if available): The telephone has found anetwork and is ready for use. You canoperate it using the control system.
Answering a callWhen your telephone is ready to receive calls,you can answer a call at any time. In themultifunction display you will then see thefollowing message, or if available, the callerID (number or name):
X Press button s.You have answered the call.
Ending a call or rejecting an incomingcallX Press button t.
Controls in detail
Control system
159
Dialing a number from the phone bookWhen your telephone is ready to receive calls,you may select and dial a number from thephone book at any time.X Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the message TEL appears in themultifunction display.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe desired name appears in themultifunction display.If you press and hold button j ork for longer than 1 second, the systemscrolls rapidly through the list of namesuntil you release the button again.The stored names are displayed inascending or descending alphabeticalorder.
1 Selected name from the phone book
X Press button s.The control system dials the selectedphone number.If the connection is successful and thisfeature is supported by your networkprovider, the name of the party (if stored inyour phone book) you are calling willappear in the multifunction display.The control system stores the dialednumber in the redial memory.
orX Press button t if you do not want to
make the call.
RedialingThe control system stores the most recentlydialed phone numbers. This eliminates theneed to search through your entire phonebook.
X Press button ÿ or è repeatedly untilthe message TEL appears in themultifunction display.
X Press button s.The first number in the redial memoryappears in the multifunction display.
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe desired number or name appears in themultifunction display.
X Press button s.The control system dials the selectedphone number.
Controls in detail
Z
Driving systems
160
Driving systems
IntroductionThis section describes the following drivingsystems of your vehicle:RCruise control and DistronicRDistance warning function is only available
with DistronicRAIRMATIC DCRAll-wheel drive (4MATIC)RParktronic system (sedan)The ABS, Adaptive Brake, BAS, EBP andESP® driving safety systems are described inthe “Safety and security” section(Y page 70).
Cruise controlThe cruise control automatically maintainsthe speed you set for your vehicle.The use of the cruise control is recommendedfor driving at a constant speed for extendedperiods of time.The currently set speed or last set speed(“Resume” function) appears in themultifunction display for approximately5 seconds. The corresponding cruise controlspeed segments from the selected speed tothe vehicle maximum speed in themultifunction display are illuminated.G Warning!The cruise control is a convenience systemdesigned to assist the driver during vehicleoperation. The driver is and must alwaysremain responsible for the vehicle’s speedand for safe brake operation.Only use the cruise control if the road,traffic, and weather conditions make itadvisable to travel at a constant speed.RThe use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
traffic because conditions do not allowsafe driving at a constant speed.RThe use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapidchanges in tire traction can result inwheel spin and loss of control.RDeactivate the cruise control when
driving in fog.The “Resume” function should only beoperated if the driver is fully aware of thepreviously set speed and wishes to resumethis particular preset speed.
G Warning!The cruise control brakes automatically sothat the set speed is not exceeded.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
161
1 Setting current or higher speed2 Setting current or lower speed3 Canceling the cruise control4 Activating the cruise control or resuming
to last set speed
Activating cruise controlYou can activate the cruise control at avehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).You cannot activate the cruise control:Rwhen you brakeRwhen you have engaged the parking brake
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in parkposition P, reverse gear R, or neutralposition NRthe ESP® is switched off or has switched off
due to a malfunctionThe vehicle speed displayed in thespeedometer can briefly vary from the speedsetting for the cruise control system.
Setting current speedX Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 or press in directionof arrow 2.
X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.
i On uphill grades, the cruise control maynot be able to maintain the set speed. Oncethe grade eases, the set speed will beresumed.On downhill grades, the cruise controlmaintains the set speed by braking with thevehicle’s brake system. In addition, onlonger downhill grades the automatictransmission will downshift automatically.
Canceling cruise controlX Depress the brake pedal.orX Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3.The last set speed is stored for later use.
The last stored speed is deleted from memorywhen the engine is turned off.The cruise control switches off automaticallywhen you depress the brake pedal or youengage the parking brake. In this case, thecruise control speed segments in themultifunction display will go out.The cruise control also switches offautomatically whenRthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
(30 km/h)Rthe ESP® is in operationRthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
switchRthe ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunctionRyou shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N while drivingThe cruise control speed segments in themultifunction display goes out and an
Controls in detail
Z
Driving systems
162
acoustic warning will sound. Observeadditional messages in the multifunctiondisplay that may appear.Depressing the accelerator pedal does notdeactivate the cruise control. After a briefacceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruisecontrol will resume the last set speed.
Changing the set speed
G Warning!Keep in mind that it may take a briefmoment until the vehicle has made thenecessary adjustments.Increase or decrease the set vehicle speedto a value that the prevailing roadconditions and legal speed limits permit.Otherwise, sudden and unexpectedacceleration or deceleration of the vehiclecould cause an accident and/or seriousinjury to you and others.
When you use the cruise control lever todecelerate, the brake system will brake thevehicle automatically if the engine’s brakingpower does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.X Lift the cruise control lever in direction of
arrow 1 and hold it up to increase, or pressthe cruise control lever in direction of arrow
2 and hold it down to decrease, until thedesired speed is reached.
X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is set and the vehicle willaccelerate or decelerate.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:1 km/h) incrementsX Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 to increase or indirection of arrow 2 to decrease.
Resume last stored speed
G Warning!The set speed stored in memory shouldonly be set again if prevailing roadconditions and legal speed limits permit.Possible acceleration or decelerationdifferences arising from returning to thepreset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever indirection of arrow 4.If no speed is stored, the current speed isset and stored.
X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.
The last stored speed is deleted from memorywhen the engine is turned off.
Distronic
Safety notesThe Distronic is available on the E 63 AMGonly.When activated, the Distronic adaptive cruisecontrol increases the driving convenienceafforded by the cruise control while travelingon expressways and other major roadways.RIf the Distronic distance sensor detects a
slower moving vehicle directly ahead, yourvehicle speed will be reduced so that youfollow that vehicle at your preset followingdistance.RIf there is no vehicle directly ahead of you,
the Distronic will function in the same wayas standard cruise control (Y page 160).
G Warning!The Distronic is a convenience system. Itsspeed adjustment reduction capability isintended to make cruise control moreeffective and usable when traffic speedsvary. It is not however, intended to, nordoes it, replace the need for extreme care.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
163
The responsibility for the vehicle’s speed,distance to the preceding vehicle and, mostimportantly, brake operation to ensure asafe stopping distance, always remainswith the driver.Complex driving situations are not alwaysfully recognized by the Distronic. This couldresult in wrong or missing distancewarnings.
G Warning!The Distronic adaptive cruise control is nota substitute for active driving involvement.It does not react to pedestrians or onstationary objects, nor does it recognize orpredict the lane curvature or the movementof preceding vehicles.The Distronic can only apply 20% of themaximum braking power of the vehicle.It is the driver’s responsibility at all times tobe attentive to the road, weather and trafficconditions. Additionally, the driver mustprovide the steering, braking and otherdriving inputs necessary to remain incontrol of the vehicle.High-frequency sources such as tollstations, speed measuring systems etc.can cause the Distronic system tomalfunction.
G Warning!The Distronic requires familiarity with itsoperational characteristics. We stronglyrecommend that you review the followinginformation carefully before operating thesystem.
G Warning!The Distronic cannot take road and trafficconditions into account. Only use theDistronic if the road, weather and trafficconditions make it advisable to travel at aconstant speed.
G Warning!Use of the Distronic can be dangerous onslippery roads. Rapid changes in tiretraction can result in wheel spin and loss ofcontrol.The Distronic does not function in adversesight and distance conditions. Do not usethe Distronic during conditions of fog,heavy rain, snow or sleet.
G Warning!The Distronic cannot take weatherconditions into account. Switch off theDistronic or do not switch it on if:Rroads are slippery or covered with snow
or ice. The wheels could lose tractionwhile braking or accelerating, and thevehicle could skid.Rthe Distronic system sensor cover is dirty
or visibility is diminished due to snow,rain or fog, for example. The distancecontrol system functionality could beimpaired.
Always pay attention to surrounding trafficconditions even while the Distronic isswitched on. Otherwise, you may not beable to recognize dangerous situations untilit is too late. This could cause an accidentin which you and/or others could beinjured.
G Warning!The “Resume” function should only beoperated if the driver is fully aware of thepreviously set speed and wishes to resumethis particular preset speed.
Controls in detail
Z
Driving systems
164
G Warning!Close attention to road and trafficconditions is imperative at all times,regardless of whether or not the Distronicis activated.Use of the Distronic can be dangerous onwinding roads or in heavy traffic becauseconditions do not allow safe driving at aconstant speed.The Distronic will not react to stationaryobjects in the roadway (e.g. a stoppedvehicle in a traffic jam or a disabledvehicle). The Distronic will also not respondto oncoming vehicles.Switch off the Distronic:Rwhen changing from the left to the right
lane if vehicles are moving more slowlyin the left laneRwhen entering a turn lane or highway off
rampRin complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zonesIn these situations, the Distronic willcontinue to maintain the set speed unlessdeactivated.
The Distronic is designed and intended onlyto maintain a set speed and keep a setdistance from moving objects in front of it.
i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removal, tampering, oraltering of the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.
i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,
and2. this device must accept any
interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.
Distronic displays in the speedometer
1 Set speedIf the Distronic is activated, one or two cruisecontrol speed segments come on around theset speed.The vehicle speed displayed on thespeedometer can briefly vary from the speedsetting on the Distronic system.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
165
1 Set speed2 Cruise control speed segments3 Speed of the vehicle aheadIf the Distronic detects a vehicle directlyahead, the cruise control speed segments2 appear in the speedometer. Thesesegments represent the difference betweenthe set speed of your vehicle 1 and thespeed of the preceding vehicle 3.If the Distronic calculates that there is adanger of collision, the distance warning lampl in the instrument cluster comes on andan intermittent warning sounds.X Immediately apply the brakes to avoid a
collision.Under no circumstances should the driverawait the intermittent warning soundbefore braking.
The intermittent warning sound ceases andthe distance warning lamp l goes outwhen the necessary distance to the vehicleahead is established again.G Warning!An intermittent warning sounds and thedistance warning lamp l in theinstrument cluster is illuminated if theDistronic system calculates that thedistance to the vehicle ahead and yourvehicle’s current speed indicate that theDistronic will not be capable of slowing thevehicle sufficiently to maintain the presetfollowing distance, which creates a dangerof a collision.Immediately brake the vehicle to increaseyour distance to the preceding vehicle. Thewarning sound is intended as a final cautionin which you should intercede with yourown braking inputs to avoid a potentiallydangerous situation. Do not wait for theoperation of the warning signal to intercedewith your own braking. This will result inpotentially dangerous emergency brakingwhich will not always result in an impactbeing avoided.Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
G Warning!The Distronic brakes your vehicle with amaximum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2
(2 m/s2). This corresponds toapproximately 20% of the maximumdeceleration of your vehicle.The Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effortto restore the preset distance or tomaintain the set speed.
Distronic menu in the control systemThe information shown in the multifunctiondisplay depends on whether the Distronicsystem and/or the distance warning functionare activated or deactivated.
i To activate or deactivate the Distronicsystem, see (Y page 166) or see(Y page 168).To activate or deactivate the Distancewarning function, see (Y page 171).
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly untilone of the following two displays appearsin the multifunction display.
Controls in detail
Z
Driving systems
166
Distronic deactivatedWhen the Distronic is deactivated, you willsee the standard Distronic display in themultifunction display.
1 Preceding vehicle, if detected2 Actual distance to the preceding vehicle3 Preset distance threshold to the
preceding vehicle4 Your vehicle5 Symbol for activated distance warning
function (Y page 171)
Distronic activatedWhen the Distronic is activated, you will seethe set speed in the multifunction display forapproximately 5 seconds. The followingdisplay appears in the multifunction display.
1 Distronic activated
Cruise control leverThe Distronic system is operated by means ofthe cruise control lever.
1 Setting current or higher speed2 Setting current or lower speed
3 Deactivating the Distronic4 Activating the Distronic, resuming to the
last set speed or increasing speed in1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Activating DistronicYou can activate the Distronic when thevehicle speed is between 20 mph (30 km/h)and 110 mph (180 km/h).When the Distronic is activated, one or twocruise control speed segments around the setspeed in the multifunction display areilluminated. The multifunction display willbriefly show a message such asDISTRONIC 55 MPH(Canada: DISTRONIC 90 km/h).If the Distronic is not activated after thecruise control lever is pulled in direction ofarrow 4 (Y page 166), you will see themessage — in the multifunction display.In the following cases you cannot activate theDistronic:Rup to 2 minutes after starting the engineRwhen you brakeRwhen you have engaged the parking brake
Controls in detail
Driving systems
167
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in parkposition P, reverse gear R, or neutralposition NRwhen the ESP® is switched off or has
switched off due to a malfunctionThe vehicle speed displayed on thespeedometer can briefly vary from the speedsetting on the Distronic system.
Setting the current speedX Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 or depress indirection of arrow 2 (Y page 166).
X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.
i If you do not take your foot off of theaccelerator pedal and continue toaccelerate past the set speed, the followingmessage will appear in the multifunctiondisplay:DISTRONIC OverrideThe distance to a slower moving vehicle infront of you will not be set. Your vehicle
speed will then be determined only by theaccelerator pedal position.
Setting a higher speed
G Warning!Keep in mind that it may take a briefmoment until the vehicle has made thenecessary adjustments.Increase the set vehicle speed to a valuethat the prevailing road conditions and legalspeed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden andunexpected acceleration of the vehiclecould cause an accident and/or seriousinjury to you and others.
You can increase the set speed in 1 mph(Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in 5 mph(Canada: 10 km/h) increments.
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)incrementsX Briefly lift the cruise control lever up in
direction of arrow 1 (Y page 166).The new speed is set and the vehicle willaccelerate. Keep in mind that it may take abrief moment until the vehicle has reachedthe set speed.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:1 km/h) incrementsX Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 4 (Y page 166).
Setting a lower speed
G Warning!Keep in mind that it may take a briefmoment until the vehicle has made thenecessary adjustments.Decrease the set vehicle speed to a valuethat the prevailing road conditions and legalspeed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden andunexpected deceleration of the vehiclecould cause an accident and/or seriousinjury to you and others.
i When you use the cruise control lever todecelerate, the brake system willautomatically brake the vehicle if theengine’s braking power does not brake thevehicle sufficiently.
Controls in detail
Z
Driving systems
168
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)incrementsX Briefly press the cruise control lever down
in direction of arrow 2 (Y page 166).The new speed is set and the vehicle willdecelerate. Keep in mind that it may take abrief moment until the vehicle has reachedthe set speed.
Setting stored speed (Resume function)
G Warning!The set speed stored in memory shouldonly be set again if prevailing roadconditions and legal speed limits permit.Possible acceleration or decelerationdifferences arising from returning to thepreset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever indirection of arrow 4 (Y page 166).If no speed is stored, the current speed isset and stored.
X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.
Deactivating DistronicX Depress the brake pedal.orX Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3 (Y page 166).The cruise control speed segments in themultifunction display will go out and thefollowing message appears briefly in themultifunction display: DISTRONIC OffThe last set speed is stored for later use.
The last stored speed is deleted from memorywhen the engine is turned off.The Distronic switches off automaticallywhen you depress the brake pedal or youengage the parking brake. In this case, thecruise control speed segments in themultifunction display will go out.The Distronic also switches off automaticallywhenRthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
(30 km/h)Rthe ESP® is in operationRthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
switch
Rthe ESP® has switched off due to amalfunctionRyou shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N while drivingThe cruise control speed segments in themultifunction display goes out and anacoustic warning will sound. Observeadditional messages in the multifunctiondisplay that may appear.G Warning!Distronic switches off and releases thebrakes when the vehicle decelerates belowthe minimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h)by operation of the system. At that time thedriver must apply the brakes in order toreduce vehicle speed further or bring it toa stop.
Depressing the accelerator pedal does notdeactivate the Distronic. After a briefacceleration (e.g. for passing), the Distronicwill resume the last set speed.
Setting the following distance inDistronicYou can set the specified following distancefor Distronic by varying the time settingbetween 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time
Controls in detail
Driving systems
169
setting and the current speed of your vehicle,Distronic calculates and sets the requiredfollowing distance to the preceding vehicle.The set distance will be shown in themultifunction display.G Warning!It is up to the driver to exercise discretionto select the appropriate setting given roadconditions, traffic, driver’s preferred drivingstyle and applicable laws and drivingrecommendations for safe followingdistance.
1 Thumbwheel for setting distance
X Increasing distance: Turn thumbwheel1 towards ¯.
Increasing the distance setting tellsDistronic to maintain a greater followingdistance to the preceding vehicle.
X Decreasing distance: Turn thumbwheel1 towards ®.Decreasing the distance setting tellsDistronic to maintain a shorter followingdistance to the preceding vehicle.
Driving with DistronicThis section describes a number of drivingsituations where special precaution isrequired on the part of the driver. Be preparedto brake in such situations. Braking willdeactivate the Distronic system.G Warning!Distronic works to maintain the speedselected by the driver unless a movingobstacle proceeding directly ahead of it inthe same travel direction is detected (e.g.following another vehicle ahead of you atyour set distance).
This means that:RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you have changed lanes.RWhile in a sharp turn or if the preceding
vehicle is in a sharp turn, Distronic couldlose sight of the preceding vehicle. Yourvehicle could then accelerate to thepreviously selected speed.
Distronic regulates only the distancebetween your vehicle and those directlyahead of it, but does not register stationaryobjects in the road, e.g.:Ra stopped vehicle in a traffic jamRa disabled vehicleRan oncoming vehicleThe driver must always be alert, observe alltraffic and intercede as required by meansof steering or braking the vehicle.
G Warning!Distronic should not be used in snowy oricy road conditions.
The most likely cause for a malfunctioningsystem is a dirty Distronic system sensorcover (located in the hood grille), especiallyat times of snow and ice or heavy rain.
Controls in detail
Z
Driving systems
170
In such a case, Distronic will switch off, andthe message DISTRONIC CurrentlyUnavailable – See Operator’s Manualappears in the multifunction display.For cleaning and care of the Distronic systemsensor cover, see (Y page 285).
i If the message DISTRONIC CurrentlyUnavailable – See Operator’sManual disappears during driving and thelast set speed flashes for approximately5 seconds, the dirt (e.g. slush) hasdissolved; Distronic works again.
Turns and bends
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect amoving vehicle in front, or it may detect onetoo soon. This may cause your vehicle tobrake late or unexpectedly.
Offset driving
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset fromyour direct line of travel may not be detectedby Distronic. There will be insufficientdistance to the preceding vehicle.
Lane changing
Distronic has not yet detected the vehiclechanging lanes. There will be insufficientdistance to the lane-changing vehicle.
Narrow vehicles
Because of their narrow profile, the vehiclestraveling near the outer edges of the lanehave not yet been detected by Distronic.There will be insufficient distance to thepreceding vehicles.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
171
Distance warning functionWhen the Distronic is deactivated, thisfunction will continue to warn you whenrecognizing a stationary obstacle or a slowervehicle moving in your vehicle’s path and thedanger of a collision exists:RThe distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on.RAn intermittent warning will sound if
necessary.If these warnings are issued, you must brakemanually to maintain a safe distance andavoid a collision with the preceding vehicle.When depressing the brake pedal, thewarning sound ceases. The warning soundwill also cease when the distance to thepreceding vehicle is sufficient again withoutapplying the brakes. In this case, the distancewarning lamp l will also go out.
G Warning!If the distance warning lamp l in theinstrument cluster comes on while drivingand/or an intermittent warning sounds,immediate attention on the part of thedriver is required. As required by the trafficsituation, apply the brakes and navigatearound a possible obstacle. However, do
not drive by relying on the distance warningfunction, as this will result in an emergencybraking application. This will not alwaysenable you to avoid a collision, especiallywhen traveling on varying road surfaceconditions and with varying driver reaction.Complex driving situations are not alwaysfully recognized by the distance warningfunction. This could result in wrong ormissing distance warnings.
1 Distance warning function on/off switch2 Indicator lamp
X Activating/deactivating: Pressswitch 1.When the distance warning function isactivated, indicator lamp 2 in switch 1
comes on. A loudspeaker symbol appearsin the multifunction display (Y page 166).
AIRMATIC DC (Dual Control)
IntroductionThe AIRMATIC DC consists of twocomponents. The Adaptive Damping System(ADS) (Y page 171) and the vehicle levelcontrol (Y page 172).
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)The fine tuning of the damping is dependenton:Rroad surface conditionsRyour driving styleRvehicle loadingRyour personal settings
Controls in detail
Z
Driving systems
172
1 ADS switch2 Indicator lampsThe following settings are available:RComfort
Both indicator lamps 2 are off.RSport 1
One indicator lamp 2 is on.RSport 2
Both indicator lamps 2 are on.
X Start the engine.X Press ADS switch 1 repeatedly until the
desired suspension tuning is reached.
The setting remains stored when you turn offthe engine.G Warning!If you have selected the Comfortsuspension tuning, the vehicle lowersslightly when you lock it withinapproximately 60 seconds after turning offthe engine. To avoid personal injury, makesure nobody is in the vicinity of the wheelhousing or under the vehicle when you turnoff the engine.
! When parking, make sure there issufficient clearance under the vehicle for itto lower without making contact with theroad curb for example. Otherwise, thevehicle could be damaged.
Vehicle level control
G Warning!To help avoid personal injury, keep handsand feet away from wheel housing area, and
stay away from under the vehicle whenlowering the vehicle chassis.
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its rideheight to increase vehicle safety and toreduce fuel consumption.You can choose between raised or normallevel.The vehicle chassis ride height is raised orlowered according to the selected levelsetting and to the vehicle speed. At a speedexceeding approximately 68 mph(110 km/h) with normal level set orexceeding 75 mph (120 km/h) with raisedlevel set, the ride height is reducedautomatically. With decreasing speed, theride height is again raised to the normal level.
i These height adjustment are so small thatyou may not notice any change.
Select the raised level only when required bycurrent driving conditions. Otherwise, thehandling may be impaired and the fuelconsumption may increase.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
173
The following vehicle level settings can be selected when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running:
Vehicle level whenstationary
Indicator lamp(Y page 174)
Suspension tuning Use for Ride heightincrease overnormal
Automatic lowering
Normal Lamp off Comfort For driving on normalroads
None Max. approx. 0.4 in(10 mm)
Normal Lamp off Sport 1 or 2 For driving on normalroads
None Max. approx. 0.6 in(15 mm)
Raised Lamp on Comfort For driving on roughroads or with snowchains
Approx.. 0.8 in(20 mm)
Max. approx. 1.2 in(30 mm)
Raised Lamp on Sport 1 or 2 For driving on roughroads or with snowchains
Approx.. 0.8 in(20 mm)
Max. approx. 1.4 in(35 mm)
Controls in detail
Z
Driving systems
174
1 Vehicle level control switch2 Indicator lamp
X Start the engine.X Briefly press switch 1 to change from
normal level to raised level. When vehicleis at raised level, pressing switch 1 willreturn the vehicle to normal level.
The setting raised is canceled and the vehicleis lowered to the normal level automatically ifthe vehicle speed is above 75 mph(120 km/h) or if the vehicle speed staysbetween 50 mph (80 km/h) and 75 mph(120 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes.Indicator lamp 2 in switch 1 goes out.If you do not drive in this speed range, theselected vehicle level setting remains stored
in memory even if the SmartKey is removedfrom the starter switch.
All-wheel drive (4MATIC)Your vehicle is equipped with all-wheel drive(4MATIC). Both, the front and rear axles, arepowered at all times when the vehicle is beingoperated. The 4MATIC improves traction inconjunction with the ESP® (Y page 72) andthe Electronic Traction System (ETS/4-ETS)(Y page 73).G Warning!If a drive wheel is spinning due toinsufficient traction:RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as
possible.RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
pedal.RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
prevailing road conditions.Failure to observe these guidelines couldcause the vehicle to skid.The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidentsresulting from excessive speed.
! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing socould damage the transfer case, which isnot covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty. All wheels must be on or off theground. Observe instructions for towing thevehicle with all wheels on the ground.
! Only conduct operational or performancetests on a two-axle dynamometer. If suchtests are necessary, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. You couldotherwise seriously damage the brakesystem and/or the transfer case which isnot covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.
i In winter operation, the maximumeffectiveness of the 4MATIC is onlyachieved with winter tires (Y page 272) orsnow chains as required.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
175
Parktronic systemThe Parktronic system is an electronicparking aid with ultrasonic sensors designedto assist the driver during parking maneuvers.It indicates the relative distance between thevehicle and an obstacle visually and audibly.The Parktronic system is activatedautomatically when youRswitch on the ignition
andRrelease the parking brake
andRthe automatic transmission is in drive
position D, reverse gear R, or neutralposition N
The Parktronic system deactivates at speedsabove approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). Atlower speeds, the Parktronic system switcheson again.The Parktronic system also deactivates whenyou shift the automatic transmission intopark position P or engage the parking brake.The Parktronic system monitors thesurroundings of your vehicle with six sensorsin the front bumper and four sensors in therear bumper.
1 Sensors in the front bumper To function properly, the sensors must be freeof dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the sensorsregularly, being careful not to scratch ordamage the sensors, see “Cleaning theParktronic system sensors” (Y page 285).G Warning!The Parktronic is a supplemental system. Itis not intended to, nor does it replace, theneed for extreme care. The responsibilityduring parking and other critical maneuversalways remains with the driver.
G Warning!Make sure no persons or animals are in ornear the area in which you are parking/maneuvering. Otherwise, they could beinjured.
! Special attention must be paid to objectswith smooth surfaces or low silhouettes(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts,elevated crossbars or road curbs). Suchobjects may not be detected by the systemand can damage the vehicle.During parking maneuvers, pay specialattention to objects located above or belowthe height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs,painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). TheParktronic system will not detect suchobjects at close range and damage to yourvehicle or the object may result.
! Ultrasonic signals from outside sources(e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, orjackhammers) may impair the operation ofthe Parktronic system.
Controls in detail
Z
Driving systems
176
Range of the sensors
Front sensors
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm)
If the Parktronic system detects an obstaclein this range, all the distance warningsegments illuminate and you hear a warningsignal. If the obstacle is closer than theminimum distance, the actual distance mayno longer be indicated by the Parktronicsystem.
Warning indicatorsVisual signals indicate to the driver therelative distance between the sensors and anobstacle.
Front area warning indicator1 Left side of the vehicle2 Right side of the vehicle3 Readiness indicators
Controls in detail
Driving systems
177
Rear area warning indicator1 Left side of the vehicle2 Right side of the vehicle3 Readiness indicatorsEach warning indicator is divided into fiveyellow and two red distance segments foreither side of the vehicle. The Parktronicsystem is ready to measure when the yellowreadiness indicators 3 are illuminated.The current transmission position determineswhich warning indicator will be activated.
Currenttransmissionposition
Warning indicator
D Front area activated
R or N Front and rear areaactivated
As your vehicle approaches an object, one ormore distance segments will illuminate,depending on the distance. When the seventhdistance segment illuminates, you havereached the minimum distance.RFront area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red distancesegment illuminates and a constantacoustic warning lasting a maximum of2 seconds will sound for the second reddistance segment. The signal is canceledwhen the automatic transmission is shiftedinto park position P or the parking brake isengaged.RRear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red distancesegment illuminates and a constantacoustic warning lasting a maximum of2 seconds will sound for the second reddistance segment. The signal is canceledwhen the automatic transmission is shifted
into drive position D, or park position P, orthe parking brake is engaged.
Switching the Parktronic system on/offThe Parktronic system switches onautomatically when the ignition is switchedon.
1 Parktronic switch2 Indicator lamp
X Switching off Parktronic system: PressParktronic switch 1.Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
X Switching on Parktronic system: PressParktronic switch 1 again.
Controls in detail
Z
Driving systems
178
Parktronic system malfunctionThere is a malfunction in the Parktronicsystem, if only the red distance segmentsilluminate and an acoustic warning sounds.The Parktronic system will switch offautomatically after 20 seconds and indicatorlamp 2 in Parktronic switch 1 comes on.X Have the Parktronic system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soonas possible.
If only the red distance segments illuminateand no acoustic warning sounds, theParktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. dirt,ice, snow and slush) or there is aninterference from other radio or ultrasonicsignals (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, orjackhammers). The Parktronic system willswitch off automatically after 20 seconds andindicator lamp 2 in Parktronic switch 1comes on.
X Switch off the ignition.X Clean the Parktronic system sensors
(Y page 285).X Switch on the ignition.
orX Check the Parktronic system operation at
another location to rule out interferencefrom outside radio or ultrasonic signals.
Controls in detail
Climate control system
179
Climate control system
Overview of climate control system functionsYour vehicle is equipped with either of the following climate control systems:
Dual-zone automatic climate control 4-zone automatic climate control Rear climate control
The dual-zone automatic climate controlcombines an automatic heating andventilation system with a cooling system. Youcan adjust the dual-zone automatic climatecontrol separately for the driver’s andpassenger side.
The 3-zone automatic climate controlcombines an automatic heating andventilation system with a cooling system. Youcan adjust the 3-zone automatic climatecontrol separately for each zone in thevehicle.
The rear climate control allows separateclimate settings for the rear compartment.
Controls in detail
Z
Climate control system
180
Control panels
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Function Recommendation/Notes
1 Temperature control, driver’s side i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 186)
2 y Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until the windshieldor the side windows are clear again.
(Y page 190)
3 Q Increasing air volume (Y page 190)
Controls in detail
Climate control system
181
Function Recommendation/Notes
4 Display
5 © Air distribution (Y page 189)
6 ¯ Rear window defroster i At very low temperatures, rear window defrosteroperation is delayed until the vehicle interior haswarmed up.
(Y page 193)
7 Temperature control, passenger side i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 186)
8 MAX COOL on/off (USA only) (Y page 191)
T Residual heat/ventilation (Canada only) (Y page 192)
9 2 AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air conditioning. The indicator lampin button 2 comes on.
(Y page 185)
a ª Air distribution (Y page 189)
a ´ Climate control on/off i Switches on the climate control system. Display4 comes on.
(Y page 185)
b ß Decreasing air volume (Y page 190)
c , Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time, e.g. in atunnel. Otherwise, the windows can fog up due to lackof fresh air.
(Y page 192)
d U Air distribution and air volume (automatic mode) i Switches on the automatic mode. AUTO appears indisplay.
(Y page 186)
Controls in detail
Z
Climate control system
182
4-zone automatic climate control
Function Recommendation/Notes
1 Air distribution, driver’s side (Y page 189)
2 y Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until the windshieldor the side windows are clear again.
(Y page 190)
3 $ Temperature control, driver’s side, raising i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 186)
4 Display
Controls in detail
Climate control system
183
Function Recommendation/Notes
5 $ Temperature control, passenger side, raising i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 186)
6 ¯ Rear window defroster i At very low temperatures, rear window defrosteroperation is delayed until the vehicle interior haswarmed up.
(Y page 193)
7 Air distribution, passenger side (Y page 189)
8 U Air distribution and air volume, passenger side(automatic mode)
i Switches on the automatic mode. The indicatorlamp in button U comes on.
(Y page 186)
9 2 AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air conditioning. The indicator lampin button 2 comes on.
(Y page 185)
a % Temperature control, passenger side, lowering i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 186)
b 5 Rear air-conditioning remote control (USA only) (Y page 186)
Ñ Rear air-conditioning remote control (Canadaonly)
c Q Increasing air volume (Y page 190)
d ´ Climate control on/off i Switches on the climate control system. Theindicator lamp in button ´ goes out.
(Y page 185)
e · Decreasing air volume (Y page 190)
f MAX COOL on/off (USA only) (Y page 191)
T Residual heat/ventilation (Canada only) i With the engine turned off, it is possible to continueto heat or ventilate the interior.
(Y page 192)
Controls in detail
Z
Climate control system
184
Function Recommendation/Notes
g % Temperature control, driver’s side, lowering i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 186)
h , Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time, e.g. in atunnel. Otherwise, the windows can fog up due to lackof fresh air.
(Y page 192)
j U Air distribution and air volume, driver’s side(automatic mode)
i Switches on the automatic mode. The indicatorlamp in button U comes on.
(Y page 186)
Rear climate control
1Á Temperature control, left, raising2 Display3Á Temperature control, right, raising4Â Temperature control, right, lowering5Â Temperature control, left, lowering
Notes on climate control systemThe climate control system is operationalwhenever the engine is running. You canoperate the climate control system in eitherthe automatic or manual mode. The systemcools or heats the interior depending on theselected interior temperature and the currentoutside temperature.It can only function optimally when you aredriving with the windows, the tilt/slidingsunroof or tilt/sliding panel closed.Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odorsare filtered out before outside air enters thepassenger compartment through the airdistribution system.
G Warning!Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)may require replacement of the filter beforeits scheduled replacement interval. Aclogged filter will reduce the air volume tothe interior and the windows could fog up,impairing visibility and endangering youand others. Have a clogged filter replacedas soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
The air conditioning will not engage (nocooling) if the A/C mode (Y page 185) isdeactivated.G Warning!Follow the recommended settings forheating and cooling given on the followingpages. Otherwise the windows could fog
Controls in detail
Climate control system
185
up, impairing visibility and endangering youand others.
X Keep the air intake grille in front of thewindshield free of snow and debris.
Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects onthe air flow-through exhaust slots below therear window.
i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate theinterior before driving off, see “Summeropening feature” (Y page 122). The climatecontrol will then adjust the interiortemperature to the set value much faster.
Deactivating the climate controlsystem
G Warning!When the climate control system isswitched off, the outside air supply andcirculation are also switched off. Onlychoose this setting for a short time.Otherwise the windows could fog up,impairing visibility and endangering youand others.
Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Deactivating: Press button ´.OFF appears in display 5 (Y page 180).
X Reactivating: Press button ´.Display 5 comes on. The previous settingsare once again in effect.
4-zone automatic climate controlX Deactivating: Press button ´.0 appears in display 4 (Y page 182).
X Reactivating: Press button ´.Display 4 comes on. The previous settingsare once again in effect.
Air conditioningThe air conditioning is operational while theengine is running and cools the interior air tothe temperature set by the operator. Inaddition, the air conditioning dehumidifiesthe interior air and helps prevent windowfogging.G Warning!If you switch off the cooling function, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging mayimpair visibility and endanger you andothers.
i Condensation may drip out fromunderneath the vehicle. This is normal andnot an indication of a malfunction.
DeactivatingIt is possible to deactivate the airconditioning. The interior air will then nolonger be cooled or dehumidified.X Press button 2.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.The cooling function switches off after ashort delay.
ActivatingMoist air can fog up the windows. You candehumidify the interior air with the airconditioning.X Press button 2.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.The air conditioning uses the refrigerantR134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs whichare harmful to the ozone layer.
Controls in detail
Z
Climate control system
186
Automatic modeWhen operating the climate control system inautomatic mode, the interior air temperature,air volume and air distribution are adjustedautomatically.In automatic mode, cooling withdehumidification is switched on. This functioncan be switched off if necessary.G Warning!If you switch off the cooling function, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fogup more quickly. Window fogging mayimpair visibility and endanger you andothers.
Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Set the desired temperature
(Y page 186).X Activating: Press button U.
The AUTO indicator for automatic air volumeand air distribution in display 4(Y page 180) comes on. The air volume andair distribution are adjusted automatically.
X Deactivating: Press button · or Q.The AUTO indicator for air volume in display4 (Y page 180) goes out. The automaticoperation of air volume switches off, and
air volume is controlled according to thedesired setting. Automatic air distributionremains switched on.
orX Press air distribution control rocker switch© or ª (Y page 180).The AUTO indicator for air distribution indisplay 4 goes out. The automaticoperation of air distribution switches off,and air distribution is controlled accordingto the desired position. Automatic airvolume remains switched on.
4-zone automatic climate controlX Set the desired temperature
(Y page 186).X Activating: Press button U.
The indicator lamp on the button comes on.The AUTO indicator for automatic air volumeand air distribution in display 4(Y page 182) comes on. The air volume andair distribution are adjusted automatically.
X Deactivating: Press button · or Q.The AUTO indicator for air volume in display4 (Y page 182) goes out. The automaticoperation of air volume switches off, andair volume is controlled according to the
desired setting. Automatic air distributionremains switched on.
orX Turn air distribution control 1 or 7
(Y page 182) on each side of the passengercompartment to the desired symbol. Theindicator lamp in the corresponding buttongoes out. Automatic air distribution isswitched off in the corresponding zone, andair distribution is controlled according tothe desired position. Automatic air volumeremains switched on.
Setting temperature
Dual-zone automatic climate controlYou can adjust the air temperature on eachside of the passenger compartment. Youshould raise or lower the temperature settingin small increments, preferably starting at72‡ (22†).X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature controls 1 and 7(Y page 180) slightly clockwise orcounterclockwise.
Controls in detail
Climate control system
187
4-zones automatic climate controlYou can set the air temperature for each ofthe 4 zones separately. You should raise orlower the temperature setting in smallincrements, preferably starting at 72‡(22†).
Front zonesX Increasing/decreasing: Press buttonÁ or  until the desired temperatureappears in display 4 (Y page 182).
Rear zonesX Press button 511 or Ñ12.
Display 4 (Y page 182) comes on.X Increasing/decreasing: Press buttonÁ or  until the desired temperatureappears in display 4.After approximately 5 seconds after thelast adjustment, display 4 switches backto its standard display.
i You can also press button 5 or Ñonce more to switch back to the standarddisplay.
Rear climate control panelYou can adjust the air temperature on eachside of the rear passenger compartment. Youshould raise or lower the temperature settingin small increments, preferably starting at72‡ (22†).X Increasing/decreasing: Press buttonÁ or  until the desired temperatureappears in display 2 (Y page 184).
Adjusting air vents
G Warning!When operating the climate control, the airthat enters the passenger compartmentthrough the air vents can be very hot or verycold (depending on the set temperature).This may cause burns or frostbite tounprotected skin in the immediate area ofthe air vents.Always keep sufficient distance betweenunprotected parts of the body and the airvents. If necessary, use the air distributionadjustment to direct the air to air vents inthe vehicle interior that are not in theimmediate area of unprotected skin.
For best possible performance of the climatecontrol:X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, andany other debris.
X Always keep all air vents and grilles in thepassenger compartment free fromobstruction.
11 USA only12 Canada only
Controls in detail
Z
Climate control system
188
i For draft-free ventilation, move theadjustable center and side air vents to themiddle position.
Center air vents
1 Left center air vent, adjustable2 Right center air vent, adjustable3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable right center air vent4 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left center air vent
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels 3and 4 upward or downward.
Side air vents
Example illustration driver’s side1 Left side defroster air vent, fixed2 Left side air vent, adjustable3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left side air vent
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel 3upward or downward.
Rear center console air vents
Example illustration: Dual-zone automatic climatecontrol1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
right rear center air vent4 Thumbwheel for air volume control for left
rear center air vent
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel 3 or4 upward or downward.
Controls in detail
Climate control system
189
B-pillar air vents
Vehicles with 4-zone automatic climate controlonly1 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
side air vent2 Side air vent, adjustable
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel 1 tothe left or to the right.
Adjusting air distribution
Dual-zone automatic climate controlThe air distribution can be adjusted manually.The symbols located in display 4(Y page 180) represent the followingfunctions:
Symbol Function
b Directs air into the entirevehicle interior
c Directs air to the windshield,through the side air vents andcockpit air vent (Canada only)
Z Directs air to the windshield andthrough the side defroster airvents
X Directs air to the windshield,through the side air vents and tothe footwells
a Directs air through the cockpit(Canada only), center, side andrear passenger compartmentair vents
Symbol Function
Y Directs air to the footwells
d Directs air to the footwells andthrough the side air vents
X Press air distribution control rocker switch© or ª until the desired symbolappears in display 4 (Y page 180).The AUTO indicator for automatic airdistribution in display 4 goes out. Theautomatic mode is switched off, and airdistribution is controlled according to thedesired setting.
4-zone automatic climate controlThe air distribution can be adjustedseparately on each side of the passengercompartment.The symbols on the buttons represent thefollowing functions:
Controls in detail
Z
Climate control system
190
Symbol Function
Z Directs air through the center,side and defroster air vents tothe windshield and sidewindows
a Directs air through the Cockpit(Canada only), center, side andrear passenger compartmentair vents
X Directs air into the entirevehicle interior
Y Directs air to the footwells
X Turn air distribution controls 1 and 7(Y page 182) on each side of the passengercompartment to the desired symbol.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton goes out and the automatic mode isswitched off for the corresponding side.The air distribution is adjusted according tothe chosen setting.
You can also turn the air distribution controlto a position between two symbols.
Adjusting air volumeX Decrease/increase: Press button · orQ.
Front defrosterYou can use this setting to defrost thewindshield, for example if it is iced up.You can also defog the windshield and theside windows.
i Keep this setting selected only until thewindshield or the side windows are clearagain.
Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Activating: Press button y.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.The climate control switches to the followingfunctions automatically:Rcooling on to dehumidifyRmost efficient blower speed and heating
power, depending on outside temperatureRair flows onto the windshield and the front
side windowsRthe air recirculation mode is switched off
X Deactivating: Press button y again.The indicator lamp in the button goes out.The previous settings are once again ineffect. The cooling remains switched on.The air recirculation remains switched off.
orX Press button U.
The indicator lamp in button y goes out.Air volume and air distribution are adjustedautomatically.
orX Turn temperature controls 1 or 7
(Y page 180) clockwise orcounterclockwise.
orX Press button Q or ·.
4-zone automatic climate controlX Activating: Press button y.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.The climate control switches to the followingfunctions automatically:Rcooling on to dehumidifyRmost efficient blower speed and heating
power, depending on outside temperature
Controls in detail
Climate control system
191
Rair flows onto the windshield and the frontside windowsRthe air recirculation mode is switched off
i You can adjust the air volume, airdistribution and interior air temperaturewhen the front defroster is switched on.
X Deactivating: Press button y again.The indicator lamp in the button goes out.The previous settings are once again ineffect. The cooling remains switched on.The air recirculation remains switched off.
orX Press button U.
The indicator lamp in button y goes out.Air volume and air distribution are adjustedautomatically.
Windshield fogged on the outside
Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Switch the windshield wipers on
(Y page 118).X Press button © or ª until the settinga, d or Y appears in display 4(Y page 180).
4-zone automatic climate controlX Switch the windshield wipers on
(Y page 118).X Turn air distribution controls 1 and 7
(Y page 182) to a or Y.
Maximum cooling MAX COOLMAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.MAX COOL is only available in U.S. vehicles.You can use this setting to provide the fastestpossible cooling of the vehicle interior (whenwindows and tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel are closed).X Activating: Press button 813
(Y page 180) or f14 (Y page 182). MAX
COOL appears in display 4 (Y page 180) or(Y page 182).
The air conditioning switches automatically tothe following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum blowing powerRthe air recirculation mode is switched onX Deactivating: Press button 8 or f again.MAX COOL disappears in display 4.The previous settings are once again ineffect.
i To switch the maximum cooling functionoff, you can also press button ´, U,y or ¯.
13 Vehicles with dual-zone automatic climate control14 Vehicles with 4-zone automatic climate control
Controls in detail
Z
Climate control system
192
Air recirculation modeSwitch to air recirculation mode to preventunpleasant odors from entering the vehiclefrom the outside (e. g. before driving througha tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake ofoutside air and recirculates the air in thepassenger compartment.G Warning!Fogged windows impair visibility,endangering you and others. If the windowsbegin to fog on the inside, switching off theair recirculation mode immediately shouldclear interior window fogging. If interiorwindow fogging persists, make sure the airconditioning is activated, or press buttony.
X Activating: Press button ,.The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
i The air recirculation mode is activatedautomatically at high outside temperaturesand if the concentration of carbonmonoxide (CO) and nitrogen oxide in theoutside air increases, for example in atunnel.
The indicator lamp in button , is not litwhen the air recirculation mode is switchedon automatically.A quantity of outside air is added afterapproximately 30 minutes.
X Deactivating: Press button , again.The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
i The manually selected air recirculationmode is deactivated automatically:Rafter 5 minutes if the outside
temperature is below approximately41‡ (5†)Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning is
turned offRafter 30 minutes if the outside
temperature is above approximately41‡ (5†)
Residual heat and ventilationThis feature is only available in Canadavehicles. With the engine switched off, it ispossible to continue to heat or ventilate theinterior for up to 30 minutes. This featuremakes use of the residual heat produced bythe engine.
i If you switch on the residual heat functionwhen outside temperatures are high, onlythe ventilation will be switched on.
i Regardless of the selected air volume, theblower operates at low speed.
i How long the system will provide heatingdepends on the coolant temperature andthe selected temperature. The blower willrun at speed setting 1 regardless of the airvolume control setting.
X Activating: Switch off the ignition.X Press button T.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.X Deactivating: Press button T.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Controls in detail
Rear window defroster
193
The residual heat is deactivatedautomatically:Rwhen the ignition is switched onRafter approximately 30 minutesRif the battery voltage dropsRif the coolant temperature is too low
Rear window defroster
G Warning!Any accumulation of snow and ice shouldbe removed from the rear window beforedriving. Visibility could otherwise beimpaired, endangering you and others.
The rear window defroster uses a largeamount of power. To keep the battery drainto a minimum, switch off the defroster assoon as the rear window is clear. Thedefroster is switched off automatically aftersome time of operation depending on theoutside temperature.X Switch on the ignition.X Switching on: Press button ¯ on the
respective climate control panel.The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X Switching off: Press button ¯ again.
! If the rear window defroster switches offtoo soon and the indicator lamp startsflashing, too many electrical consumersare operating simultaneously and there isinsufficient voltage in the battery. Thesystem responds automatically byswitching the rear window defroster off.
As soon as the battery has sufficientvoltage, the rear window defrosterswitches back on automatically.
Controls in detail
Z
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
194
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
G Warning!When opening or closing the tilt/slidingsunroof, make sure there is no danger ofanyone being harmed by the opening/closing procedure.The tilt/sliding sunroof is equipped with theexpress operation and automatic reversalfunction. If the movement of the tilt/slidingsunroof is blocked during the closingprocedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stopand open slightly.The tilt/sliding sunroof operates differentlywhen the sunroof switch is pressed andheld. See the “Closing when the tilt/slidingsunroof is blocked” section for details.The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately haltedby releasing the sunroof switch or, if thesunroof switch was moved past theresistance point and released, by movingthe sunroof switch in any direction.
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 62.
G Warning!The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out ofglass. In the event of an accident, the glassmay shatter. This may result in an openingin the roof.In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearingtheir seat belts or not wearing themproperly may be thrown out of the opening.Such an opening also presents a potentialfor injury for occupants wearing their seatbelts properly as entire body parts orportions of them may protrude from thepassenger compartment.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do nottransport any objects with sharp edgeswhich can stick out of the tilt/slidingsunroof.Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if thereis snow or ice on the roof, as this couldresult in malfunctions.If you cannot open or close the tilt/slidingsunroof due to a malfunction contactRoadside Assistance or an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
! Please keep in mind that weatherconditions can sometimes change rapidly.Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroofwhen leaving the vehicle. If water entersthe vehicle interior, vehicle electronicscould be damaged which is not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i You can also open or close the tilt/slidingsunroof using the SmartKey or theKEYLESS-GO function, see “Summeropening feature” (Y page 122) and“Convenience closingfeature” (Y page 123).
Sunroof switch1 Raising2 Opening3 Closing
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
195
With the sunroof closed or raised, you canslide the sunroof screen forward and back.
Sunroof screen
X Switch on the ignition.
OpeningX Opening manually: Press and hold the
sunroof switch to the resistance point indirection of arrow 2.
X Release the sunroof switch when thedesired position is reached.
X Express operation: To open the tilt/sliding sunroof completely, press thesunroof switch past the resistance point indirection of arrow 2 and release.
X Stopping during express operation:Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
i Express opening is not available when thetilt/sliding sunroof is raised. The tilt/sliding sunroof must be closed first.
i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open,resonance noises may result in addition tothe usual wind noises. They are caused byminimal pressure changes in the passengercompartment. To reduce or eliminate thesenoises, change the position of the tilt/sliding sunroof or open a window slightly.
RaisingX Raising manually: Press and hold the
sunroof switch to the resistance point indirection of arrow 1.
X Release the sunroof switch when thedesired position is reached.
X Express operation: To raise the tilt/sliding sunroof completely, press thesunroof switch past the resistance point indirection of arrow 1 and release.
X Stopping during express operation:Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
i Express raising is not available when thetilt/sliding sunroof is open. The tilt/slidingsunroof must be closed first.
ClosingX Closing manually: Pull and hold the
sunroof switch to the resistance point indirection of arrow 3.
X Release the sunroof switch when thedesired position is reached.
X Express operation: To close the tilt/sliding sunroof completely, pull the sunroofswitch past the resistance point indirection of arrow 3 and release.
X Stopping during express operation:Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof isblockedG Warning!Make sure that nobody can becometrapped and be seriously or even fatallyinjured when closing the tilt/slidingsunroof with greater force or withoutautomatic reversal function.
Controls in detail
Z
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
196
If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof isblocked during the closing procedure (e. g. byice or pollution), the tilt/sliding sunroof willstop and open slightly. However, the tilt/sliding sunroof will exert greater force beforereversing than when the tilt/sliding sunroofis closed in express operation. Pleaseexercise caution!X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof
has stopped because it was blocked, pullthe sunroof switch in direction of arrow3 until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fullyclosed.
If the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked again andopens slightly:X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof
was blocked, pull the sunroof switch indirection of arrow 3 until the tilt/slidingsunroof is fully closed.G Warning!Pulling and holding the sunroof switch toclose the tilt/sliding sunroof immediatelyafter it had been blocked two times willcause the tilt/sliding sunroof to closewithout any reversal function for as long asyou hold the sunroof switch.
SynchronizingThe tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronizedRafter the battery has been disconnected or
dischargedRafter a malfunctionRif the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
smoothly
! If the tilt/sliding sunroof cannot be closedor synchronized, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or call RoadsideAssistance.
X Vehicles with SmartKey: Switch off theignition and remove the SmartKey from thestarter switch.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off theignition and open the driver’s door (thisputs the starter switch in position 0, sameas with the SmartKey removed from thestarter switch). The driver’s door then canbe closed again.
X Remove the fuse for the tilt/sliding sunrooffrom the fuse box (Y page 375).
X Reinsert the fuse in the fuse box.X Switch on the ignition.X Press and hold the sunroof switch in
direction of arrow 1 (Y page 194) until the
tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at therear.
X Keep holding the sunroof switch indirection of arrow 1 for approximately1 second.
X Check the express operation feature(Y page 195).If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens and closescompletely, the roof is synchronized.Otherwise repeat the above steps.
Controls in detail
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel (sedan)
197
Panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel (sedan)
Extending and retracting the rollersunblinds
The roller sunblinds only operate with the tilt/sliding panel closed. The front and rear rollersunblind cannot be operated individually.G Warning!When extending the roller sunblinds, makesure no one is in danger of being injured bythe extending procedure. The extending ofthe roller sunblinds can be immediatelyhalted by releasing the switch.
Roof panel switch1 Retracting2 Extending
Roller sunblinds switch, rear1 Retracting2 Extending
X Switch on the ignition.X Retracting/Extending: Move the roof
panel switch to the resistance point in therequired direction of arrow 1 or 2 untilthe roller sunblinds have reached theirdesired position.
X Express retracting: Push the roof panelswitch past the resistance point indirection of arrow 1 and release.The roller sunblinds retract completely.
X Stopping during express retracting:Move the roof panel switch in any direction.
Opening and closing the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel
G Warning!When opening or closing the tilt/slidingpanel, make sure there is no danger ofanyone being harmed by the opening/closing procedure.The opening procedure of the tilt/slidingpanel can be immediately halted byreleasing the switch or, if the switch wasmoved past the resistance point andreleased, by moving the switch in anydirection.The closing procedure of the tilt/slidingpanel can be immediately halted byreleasing the switch.
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 62.
G Warning!The panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel ismade out of glass. In the event of anaccident, the glass may shatter. This mayresult in an opening in the roof.In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearingtheir seat belts or not wearing themproperly may be thrown out of the opening.
Controls in detail
Z
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel (sedan)
198
Such an opening also presents a potentialfor injury for occupants wearing their seatbelts properly as entire body parts orportions of them may protrude from thepassenger compartment.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do nottransport any objects with sharp edgeswhich can stick out of the tilt/sliding panel.Do not open the tilt/sliding panel if there issnow or ice on the roof, as this could resultin malfunctions.
! Please keep in mind that weatherconditions can sometimes change rapidly.Make sure to close the tilt/sliding panelwhen leaving the vehicle. If water entersthe vehicle interior, vehicle electronicscould be damaged which is not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Roof panel switch1 Opening2 Closing3 Raising4 LoweringThe tilt/sliding panel only operates with theroller sunblinds retracted.
i You can also open or close the tilt/slidingpanel using the SmartKey, see “Summeropening feature” (Y page 122) or see“Convenience closingfeature” (Y page 123).
X Switch on the ignition.
OpeningX Opening manually: Press and hold the
roof panel switch to the resistance point indirection of arrow 1.
X Release the roof panel switch when thedesired position is reached.
X Express operation: To open the tilt/sliding panel completely, press the roofpanel switch past the resistance point indirection of arrow 1 and release.
X Stopping during express operation:Move the roof panel switch in any direction.
i When the tilt/sliding panel is open,resonance noises may result in addition tothe usual wind noises. They are caused byminimal pressure changes in the passengercompartment. To reduce or eliminate thesenoises, change the position of the tilt/sliding panel or open a window slightly.
RaisingX Press and hold the roof panel switch to the
resistance point in direction of arrow 3.X Release the roof panel switch when the
desired position is reached.
Controls in detail
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel (sedan)
199
Closing/LoweringX Move the roof panel switch to the
resistance point in direction of arrow 2 or4.
X Release the roof panel switch when thedesired position is reached.
SynchronizingThe tilt/sliding panel and roller sunblindsmust be synchronizedRafter the battery has been disconnected or
dischargedRafter a malfunctionRif the tilt/sliding panel does not open
smoothly
! Do not attempt to open the tilt/slidingpanel before the tilt/sliding panel isproperly synchronized. The tilt/slidingpanel could otherwise lock-up in the openposition.If the tilt/sliding panel cannot be closed orsynchronized, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or call RoadsideAssistance.
X Vehicles with SmartKey: Remove theSmartKey from the starter switch.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off theignition and open the driver’s door (thisputs the starter switch in position 0, sameas with the SmartKey removed from thestarter switch). The driver’s door then canbe closed again.
X Remove the respective fuse from the fusebox (Y page 375).
X Reinsert the fuse in the fuse box.X Switch on the ignition.X Push and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 3 (Y page 198) until theroller sunblinds are fully extended.
X Keep holding the roof panel switch indirection of arrow 3 (Y page 198) forapproximately 1 second.
X Pull and hold the roof panel switch indirection of arrow 2 (Y page 198) until theroller sunblinds are fully retracted.
X Keep holding the roof panel switch indirection of arrow 2 (Y page 198) forapproximately 1 second.
X Press and hold the roof panel switch indirection of arrow 1 (Y page 198) until thetilt/sliding panel is fully raised.
X Keep holding the roof panel switch indirection of arrow 1 (Y page 198) forapproximately 1 second.
X Push and hold the roof panel switch indirection of arrow 3 (Y page 198) until thetilt/sliding panel is fully closed.
X Keep holding the roof panel switch indirection of arrow 3 (Y page 198) forapproximately 1 second.
X Check the express operation feature of thetilt/sliding panel (Y page 198).If the tilt/sliding panel opens completely,the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeatthe above steps.
Controls in detail
Z
Loading and storing
200
Loading and storing
Loading instructions
G Warning!Always fasten items being carried assecurely as possible using cargo tie-downrings and fastening materials appropriatefor the weight and size of the load.In an accident, during hard braking orsudden maneuvers, loose items will bethrown around inside the vehicle and cancause injury to vehicle occupants unlessthe items are securely fastened in thevehicle.To help avoid personal injury during acollision or sudden maneuver, exercisecare when transporting cargo. Do not pileluggage or cargo higher than the seatbackrests.Wagon: The cargo compartment is thepreferred place to carry objects. Alwaysuse cargo tie-down rings, and if soequipped, always use the cargo net whentransporting cargo.Sedan: The trunk is the preferred place tocarry objects. Always use cargo tie-down
rings when transporting cargo. Do not placeanything on the rear-window shelf.Never drive vehicle with the trunk/cargocompartment open. Deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicleinterior resulting in unconsciousness anddeath.
Load distribution
Sedan
Wagon
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) which is theweight of the vehicle including fuel, tools,spare wheel, installed accessories,passengers and luggage/cargo must neverexceed the load limit and the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) for your vehicle asspecified on the placard located on thedriver’s door B-pillar (Y page 250).In addition, the load must be distributed insuch a way so that the weight on each axlenever exceeds the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for the front and rear axle. The GVWRand GAWR for your vehicle are indicated onthe certification label located on the driver’sdoor B-pillar (Y page 250).For more information, see “Tire and LoadingInformation” (Y page 250).
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
201
The handling characteristics of a fully loadedvehicle depend greatly on the loaddistribution. It is therefore recommended toload the vehicle according to the illustrationshown, with the heaviest items being placedtowards the front of the vehicle.Please pay attention to and comply with thefollowing instructions when loading thevehicle and transporting cargo:RSedan: The trunk is the preferred place to
carry objects. The enlarged cargo areashould only be used for items which do notfit in the trunk alone.RWagon: The cargo compartment is the
preferred place to carry objects. Theexpanded cargo compartment should onlybe used for items which do not fit in thecargo compartment alone.RAlways place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fastenthem as securely as possible.RThe heaviest portion of the cargo should
always be kept as low as possible againstfront or rear seat backrests.
Roof rack (sedan)For information about further roof rackequipment, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.G Warning!Only use roof racks approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to avoiddamage to the vehicle.Follow the manufacturer’s installationinstructions. Otherwise, an improperlyattached roof rack system or its load couldbecome detached from the vehicle.Do not exceed the maximum roof load of220 lb (100 kg).Take into consideration that when the roofrack is loaded, the handling characteristicsare different from those when operating thevehicles without the roof rack loaded.
Make sureRyou can raise the tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/
sliding panel completelyRyou can open the trunk completely
1 Trim cover
X Flip trim covers 1 open.X Only attach the roof rack to the anchorage
points under trim covers 1.X Observe manufacturer’s instructions for
installation.
Controls in detail
Z
Loading and storing
202
Ski bag (sedan, Canada only)
G Warning!The ski bag is designed for up to four pairsof skis. Do not load the ski bag with otherobjects.Always fasten the ski bag securely. In anaccident, an unfastened ski bag can causeinjury to vehicle occupants.
Unfolding and loadingX Fold rear armrest down.
1 Cover2 Catch
X Pull catches 2 in direction of arrows.X Open cover 1 downwards in direction of
the arrow.
3 Ski bagX Pull ski bag 3 into passenger
compartment and unfold.X Open the trunk.
4 Button
X Press button 4.The flap opens in direction of arrow.
X From trunk, slide skis into ski bag.
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
203
5 StrapX Tighten strap 5 by pulling at the loose end
(arrow) until the skis in the ski bag aretightly secured.
6 Hook7 EyeX Connect hook 6 of front strap to eye 7
located on center tunnel in front of rearseat bench.
X Tighten strap by pulling at the loose end(arrow).
Unloading and foldingX Loosen both straps.X Disconnect hook 6 from eye 7.X Unload skis.X Close flap in trunk.X Fold and flatten ski bag lengthwise.X Place folded ski bag inside recess of seat
backrest.X Close cover.
X Fold rear armrest up.
Removing the ski bagFor ski bag removal, we recommend that youcontact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.G Warning!Never drive vehicle with trunk open whilethe ski bag is removed. Deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicleinterior, resulting in unconsciousness anddeath.
To prevent unauthorized persons from accessto the trunk, always close the cover.
Parcel net
G Warning!The parcel net is intended for storing light-weight items only, such as road maps, mail,etc.Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges orfragile objects may not be transported inthe parcel net. In an accident, during hardbraking, or sudden maneuvers, they couldbe thrown around inside the vehicle andcause injury to vehicle occupants.
Controls in detail
Z
Loading and storing
204
The parcel net cannot protect transportedgoods in the event of an accident.
A parcel net is located in the front passengerfootwell.
Cargo tie-down ringsYour vehicle is equipped with four cargo tie-down rings.Carefully secure cargo by applying even loadon all rings 1 with rope of sufficient strengthto hold down the cargo.Always follow loading instructions(Y page 200).
Trunk/cargo compartmentThe cargo tie-down rings are located in thetrunk/cargo compartment.
Sedan1 Cargo tie-down ring
Wagon1 Cargo tie-down ring
Hook (sedan)A retaining hook can be used to attach cargoitems such as bags.
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
205
1 Tab2 Retaining hook
X Pull tab 1 of retaining hook 2 down.
! Do not use the retaining hook to tie downcargo.
Expanding cargo volumeTo expand the cargo volume, you can folddown the left and right seat backrests.The two sections can be folded downseparately to enlarge the cargo volume.G Warning!When expanding the cargo volume, alwaysfold the seat cushions fully forward.Unless you are transporting cargo, the seatbackrests must remain properly locked inthe upright position.In an accident, during hard braking orsudden maneuvers, loose items will bethrown around inside the vehicle, andcause injury to vehicle occupants unlessthe items are securely fastened in thevehicle.Always use the cargo tie-down rings.
Sedan
Folding rear seat backrest forward! Always release the seat cushion and fold
it forward before folding the correspondingseat backrest forward. The seat backrestmay otherwise be damaged.
It may be necessary to move these seatsforward slightly in order to fold the seatbackrests forward.
1 Release handleX Pull release handle 1.
The seat cushion springs slightly upward.
Controls in detail
Z
Loading and storing
206
1 Seat cushion2 Seat backrestX Grab the back of seat cushion 1 and fold
forward.X Push the rear seat head restraints all the
way in.X If the rear center seat is to be occupied
while driving, it may be necessary to foldthe seat belt buckle up again.
X Pull the handle in the trunk.Seat backrest 2 is released and the headrestraints fold back.
X Fold seat backrest 2 forward.
! Make sure the head restraints fit all theway into the seat cushion pockets. This willprevent the seat backrests from beingdamaged during loading.
Returning rear seat backrest to originalpositionG Warning!Always lock seat backrest in its uprightposition when rear seat bench is occupied,or the extended cargo volume is not in use.Check for secure locking by pushing andpulling on the seat backrest.
In an accident, during hard braking orsudden maneuvers, loose items will bethrown around inside the vehicle, andcause injury to vehicle occupants unlessthe items are securely fastened in thevehicle.To help avoid personal injury during acollision or sudden maneuver, exercisecare when transporting cargo.
1 Seat cushion2 Seat backrestX Fold seat backrest 2 rearward until it
engages.
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
207
X Fold seat cushion 1 rearward and pressthe center front of the cushion until itaudibly engages.
X If need be, fold the head restraint forwardby hand.
Removing rear seat cushionRemoving the rear seat cushions will provideyou with a larger, flat cargo volume.X Fold the seat cushions forward
(Y page 205).X Remove the head restraints (Y page 100).X Fold the seat backrest into the vertical
position.
1 Release lever2 Plug for rear seat heating (Canada only)
! Vehicles with rear seat heating (Canadaonly):The electrical contact on the bottom of theseat cushion must be disconnected beforeremoving the rear seat cushion.
X Press the plug connection on thecheckered surface and pull plug 2 for theseat heating out of the seat cushion.
i Vehicles with rear seat heating (Canadaonly):When placing the seat cushion back in,guide the plug connection back togetheruntil the plug engages.
X Pull release lever 1 and remove the seatcushion by pulling it upward.
! Leave the seat cushion hinge in thisposition. The upholstery could be damagedif you fold the hinge back.
X Fold the seat backrest forward.
Wagon! To prevent damage, the following must be
observed before folding the seat backrestforward:Rthe head restraints must be folded back
and fully insertedRthe front seat must be moved forward
until sufficient clearance for foldingprocedure is achievedRthe seat cushions must be folded forward
Controls in detail
Z
Loading and storing
208
Folding rear seat backrest forward
1 Release catch2 Seat cushionX Pull release catch 1 and use it to pull seat
cushion 2 up.
3 Seat backrest4 Release catchX Pull release catch 4 up.
Seat backrest 3 is released and the headrestraints fold back.
X Fold seat backrest 3 forward.X Adjust front seats to desired position.X If the rear center seat is to be occupied
while driving, it may be necessary to foldthe seat belt buckle up again.
Returning rear seat backrest to originalpositionG Warning!Always lock seat backrest in its uprightposition when rear seat bench is occupied,or the extended cargo compartment is not
in use. Check for secure locking by pushingand pulling on the seat backrest.In an accident, during hard braking orsudden maneuvers, loose items will bethrown around inside the vehicle, andcause injury to vehicle occupants unlessthe items are securely fastened in thevehicle.To help avoid personal injury during acollision or sudden maneuver, exercisecare when transporting cargo.
1 Seat cushion2 Seat backrestX Fold seat backrest 2 to the rear until it
engages.
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
209
X Fold seat cushion 1 to the rear and pressthe center front of the cushion until itaudibly engages.
X If need be, fold the head restraint forwardby hand.
Adjusting rear seat backrest positionThe seat backrests can be placed in analternative upright position. This creates alarger cargo compartment area or providesfor improved seating comfort on the foldingbench seat, if required.
1 Release catch2 Seat backrestX Pull right seat release catch 1 up and fold
seat backrest 2 forward.X With seat backrest 2 released, pull
release catch 1 up again.
X Pull left seat release catch 1 up and foldseat backrest 2 forward.
X With seat backrest 2 released, pullrelease catch 1 up again.
X Fold driver’s-side rear seat backrest 2 tothe rear until it engages.
X Fold passenger-side seat backrest 2 tothe rear until it engages.The seat backrests are now in thealternative position.
Removing rear seat cushionRemoving the rear seat cushions will provideyou with a larger, flat cargo volume.X Fold the seat cushions forward
(Y page 208).X Remove the head restraints (Y page 100).X Fold the seat backrest into the vertical
position.
1 Release lever2 Plug for rear seat heating (Canada only)
! Vehicles with rear seat heating (Canadaonly):The electrical contact on the bottom of theseat cushion must be disconnected beforeremoving the rear seat cushion.
X Press the plug connection on thecheckered surface and pull plug 2 for theseat heating out of the seat cushion.
X Pull release lever 1 and remove the seatcushion by pulling it upward.
i Vehicles with rear seat heating (Canadaonly):
Controls in detail
Z
Loading and storing
210
When placing the seat cushion back in,guide the plug connection back togetheruntil the plug engages.
! Leave the seat cushion hinge in thisposition. The upholstery could be damagedif you fold the hinge back.
X Fold the seat backrest forward.
Cargo management system (wagon,Canada only)
The cargo management system andaccompanying accessories enable you toutilize your cargo compartment in a variety ofways. You can store the cargo managementsystem in the pouch that comes with thevehicle.The pouch and telescoping rod can be placedin the storage box in the cargo compartment.
1 Cargo rails
Inserting the mounting elements intothe cargo rails
1 Cargo rail2 Mounting elementYou can move mounting element 2 tovarious engaging points on cargo rail 1 andfix it in place.These engaging points are located2 inches (5.1 cm) apart from one another oncargo rail 1 and are indicated by markings.You can turn the mounting element in thecargo rail to four positions:j To lock the mounting elementN To insert or remove the cargo tie-down
ring, the belt reel or the telescopingrod
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
211
L To insert or remove the mountingelement
S To move the mounting element to thenext engaging point
X Turn mounting element 2 to L.X Insert mounting element 2 in cargo rail
1.X Turn mounting element 2 until it engages
in position j.You should be able to feel mountingelement 2 engage in cargo rail 1.
Inserting the cargo tie-down ring in themounting element
G Warning!The cargo tie-down rings should be subjectto equal loads. Make sure to comply withthe information provided in the loadinginstructions.
1 Cargo tie-down ring2 Mounting elementX Turn mounting element 2 in the cargo rail
to L.X Insert cargo tie-down ring 1 into mounting
element 2.X Turn mounting element 2 until it engages
in position j.You should be able to feel mountingelement 2 engage in the cargo rail.
Belt reelThe belt reel can be used to tighten light-weight loads against the side wall of the cargocompartment, thus securing them fromslipping.
1 Belt reel2 Mounting element3 Locking button
X Insert two mounting elements 2 into acargo rail.
X Turn mounting element 2 in the cargo railto N.
X Insert belt reel 1 into mounting element2.
X Turn mounting element 2 in the cargo railuntil it engages in position j.You should be able to feel mountingelement 2 engage in the cargo rail.
X Press locking button 3 on belt reel 1 andpull cargo belt out in direction of arrow.
Controls in detail
Z
Loading and storing
212
X Place load between the cargo belt and theside wall of the cargo compartment.
X Press locking button 3 on belt reel 1.With the other hand, slowly pull cargo beltover load until the load is properly secured.
Telescoping rodThe telescoping rod can be used to tightenthe load against the rear seats so as to secureit from slipping.
1 Telescoping rod2 Mounting element
X Insert one mounting element 2 into eachcargo rail.
X Turn mounting element 2 in the cargo railto N.
X Insert telescoping rod 1 into mountingelement 2.
X Turn mounting element 2 in the cargo railuntil it engages in position j.You should be able to feel mountingelement 2 engage in the cargo rail.
Storage box in cargo compartment(wagon, Canada only)
G Warning!When you are using the storage box in thecargo compartment, the seat backrests ofthe seats in front of it must be completelyengaged to the rear, and the twin rollerblind must be installed.Do not exceed the storage box’s maximumload of 44 lb (20 kg), as it could otherwisebecome detached during an accident orsharp braking maneuvers, and could injureyou or other passengers.
The storage box in the cargo compartment iscovered by the rear seat bench.
1 Storage box2 Cargo compartment floor3 Seat backrests4 Locking hooks
X Installing: Fold seat backrests 3 forward(Y page 207).
X Insert storage box 1 from within the cargocompartment with the opening pointing indirection of travel.
X Press locking hooks 4 of storage box 1into the space between seat backrests 3and cargo compartment floor 2.
X Fold seat backrests 3 to the originalposition (Y page 208).
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
213
Storage box 1 is additionally held in placefrom above by the twin roller blind.X Loading: Fold seat backrests 3 forward
(Y page 207).X Fill storage box 1 with cargo through the
opening on the front side.X Fold seat backrests 3 to the original
position (Y page 208).X Removing: Fold seat backrests 3 forward
(Y page 207).X Slide locking hooks 4 of storage box 1
forward out of the retainers.X Pull storage box 1 to the rear and remove
it from cargo compartment.X Fold seat backrest 3 to the original
position (Y page 208).
Twin roller blind (wagon)The twin roller blind contains a cargo net anda cargo compartment cover.
Cargo net
G Warning!The cargo net cannot hold back heavyloads. The transported load shouldtherefore always be tied down.Objects which are insufficiently securedcould otherwise injure you if they arethrown around in the event of an accident,during hard braking or steering maneuvers.
1 Cargo net2 Mounting for cargo net
X Pull cargo net 1 up and hook it ontomounting 2.
i You can use cargo net 1 even when theseat backrest is folded forward. Cargo net1 should then be hooked onto the frontmountings.
Cargo compartment coverTo assist loading the cargo area when thecargo compartment cover is closed, the coverwill be released and automatically raised/lowered when opening/closing the tailgate.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure notto load the cargo compartment over thelower edge of the side windows.The twin roller blind could otherwise bedamaged when the tailgate is being closed.
Controls in detail
Z
Loading and storing
214
1 Handle2 Cargo compartment cover
Rolling up the cargo compartment coverX Use handle 1 to pull cargo compartment
cover 2 down into the horizontal position.X Unhook cargo compartment cover 2 from
its anchorages on the left and right sides.To do so, pull cargo compartment cover2 slightly towards the rear and lower it.
X Slowly guide cargo compartment cover2 back until it stops.
Pulling out the cargo compartment coverX Pull out cargo compartment cover 2
towards the rear until it engages.
Removing the twin roller blindX Roll up cargo net and cargo compartment
cover 2.X Fold both rear seat cushions forward
(Y page 207).X Fold the passenger-side rear seat backrest
forward (Y page 207).X Fold the driver’s side rear seat backrest
forward (Y page 207).X Push twin roller blind to the driver’s side out
of its anchorage on the seat backrest andremove it.
Storage space under the cargocompartment floor (wagon, E 63 AMGonly)
The vehicle tool kit and jack are stored underthe rear cargo compartment floor. A loadingtray and a folding box are located under thefront cargo compartment floor.
Opening the cargo compartment floor
1 Front cargo compartment floor2 Rear cargo compartment floor3 HandleX Use handle 3 to open cargo compartment
floor 1 or 2.
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
215
2 Rear cargo compartment floor4 Locking in place5 Hooks6 Pneumatic springX Press rear cargo compartment floor 2
slightly forward 4.Pneumatic spring 6 engages, locking rearcargo compartment floor 2 in place.
i You can transport objects when the cargocompartment floor is open and hang lightluggage items from hooks 5.
Closing the front cargo compartmentfloorX Swing front cargo compartment floor 1
downward.X Push front cargo compartment floor 1
downward on handle 3 until it locks intoplace.
Closing the rear cargo compartmentfloor
6 Pneumatic spring7 Release buttonX Press release button 7 and swing rear
cargo compartment floor 2 downward.X Push front cargo compartment floor 1
downward on handle 3 until it locks intoplace.
Controls in detail
Z
Loading and storing
216
Removing the rear cargo compartmentfloor
1 Raising2 Rear cargo compartment floor3 Retainer4 Moving out5 Pneumatic spring6 Release catchX Open rear cargo compartment floor 2
(Y page 214).X Slide release catch 6 upward and remove
pneumatic spring 5 from bolt by moving itto the left.
X Press pneumatic spring 5 into retainer3.
X Move rear cargo compartment floor 2 intoan almost vertical position (to an angle of85°).
i Rear cargo compartment floor 2 canonly be moved upwards out of the lug at anangle of 85°.
X Grip the top of rear cargo compartmentfloor 2, raise left-hand side 1 and moveit to the left out of lug 4 on the right-handside.
Expanding the cargo compartment floorX Remove rear cargo compartment floor 2
(Y page 216).X Open front cargo compartment floor 1.
1 Front cargo compartment floor2 Loading tray3 Folding box4 Crossbar5 Release catchX Remove loading tray 2.X Slide release catch 5 all the way to the
right and press left side of crossbar 4upward.
X Pull crossbar 4 to the left away from theguide tab and remove it.
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
217
1 Front cargo compartment floor4 Crossbar6 RetainerX Store crossbar 4 in a suitable place. To do
so, insert crossbar 4 into the two retainers6 on front cargo compartment floor 1.
The two retainers 6 must be unlocked inorder to remove crossbar 4. To do so, pushthe tabs at the bottom of retainer 6 forward.
i You can store loading tray 2 under therear or the front cargo compartment floor.
Storage compartments
G Warning!To help avoid personal injury during acollision or sudden maneuver, exercisecare when storing objects in the vehicle.Put luggage or cargo in the trunk/cargocompartment if possible.Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than theseat backrests (wagon).Do not place anything on the shelf belowthe rear window (sedan).Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavyobjects.Keep compartment lids closed. This willhelp to prevent stored objects from beingthrown about and injuring vehicleoccupants duringRbrakingRvehicle maneuversRan accident
Glove box
1 Compartment for mobile phone/glasses2 Glove box lid release
X Opening glove box: Push glove box lidrelease 2.
X Opening compartment: Press oncompartment 1.
X Closing: Close compartment 1 firstbefore closing the glove box.
X Push glove box lid up until it engages.
Locking and unlocking the glove boxseparatelyYou can lock the glove box separately, e.g.when the vehicle is in the shop for service.The glove box can only be locked or unlockedwith the mechanical key.
Controls in detail
Z
Loading and storing
218
$ Unlocking glove box% Locking glove box
Storage compartment in the rear centerconsole
X Briefly press the top of the compartment.
Storage compartment in the reararmrest
X Opening: Pull down the armrest.X Press the handle upwards and fold the rear
armrest lid up.
! Do not sit on or lean your body weightagainst the armrest when it is folded down,as you could otherwise damage it.
Storage bags
G Warning!Do not place objects with a combinedweight of more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into thestorage bag. Otherwise, the OccupantClassification System OCS may not be able
to properly approximate the occupantweight category.The storage bag is intended for storinglight-weight items only.Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges orfragile objects may not be transported inthe storage bag. In an accident, during hardbraking, or sudden maneuvers, they couldbe thrown around inside the vehicle andcause injury to vehicle occupants.The storage bag cannot protecttransported goods in the event of anaccident.
Storage bags are located on the back of thefront seats.
Controls in detail
Useful features
219
Useful features
Cup holders
G Warning!In order to help prevent spilling liquids onvehicle occupants and/or vehicleequipment, only use containers that fit intothe cup holder. Use lids on open containersand do not fill containers to a height wherethe contents, especially hot liquids, couldspill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, orin an accident. Liquids spilled on vehicleoccupants may cause serious personalinjury. Liquids spilled on vehicle equipmentmay cause damage not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.When not in use, keep the cup holderclosed. An open cup holder may causeinjury to you or others when contactedduring braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in anaccident.Keep in mind that objects placed in the cupholder may come loose during braking,vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and bethrown around in the vehicle interior.Objects thrown around in the vehicleinterior may cause an accident and/orserious personal injury.
Storage compartment with cup holderin the center armrestThe storage compartment in the centerarmrest contains a removable cup holder.
1 Cover
X Opening: Slide cover 1 in direction ofarrow.
i Roadside Assistance button p(Y page 226) and Information button¡ (Y page 227) are located below cover1.
2 Cup holder3 Storage compartment
X Closing: Slide cover 1 back.
i Cup holder 2 can be removed toincrease storage space and for cleaning.
Controls in detail
Z
Useful features
220
1 Cup holder2 Locking pins
X Removing cup holder: Depress lockingpins 2 and remove cup holder 1upwards.
3 Locking pins
X Reinstalling cup holder: Insert cupholder.
X Press both locking pins 3 outwards.
! Make sure the cup holder is correctlypositioned in the guides while you arereinstalling it. Otherwise the cup holder canbe damaged.
Cup holder in rear armrest
X Opening: Briefly press the front of the reararmrest.
X Closing: Slide cup holder back until itengages.
! Do not sit on or lean your body weightagainst the armrest when it is folded down,as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding thearmrest upwards. Otherwise you coulddamage the cup holder.
Cup holder in third-row seat (wagon)
X Opening: Briefly press the front of the cupholder.
X Pull the cup holder until they engage.
Controls in detail
Useful features
221
Sun visors
G Warning!Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visorsclosed while vehicle is in motion. Reflectedglare can endanger you and others.
1 Sun visor2 Vanity mirror3 Vanity mirror cover4 Vanity mirror lamp
Glare through the windshieldX Flip sun visor 1 down when you
experience glare.
Glare through a door window
5 Sun visor6 Additional visor7 Mounting
X Close vanity mirror cover 3 if opened.X Disengage sun visor 5 from mounting
7.X Pivot sun visor 5 to the side.X Adjust sun visor 5 by pushing or pulling in
direction of arrows.X Flip down additional sun visor 6 when you
experience additional glare through thewindshield.
Vanity mirrorThe mirror lamp only functions when the sunvisor is engaged in mounting.X Flip sun visor 1 down.X Lift up vanity mirror cover 3.
Vanity mirror lamp 4 comes on.
Roller sunblind in the rear doors(Canada only)
1 Tab2 Holder
X Extending: Pull on tab 1 and engage it inholder 2.
X Retracting: Disengage tab 1 from holder2 and guide retraction.
Controls in detail
Z
Useful features
222
! Always guide the sunblind by hand. Do notlet it snap back, as the retractor could bedamaged.
Rear window sunshade (sedan)
G Warning!When operating the rear window sunshademake sure there is no danger of anyonebeing harmed by the extending orretracting procedure.The extending or retracting procedure canbe immediately halted by briefly pressingrear window sunshade switch. To reversedirection of movement, press rear windowsunshade switch again.
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 62.
1 Rear window sunshade switchAlways extend the sunshade fully for itssupport against the window frame.X Switch on the ignition.X Extending/Retracting: Press rear
window sunshade switch 1 briefly.
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
G Warning!Remove front ashtray insert only withvehicle standing still.
1 Cover2 Sliding knob
X Opening: Briefly press the marking on thebottom of cover 1.
X Removing ashtray insert: Secure vehiclefrom movement by engaging the parkingbrake.
X Shift the automatic transmission intoneutral position N.
X Push sliding knob 2 to the right and hold.
Controls in detail
Useful features
223
X Grab and remove ashtray insert fromashtray frame.
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push theashtray insert back into the frame until itengages.
X Closing: Push down cover 1.
Rear door ashtray
1 Ashtray release2 Ashtray
X Opening: Briefly press the top of ashtray2.
X Removing ashtray insert: Pull ashtrayrelease 1 in direction of arrow.
X Remove ashtray insert upwards fromashtray frame.
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push ashtrayinsert back into ashtray frame until itengages.
X Closing: Push the top of ashtray 2.
Cigarette lighter
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 62.
G Warning!Never touch the heating element or sidesof the lighter; they are extremely hot. Holdthe knob only.Make sure any children traveling with youdo not injure themselves or start a fire withthe hot cigarette lighter.
If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter isbeing used extensively, the vehicle batterymay become discharged.
1 Cigarette lighter
X Switch on the ignition.X Open the cover (Y page 222).X Push in cigarette lighter 1.
Cigarette lighter 1 will pop outautomatically when hot.
X Take out cigarette lighter 1.X Reinsert cigarette lighter 1 in its socket
after use.
! The lighter socket can be used toaccommodate 12V DC electricalaccessories (up to a maximum of 85 W)designed for use with the standard“cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind,however, that connecting accessories tothe lighter socket (for example extensiveconnecting and disconnecting, or using
Controls in detail
Z
Useful features
224
plugs that do not fit properly) can damagethe lighter socket. With the socketdamaged, the lighter may not functionproperly any longer.
Power outletsThe power outlets can be used toaccommodate 12V DC electrical accessories(e.g. auxiliary lamps, mobile phone chargers)up to a maximum of 15 A (180 W).An additional power outlet is located on theleft side in the trunk/cargo compartment.If the engine is off and the power outlets arebeing used extensively, the vehicle batterymay become discharged.X Switch on the ignition.
Rear center console
Tele Aid! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
subscriber agreement must be completed.To ensure your system is activated andoperational, please press the ¡ buttonto perform the acquaintance call. Failure tocomplete either of these steps may resultin a system that is not activated.If you have any questions regardingactivation, please call the Response Centerat 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aidacquaintance call, you will receive a user IDand password in the mail. You may use this
password to access the Tele Aid section in“Owner’s Online” at www.mbusa.com (USAonly). The “My Tele Aid” section will give youaccess to account information, remote doorunlock and more.The Tele Aid system is available ifRit has been activated and is operational.
Activation requires a subscription formonitoring services, connection andcellular air time.Rvehicle battery power is available.Rthe relevant cellular phone network and
GPS signals are available and pass theinformation on to the Response Center.
i Location of the vehicle on a map is onlypossible if the vehicle is able to receivesignals from the GPS satellite network andpass the information on to the ResponseCenter.
The Tele Aid system(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
Controls in detail
Useful features
225
The Tele Aid system consists of three typesof response:RAutomatic and manual emergencyRRoadside AssistanceRInformationThe Tele Aid system is operational providingthat the vehicle’s battery is charged, properlyconnected, not damaged, and cellular andGPS coverage is available. The Tele Aidsystem utilizes the cellular network forcommunication and the GPS (GlobalPositioning System) satellites for vehiclelocation. If either of these signals areunavailable, the Tele Aid system may notfunction and if this occurs, assistance mustbe summoned by other means.To adjust the speaker volume during a TeleAid call do the following:X Press button æ or ç on the
multifunction steering wheel.orX Use the adjustment button on your
COMAND system.
System self-testThe system performs a self-test after youhave switched on the ignition.G Warning!If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, inthe Roadside Assistance button p and/or in the Information button ¡ do notcome on during the system self-test, or ifany of these indicators remain illuminatedconstantly in red and/or the message TeleAid Inoperative is displayed in themultifunction display after the system self-test, a malfunction in the system has beendetected.If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the system may not operate asexpected. In case of an emergency, helpwill have to be summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestMercedes-Benz Center or contact theResponse Center at 1-800-756-9018 (inthe USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) assoon as possible.
Emergency calls! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
subscriber agreement must be completed.
To ensure your system is activated andoperational, please press the ¡ buttonto perform the acquaintance call. Failure tocomplete either of these steps may resultin a system that is not activated.If you have any questions regardingactivation, please call the Response Centerat 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
An emergency call is initiated automaticallyfollowing an accident in which the EmergencyTensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags deploy.An emergency call can also be initiatedmanually (Y page 226).Once the emergency call is in progress, theindicator lamp in the SOS button will begin toflash. The message Connecting Callappears in the multifunction display and theaudio system or the COMAND system ismuted. When the connection is established,the message Call Connected appears in themultifunction display.All information relevant to the emergency,such as the location of the vehicle(determined by the GPS satellite locationsystem), vehicle model, identification numberand color are generated.A voice connection between the ResponseCenter and the occupants of the vehicle will
Controls in detail
Z
Useful features
226
be established automatically soon after theemergency call has been initiated. TheResponse Center will attempt to determinemore precisely the nature of the emergencyprovided they can speak to an occupant ofthe vehicle.
i If no vehicle occupant responds, anambulance will be sent to the vehicleimmediately.
G Warning!If the indicator lamp in the SOS button isflashing continuously and there was novoice connection to the Response Centerestablished, then the Tele Aid system couldnot initiate an emergency call (e.g. therelevant cellular phone network is notavailable).The message Call Failed appears in themultifunction display for approximately10 seconds.Should this occur, assistance must besummoned by other means.
i The “911” emergency call system is apublic service. Using it without due causeis a criminal offense.
Initiating an emergency call manually
1 Cover2 SOS button
X Briefly press on cover 1 to open.X Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 willflash until the emergency call is concluded.
X Wait for a voice connection to theResponse Center.
X Close cover 1 after the emergency call isconcluded.G Warning!If you feel at any way in jeopardy when inthe vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,vehicle in a dangerous road location),please do not wait for voice contact afteryou have pressed the emergency button.
Carefully leave the vehicle and move to asafe location. The Response Center willautomatically contact local emergencyofficials with the vehicle’s approximatelocation if they receive an automatic SOSsignal and cannot make voice contact withthe vehicle occupants.
Roadside Assistance buttonX Open the storage compartment
(Y page 219).
1 Roadside Assistance button p
X Press and hold button p for longer than2 seconds.A call to a Mercedes-Benz RoadsideAssistance dispatcher will be initiated. Theindicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance
Controls in detail
Useful features
227
button p will flash while the call is inprogress. The message ConnectingCall will appear in the multifunctiondisplay and the audio system or theCOMAND system is muted.
When the connection is established, themessage Call Connected appears in themultifunction display. The Tele Aid system willtransmit data generating the vehicleidentification number, model, color andlocation (subject to availability of cellular andGPS signals).
i The COMAND system display indicatesthat a Tele Aid call is in progress. While thecall is connected you can change to thenavigation menu by pressing the NAVbutton on the COMAND system. Spokencommands are not available.
A voice connection between the RoadsideAssistance dispatcher and the occupants ofthe vehicle will be established.X Describe the nature of the need for
assistance.The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistancedispatcher will either dispatch a qualifiedMercedes-Benz technician or arrange to towyour vehicle to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. For services such as
labor and/or towing, charges may apply.Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual formore information.The following is only available in the USA:Sign and Drive services: Services such as ajump start, a few gallons of fuel or thereplacement of a flat tire with the vehiclespare tire are obtainable at no charge.
i If the indicator lamp in the RoadsideAssistance button p is flashingcontinuously and there was no voiceconnection to the Response Centerestablished, then the Tele Aid system couldnot initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g.the relevant cellular phone network is notavailable). The message Call Failedappears in the multifunction display.
X Terminating calls: Press button t onthe multifunction steering wheel.
orX Press the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the COMAND system.
Information buttonX Open the storage compartment
(Y page 219).
1 Information button ¡
X Press and hold Information button ¡ forlonger than 2 seconds.A call to the Customer Assistance Centerwill be initiated. The indicator lamp in theInformation button ¡ will flash while thecall is in progress. The messageConnecting Call will appear in themultifunction display and the COMANDsystem is muted.
When the connection is established, themessage Call Connected appears in themultifunction display. The Tele Aid system willtransmit data generating the vehicleidentification number, model, color andlocation (subject to availability of cellular andGPS signals).
Controls in detail
Z
Useful features
228
i The COMAND system display indicatesthat a Tele Aid call is in progress. While thecall is connected you can change to thenavigation menu by pressing the NAVbutton on the COMAND system. Spokencommands are not available.
A voice connection between the CustomerAssistance Center representative and theoccupants of the vehicle will be established.Information regarding the operation of yourvehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA productsand services is available to you.For more details concerning the Tele Aidsystem, please visit www.mbusa.com (USAonly), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the“My Tele Aid” section to learn more.
i If the indicator lamp in the Informationbutton ¡ is flashing continuously andthere was no voice connection to theResponse Center established, then the TeleAid system could not initiate an Informationcall (e.g. the relevant cellular phonenetwork is not available). The messageCall Failed appears in the multifunctiondisplay.
X Terminating calls: Press button t onthe multifunction steering wheel.
orX Press the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the COMAND system.
Call priorityIf other service calls such as a RoadsideAssistance call or Information call are active,an emergency call is still possible. In thiscase, the emergency call will take priority andoverride all other active calls.The indicator lamp in the respective buttonflashes until the call is concluded. Emergencycalls can only be terminated by a ResponseCenter or Customer Assistance Centerrepresentative. All other calls can beterminated by pressing button t on themultifunction steering wheel or therespective button for ending a telephone callon the COMAND system.
i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,the COMAND system audio is muted. Themobile phone is no longer connected to theCOMAND system. If you must use thisphone, we recommend that you use it only
with the vehicle at a standstill in a safelocation.
Destination Download to the COMANDsystemi The components and operating principles
of the COMAND system can be found in theseparate COMAND operating instructions.
Destination Download allows you access to adatabase of over 10 million points of interest(POIs) that can be downloaded to yourvehicle’s navigation system. If you know thedestination, the address can be downloaded,or can be provided with points of interestsnear your location.The Response Center can transmitdestination data to the COMAND systemduring the connection with the RoadsideAssistance or Customer Assistance Center.The transmitted data can contain addressdetails for a Mercedes-Benz Center or POIs.
Controls in detail
Useful features
229
Route guidanceYou will be prompted to confirm that routeguidance to the entered address is to bestarted.X Select Yes using button ( or & on
the COMAND system.X Press button C on the COMAND system
to confirm.The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidance to thedefined address.
i If you select No, you can save the addressto your address book.
i The Destination Download feature isavailable if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.
Search and Sendi In order to utilize Search & Send your
vehicle must be equipped with Tele Aid,Navigation, and an active Tele Aidsubscription.
“Search & Send” is a navigation destinationaddress entry service. A destination addresslocated using Google Maps® or Yahoo Local
Maps® website can be delivered via Tele Aiddirectly to the navigation system in yourvehicle.
Specify and Send a Destination Addressi Please refer to any specific instructions
provided by either website regardingentering or sending an address. Eachwebsite functions differently and is subjectto change.
X Go to www.maps.google.com orwww.maps.yahoo.com and enter adestination address in the address entryfield.
X Depending on which website you are using,click on the appropriate button to send thedestination address to your Tele Aidaccount email address.
X Enter the email address you specified whenyou activated your Tele Aid account in theappropriate field when the “Send” dialogbox appears.
X Click “Send”.
Retrieve Destination AddressX Press the Tele Aid Information button to
begin the download of the destination
address to your vehicle’s navigationsystem.
i If you have sent more than onedestination address to your vehicle youmust make one Information call for eachdestination address download.
X Select Yes when the message appearsasking if you would like to start navigation.This will open the start navigation screen.
Controls in detail
Z
Useful features
230
X Select Start.orX Select No if you wish to save the
downloaded destination address in theFrom Memory destination list for futureuse.
i Destination addresses will download inthe same order they were sent. If you havemultiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles equippedwith Tele Aid and active accounts, eachdestination address sent will be retrievableby all vehicles associated with the e-mailaddress you specified for your Tele Aidaccount.
Remote door unlockIn case you have locked your vehicleunintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),and the reserve SmartKey is not available:X Contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).You will be asked to provide your password.
X Then return to your vehicle at the timearranged with the Response Center andpull the trunk/tailgate recessed handle fora minimum of 20 seconds until theindicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing.The message Connecting Call appears inthe multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehiclevia Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of“Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password(USA only).
The Response Center will then unlock yourvehicle with the remote door unlockingfeature.
i The remote door unlock feature isavailable if the relevant cellular phonenetwork is available.The SOS button will flash and the messageCall Connected will appear in themultifunction display to indicate receipt ofthe door unlock command.Once the vehicle is unlocked, a ResponseCenter specialist will attempt to establishvoice contact with the vehicle occupants.If the trunk/tailgate recessed handle waspulled for more than 20 seconds beforedoor unlock authorization was received bythe Response Center, you must wait15 minutes before pulling the trunk/tailgate recessed handle again.
Controls in detail
Useful features
231
Stolen Vehicle Recovery servicesIn the event your vehicle was stolen:X Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.
X Pass this number on to the ResponseCenter along with your password.The Response Center will then attempt tocovertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aidsystem. Once the vehicle is located, theResponse Center will contact the local lawenforcement and you. The vehicle’slocation will only be provided to lawenforcement.
i If the anti-theft alarm stays on for morethan 30 seconds, a call to the ResponseCenter is initiated automatically by the TeleAid system provided Tele Aid service wassubscribed to and properly activated, andthat necessary cellular service and GPScoverage are available. See “Anti-theftalarm system” (Y page 76).
Garage door openerThe integrated remote control can operate upto three separately controlled devicescompatible with HomeLink® or some othersystems.G Warning!Before programming the integrated remotecontrol to a garage door opener or gateoperator, make sure people and objects areout of the way of the device to preventpotential harm or damage. Whenprogramming a garage door opener, thedoor moves up or down. Whenprogramming a gate operator, the gateopens or closes.Do not use the integrated remote controlwith any garage door opener that lackssafety stop and reverse features asrequired by U.S. federal safety standards(this includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982).A garage door that cannot detect an object- signaling the door to stop and reverse -does not meet current U.S. federal safetystandards.When programming a garage door opener,park vehicle outside the garage.
Do not run the engine while programmingthe integrated remote control. Inhalation ofexhaust gas is hazardous to your health. Allexhaust gas contains carbon monoxide(CO), and inhaling it can causeunconsciousness and possible death.
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remotecontrol1 Indicator lamp234 Signal transmitter button5 Hand-held remote control (not part
of vehicle equipment)6 Hand-held remote control button
Controls in detail
Z
Useful features
232
Programming the integrated remotecontrolX Step 1: Switch on the ignition.X Step 2: If you have previously programmed
a signal transmitter button and wish toretain its programming, proceed to step 3.
orX If you are programming the integrated
remote control for the first time, press andhold the two outer signal transmitterbuttons 2 and 4 and release them whenindicator lamp 1 begins to flash afterapproximately 20 seconds.Do not hold the button for longer than30 seconds.This procedure erases any previoussettings for all three channels andinitializes the memory. If you later wish toprogram a second and/or third hand-heldtransmitter to the remaining two signaltransmitter buttons, do not repeat this stepand begin directly with step 3.
X Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remotecontrol 5 of the device you wish to trainapproximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) awayfrom the signal transmitter button (2, 3or 4) to be programmed, while keepingindicator lamp 1 in view.
X Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneouslypress hand-held remote control button 6and the desired signal transmitter button(2, 3 or 4). Do not release the buttonsuntil step 5 is completed.Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly andthen rapidly.
i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediatelythe first time the signal transmitter buttonis programmed. If this button has alreadybeen programmed, the indicator lamp willstart flashing after 20 seconds.
X Step 5: After indicator lamp 1 changesfrom a slow to a rapidly flashing light,release the hand-held remote controlbutton and the signal transmitter button.
X Step 6: Press and hold the just-trainedsignal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) andobserve indicator lamp 1.If indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the respective signaltransmitter button (2, 3 or 4) is pressedand released.
i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly forapproximately 2 seconds and then turns toa constant light, continue with
programming steps 8 through 12 as yourgarage door opener may be equipped withthe “rolling code” feature.
X Step 7: To program the remaining twosignal transmitter buttons, repeat the stepsabove starting with step 3.
Rolling code programmingTo train a garage door opener (or other rollingcode devices) with the rolling code feature,follow these instructions after completing the“Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) ofthis text. A second person may make thefollowing training procedures quicker andeasier.X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the
garage door opener motor head unit.
i Exact location and color of the button mayvary by garage door opener brand.Depending on manufacturer, the “training”button may also be referred to as “learn”or“smart” button. If there is difficulty locatingthe transmitting button, refer to the garagedoor opener Operator’s Manual.
X Step 9: Press the “training” button on thegarage door opener motor head unit.The “training light” is activated.
Controls in detail
Useful features
233
You have 30 seconds to initiate thefollowing two steps.
X Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmlypress, hold for 2 seconds and release theprogrammed signal transmitter button(2, 3 or 4).
X Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds andrelease same signal transmitter button asecond time to complete the trainingprocess.
i Some garage door openers (or otherrolling code equipped devices) may requireyou to press, hold for 2 seconds andrelease the same signal transmitter buttona third time to complete the trainingprocess.
X Step 12: Confirm the garage dooroperation by pressing the programmedsignal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
X Step 13: To program the remaining twosignal transmitter buttons, repeat the stepsabove starting with step 3.
Gate operator/Canadian programmingCanadian radio-frequency laws requiretransmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)after several seconds of transmission whichmay not be long enough for the integrated
signal transmitter to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similar to this Canadian law,some U.S. gate operators are designed to“time-out” in the same manner.If you live in Canada or if you are havingdifficulties programming a gate operator(regardless of where you live) by using theprogramming procedures, replace step 4 withthe following:X Step 4: Press and hold the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do notrelease this button until it has beensuccessfully trained.
X While still holding down the signaltransmitter button (2, 3 or 4), “cycle”your hand-held remote control button 6as follows: Press and hold button 6 for2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds,and again press and hold it for 2 seconds.Repeat this sequence on the hand-heldremote control until the frequency signalhas been learned.Upon successful training, indicator lamp1 will flash slowly and then rapidly afterseveral seconds.
X Proceed with programming step 5 andstep 6 to complete.
i Upon completion of programming theintegrated remote control, make sure youretain the hand-held remote control thatcame with the garage door opener, gateoperator or other device. You may need itfor use in other vehicles, for futureprogramming of an integrated remotecontrol, or simply for continued use as ahand-held remote control to operate therespective device in other situations.
Reprogramming a single signaltransmitter buttonTo program a device using a signaltransmitter button previously trained, followthese steps:X Switch on the ignition.X Press and hold the desired signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do notrelease the button.Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash after20 seconds.
X Without releasing the signal transmitterbutton, proceed with programming startingwith step 3.
Controls in detail
Z
Useful features
234
Operation of integrated remote controlX Switch on the ignition.X Select and press the appropriate
integrated signal transmitter button (2,3 or 4) to activate the remote controlleddevice.The integrated remote control transmittercontinues to send the signal as long as thebutton is pressed – up to 20 seconds.
Erasing the integrated remote controlmemoryi If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of
all three channels.
X Switch on the ignition.X Simultaneously press and hold outer signal
transmitter buttons 2 and 4, forapproximately 20 seconds, until indicatorlamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do not hold forlonger than 30 seconds.The codes of all three channels are erased.
Programming tipsIf you are having difficulty programming theintegrated remote control, here are somehelpful tips:RCheck the frequency of hand-held remote
control 5 (typically located on the reverseside of the remote). The integrated remotecontrol is compatible with radio-frequencydevices operating between 280-390 MHz.RPut a new battery in hand-held remote
control 5. This will increase the likelihoodof the hand-held remote control sending afaster and more accurate signal to theintegrated remote control.RWhile performing step 3, hold hand-held
remote control 5 at different lengths andangles from the signal transmitter button(2, 3 or 4) you are programming.Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the sameangle at varying distances.RIf another hand-held remote control is
available for the same device, try theprogramming steps again using that otherhand-held remote control. Make sure new
batteries are in the hand-held remotecontrol before beginning the procedure.RStraighten the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This mayhelp improve transmitting and/or receivingsignals.
i Certain types of garage door openers areincompatible with the integrated remotecontrol. If you should experience furtherdifficulties with programming theintegrated remote control, contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or callthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (in the USA) at1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or CustomerService (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and2. this device must accept any
interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.
Controls in detail
Useful features
235
Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.
i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,
and2. this device must accept any
interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.
Floormats
G Warning!Whenever you are using floormats, makesure there is enough clearance and that thefloormats are securely fastened.Floormats should always be securelyfastened using the fastening equipment.Before driving off, check that the floormatsare securely in place and adjust them ifnecessary. A loose floormat could slip andhinder proper functioning of the pedals.Do not place several floormats on top ofeach other as this may impair pedalmovement.
i To install or remove the floormat moreeasily, move the driver’s seat or frontpassenger seat as far to the rear aspossible.
1 Retainer pin2 Eyelet
X Removing: Pull floormat off of retainer pins1.
X Installing: Press floormat eyelets 2 ontoretainer pins 1.
Controls in detail
Z
236
237
Vehicle equipment ............................ 238The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ....... 238At the gas station ............................. 239Engine compartment ........................ 241Tires and wheels ............................... 247Winter driving ................................... 272Driving instructions .......................... 274Maintenance ...................................... 280Vehicle care ....................................... 282
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
238
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes allfeatures, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more cautiously you treat your vehicleduring the break-in period, the more satisfiedyou will be with its performance later on.RDrive your vehicle during the first
1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying butmoderate vehicle and engine speeds.RDuring this period, avoid heavy loads (full
throttle driving) and excessive enginespeeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpmin each gear).RSelect C as the preferred shift program
(Y page 133) for the first 1 000 miles(1 500 km).RAvoid accelerating by kickdown.RDo not attempt to slow the vehicle down by
shifting to a lower gear using the gearselector lever.RSelect gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 (Y page 133)
only when driving at moderate speeds (forhill driving).
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you maygradually increase vehicle and engine speedsto the permissible maximum.
! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:RDuring the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km),
do not exceed a speed of 85 mph(140 km/h).RDuring this period, avoid engine speeds
above 4 500 rpm in each gear.RShift gears in a timely manner.
All of the above instructions, as may apply toyour vehicle type, also apply when driving thefirst 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engineor the rear differential has been replaced.
i Always obey applicable speed limits.
Notes on breaking-in the reardifferential (AMG vehicles only)
The vehicle is equipped with a self-lockingrear differential. For increased protection ofthe rear differential, carry out an oil changeafter a break-in phase of 2 000 miles(3 000 km). This oil change will extend theuseful life of the differential. Have the oilchange carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends youhave this work done at a authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
Operation
At the gas station
239
At the gas station
Refueling
G Warning!Gasoline and diesel fuels are highlyflammable and poisonous. They burnviolently and can cause serious injury.Never allow sparks, flames or smokingmaterials near gasoline or diesel fuel!Turn off the engine before refueling.Whenever you are around gasoline or dieselfuel, avoid inhaling fumes and any skin orclothing contact. Extinguish all smokingmaterials.Direct skin contact with fuels and theinhalation of fuel vapors are damaging yourhealth.
G Warning!Overfilling of the fuel tank may createpressure in the system which could causea gas discharge. This could cause the gasto spray back out when removing the fuelpump nozzle, which could cause personalinjury.
G Warning!Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline. Do notmix diesel fuel with gasoline. Otherwise thefuel system and engine could be damaged.In addition, the vehicle could catch fire.
! Never use diesel fuel in vehicles withgasoline engine. Never refuel vehicles withgasoline engine with diesel fuel. Even smallamounts of incorrect fuel will damage thefuel system and engine. Damage resultingfrom the use of non-approved fuels or fueladditives or resulting from mixing gasolinewith diesel fuel or vice versa is not coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! If you have accidentally filled the tankwith incorrect or non-approved fuel, do notswitch on the ignition. Otherwise theincorrect or non-approved fuel will get intothe fuel lines. The fuel system must bedrained completely. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to have the fuelsystem drained completely.
! Gasoline engine:To prevent damage to the catalyticconverters, only use premium unleadedgasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engineoperation should be repaired promptly.Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel mayreach the catalytic converter, causing it tooverheat and potentially start a fire.
! Diesel engine:When filling the diesel fuel tank using fuelcontainers, place a filling filter, a suedecloth or a clean flannel cloth as a filter.Otherwise, particles from the fuel containercould clog the fuel lines and/or the dieselinjection system.
! Diesel engine:The engine is more susceptible to wear anddamage if you useRmarine diesel fuelRheating oilRadditivesThe exhaust aftertreatment device will beseriously damaged if you use any otherdiesel fuel than ULTRA-LOW SULFURHIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (15 ppm SULFURMAXIMUM).The use of such non-approved fuels and/orspecial additives is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Operation
Z
At the gas station
240
i Gasoline engine:Only use premium unleaded gasoline witha minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91(average of 96 RON/86 MON).Information on gasoline quality cannormally be found on the fuel pump. Pleasecontact gas station personnel in caselabels on the pump cannot be found.For more information on gasoline, see“Premium unleaded gasoline (gasolineengine)” (Y page 398), see “Fuelrequirements” (Y page 399), or contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or visitwww.mbusa.com (USA only).
i Diesel engine:Only use commercially available vehicularULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL(15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM). Informationon diesel quality can normally be found onthe fuel pump. Please contact gas stationpersonnel in case labels on the pumpcannot be found.For more information on diesel fuels, see“Fuel requirements” (Y page 399), orcontact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter, or visit www.mbusa.com (USAonly).
i Diesel engine:If you have driven the vehicle until the tankis empty, the fuel system needs to be bled(Y page 366).
The fuel filler flap is located on the right-handside of the vehicle towards the rear.Locking/unlocking the vehicle with theSmartKey automatically locks/unlocks thefuel filler flap.
i In case the central locking system doesnot release the fuel filler flap, or theopening mechanism is clamping, contactRoadside Assistance or an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
1 Fuel filler flap2 Fuel filler cap3 Holder
X Turn off the engine.
i Leaving the engine running and the fuelfiller cap open can cause the yellow fueltank reserve warning lamp to flash and themalfunction indicator lamp ú (USAonly) or ± (Canada only) to illuminate.For more information, see also “Practicalhints” (Y page 338).
X Remove the SmartKey from the starterswitch.KEYLESS-GO: Open the driver’s door (thisputs the starter switch in position 0, sameas with the SmartKey removed from thestarter switch). The driver’s door then canbe closed again.
X Opening: Press fuel filler flap 1 at thepoint indicated by the arrow.
X Turn fuel filler cap 2 counterclockwise.X Take off fuel filler cap 2.
X Place fuel filler cap 2 in direction of arrowinto holder 3.
X Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel.X Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit
cuts out – do not top off or overfill.
Operation
Engine compartment
241
X Closing: Turn fuel filler cap 2 clockwiseuntil it audibly engages.
X Close fuel filler flap 1.
Low outside temperatures (dieselengine)! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene.The fuel system and engine will otherwisebe damaged, which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel withimproved cold flow characteristics is offeredin the winter months. Check with your fuelretailer.
Check regularly and before a long tripFor information on quantities andrequirements of operating agents, see “Fuels,coolants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 394).Check the following:REngine oil level (Y page 243)RTire inflation pressure (Y page 255)RCoolant level (Y page 245)RVehicle lighting (Y page 348)
RWasher system and headlamp cleaningsystem (Y page 246)RBrake fluid (Y page 276), (Y page 312),
(Y page 331)
Engine compartment
Hood
G Warning!Do not pull the release lever while thevehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hoodcould be forced open by passing air flow.This could cause the hood to come looseand injure you and/or others.
Opening
G Warning!If you see flames or smoke coming from theengine compartment, or if the coolanttemperature indicator indicates that theengine is overheated, do not open the hood.Move away from vehicle and do not openthe hood until the engine has cooled. Ifnecessary, call the fire department.
G Warning!You could be injured when the hood is open– even when the engine is turned off.Parts of the engine can become very hot.To prevent burns, let the engine cool offcompletely before touching anycomponents on the vehicle. Comply with allrelevant safety precautions.
Operation
Z
Engine compartment
242
G Warning!To help prevent personal injury, stay clearof moving parts when the hood is open andthe engine is running.The radiator fan may continue to run forapproximately 30 seconds or may evenrestart after the engine has been turned off.Stay clear of fan blades.
G Warning!Vehicles with gasoline engine:The engine is equipped with a transistorizedignition system. Because of the highvoltage it is dangerous to touch anycomponents (ignition coils, spark plugsockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignitionsystemRwith the engine runningRwhile starting the engineRwhen the ignition is switched on and the
engine is turned manually
G Warning!Vehicles with diesel engine:The engine is equipped with a high-voltageelectronic control unit for the injectionsystem. Because of the high voltage it isdangerous to touch any components of theinjection system (injectors, electricalwires)Rwith the engine runningRwhile starting the engineRwhen the ignition is switched on
1 Hood lock release lever
X Pull release lever 1.The hood is unlocked.
! To avoid damage to the windshield wipersor hood, never open the hood if the wiperarms are folded forward away from thewindshield.
2 Handle
! To avoid damage to the handle never pullup the hood on the handle.
X Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radiatorgrille.
X Pull up on hood.The hood will be automatically held open atshoulder height by gas-filled struts.
Operation
Engine compartment
243
Closing
G Warning!When closing the hood, use extremecaution not to catch hands or fingers. Becareful that you do not close the hood onanyone.Make sure the hood is securely engagedbefore driving off. Do not continue drivingif the hood can no longer engage after anaccident, for example. The hood couldotherwise come loose while the vehicle isin motion and injure you and/or others.
X Let the hood drop from a height ofapproximately 1 ft (30 cm).
X Check to make sure the hood is fullyclosed.If you can raise the hood at a point abovethe headlamps, then it is not properlyclosed. Open it again and let it drop withsomewhat greater force.
Engine oilThe amount of oil your engine needs willdepend on a number of factors, includingdriving style. Increased oil consumption canoccur when the vehicle is new or the vehicleis driven frequently at higher engine speeds.Engine oil consumption checks should onlybe made after the vehicle break-in period.
! Do not use any special lubricant additives,as these may damage the drive assemblies.Using special additives not approved byMercedes-Benz may cause damage notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.For further information contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Notes on checking engine oil levelWhen checking the oil level the vehicle mustbe parked on level ground and the vehiclemust have been stationary for at least5 minutes with the engine turned off.
Checking engine oil levelX Open the hood (Y page 241).
1 Oil dipstick 2 Upper (max) mark3 Lower (min) markX Pull out oil dipstick 1.X Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.X Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick
guide tube.X Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after
approximately 3 seconds to obtainaccurate reading.The oil level is correct when it is betweenlower (min) mark 3 and upper (max) mark2 of oil dipstick 1.
i All models (except E 63 AMG):
Operation
Z
Engine compartment
244
The filling quantity between the upper andlower marks on the oil dipstick isapproximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).E 63 AMG:The filling quantity between the upper andlower marks on the oil dipstick isapproximately 1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).
X If necessary, add engine oil.For more information on engine oil, see“Fuels, coolants, lubricantsetc.” (Y page 394).For information on messages in themultifunction display concerning engine oil,see the “Practical hints” section(Y page 322).
Adding engine oil! Only use approved engine oils and oil
filters required for vehicles withMaintenance System. For a listing ofapproved engine oils and oil filters, contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center orvisit www.mbusa.com (USA only).Using engine oils and oil filters ofspecification other than those expresslyrequired for the Maintenance System, orchanging of oil and oil filter at changeintervals longer than those called for by the
Maintenance System will result in engine oremission control system damage notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.
E 350/E 550 (E 320 BlueTEC similar)1 Filler cap
E 63 AMG1 Filler cap
X Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.X Add engine oil as required. Be careful not
to overfill with oil.Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.Avoid environmental damage caused by oilentering the ground or water.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drainedoff. It could cause damage to the engineand emission control system not coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
X Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.For more information on engine oil, see the“Technical data” section and (Y page 397).
Operation
Engine compartment
245
Transmission fluid levelThe transmission fluid level does not need tobe checked. If you notice transmission fluidloss or gearshifting malfunctions, have anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center check thetransmission.
Coolant levelThe engine coolant is a mixture of water andanticorrosion/antifreeze.When checking the coolant level, the vehiclemust be parked on level ground, and thecoolant temperature must be below 158‡(70†).G Warning!In order to avoid any potentially seriousburns:RUse extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam orcoolant leaking from the cooling system,or if the coolant temperature indicatorindicates that the coolant is overheated.RDo not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is above158‡ (70†). Allow engine to cool downbefore removing cap. The coolant
reservoir contains hot fluid and is underpressure.RUsing a rag, slowly open the cap
approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excesspressure. If opened immediately,scalding hot fluid and steam will be blownout under pressure.RDo not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethyleneglycol which may burn if it comes intocontact with hot engine parts.
1 Marking bar in the expansion tank2 Cap3 Coolant expansion tank
X Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowlyapproximately 1/2 turn counterclockwiseto release any excess pressure.
X Continue turning cap 2 counterclockwiseand remove it.The coolant level is correct if the levelRfor cold coolant: reaches marking bar
1 in coolant expansion tank 3Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higherX Add coolant as required.X Replace and tighten cap 2.For more information on coolant, see the“Technical data” section (Y page 396) and(Y page 400).
Operation
Z
Engine compartment
246
Washer system and headlampcleaning system
G Warning!Washer solvent/antifreeze is highlyflammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because itmay ignite and burn. You could be seriouslyburned.
! Always use washer solvent/antifreezewhere temperatures may fall belowfreezing point. Failure to do so could resultin damage to the washer system/fluidreservoir.
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable forplastic lenses. Improper washer fluid candamage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.
! Do not use distilled or deionized water inthe washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, thewasher fluid level sensor could bedamaged.
1 Cap for washer fluid reservoirFluid for the washer system, the rear windowwasher system (wagon only) and theheadlamp cleaning system is supplied fromthe washer fluid reservoir.During all seasons, add MB WindshieldWasher Concentrate “MB SummerFit” towater. Premix the washer fluid in a suitablecontainer.X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab
of cap 1 upwards.X Refill the washer fluid reservoir with MB
Windshield Washer Concentrate “MBSummerFit” and water (or commerciallyavailable premixed washer solvent/
antifreeze, depending on ambienttemperatures) (Y page 402).
X Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press cap1 onto filler hole until it engages.
For more information, see “Washer systemand headlamp cleaningsystem” (Y page 397).
Operation
Tires and wheels
247
Tires and wheels
Safety notesContact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor information on tested and recommendedrims and tires for summer and winteroperation. They can also offer adviceconcerning tire service and purchase.G Warning!Replace rims or tires with the samedesignation, manufacturer and type asshown on the original part. For furtherinformation contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. If incorrectly sizedrims and tires are mounted, the wheelbrakes or suspension components can bedamaged. Also, the correct operatingclearance of the wheels and the tires mayno longer be correct.
G Warning!Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If thetire tread is worn to minimum tread depth,or if the tires have sustained damage,replace them.When replacing rims, only use genuineMercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified forthe particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly anaccident.Retreaded tires are not tested orrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, sinceprevious damage cannot always berecognized on retreads. The operatingsafety of the vehicle cannot be assuredwhen such tires are used.
G Warning!If you feel a sudden significant vibration orride disturbance, or you suspect thatpossible damage to your vehicle hasoccurred, you should turn on the hazardwarning flashers, carefully slow down, anddrive with caution to an area which is a safedistance from the road.Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbodyfor possible damage. If the vehicle or tiresappear unsafe, have the vehicle towed tothe nearest authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or tire dealer for repairs.
G Warning!Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affectsthe ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Youcould lose control of the vehicle. Continueddriving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessiveheat build-up and possibly a fire.
Important guidelinesROnly use sets of tires and rims of the same
type and make.RTires must be of the correct size for the rim.RBreak in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.RRegularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tireinflation pressure loss and damage to thetire beads.RIf vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as required.RDo not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads aresharply reduced at tread depths of lessthan 1/8 in (3 mm).RWhen replacing individual tires, you should
mount new tires on the front wheels first(on vehicles with same-sized wheels allaround).
Operation
Z
Tires and wheels
248
Tire care and maintenance
G Warning!Regularly check the tires for damage.Damaged tires can cause tire inflationpressure loss. As a result, you could losecontrol of your vehicle.Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If thetire tread is worn to minimum tread depth,or if the tires have sustained damage,replace them.
Check the tire inflation pressure at least everyother week. For more information onchecking tire inflation pressure, see“Recommended tire inflationpressure” (Y page 253).
Tire inspectionEvery time you check the tire inflationpressure, you should also inspect your tiresfor the following:Rexcessive treadwear (Y page 248)Rcord or fabric showing through the tire’s
rubberRbumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the
tread or side of the tire
Replace the tire if you find any of the aboveconditions.Make sure you also inspect the spare tireperiodically for condition and inflation. Sparetires will age and become worn over time evenif never used, and thus should be inspectedand replaced when necessary.
Life of tire
G Warning!Tires and spare tire should be replacedafter 6 years, regardless of the remainingtread.
The service life of a tire is dependent uponvarying factors including but not limited to:RDriving styleRTire inflation pressureRDistance driven
Tread depth
G Warning!Although the applicable federal motorvehicle safety laws consider a tire to beworn when the treadwear indicators (TWI)become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do notallow your tires to wear down to that level.As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm),the adhesion properties on a wet road aresharply reduced.Depending upon the weather and/or roadsurface (conditions), the tire traction varieswidely.
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharplyreduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in(3 mm).Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. These indicators are located in six placeson the tread circumference and becomevisible at a tread depth of approximately1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire isconsidered worn and should be replaced.The recommended minimum tire tread depthfor summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). Therecommended minimum tire tread depth forwinter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm).
Operation
Tires and wheels
249
1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)The treadwear indicator appears as a solidband across the tread.
Storing tires! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.Protect tires from contact with oil, greaseand fuels.
Cleaning tires! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result indamage to the tire.Always replace a damaged tire.
Direction of rotationUnidirectional tires offer added advantages,such as better hydroplaning performance. Tobenefit, however, you must make sure thetires rotate in the direction specified.An arrow on the sidewall indicates theintended direction of rotation (spinning) ofthe tire.Spare wheels may be mounted against thedirection of rotation (spinning) even with aunidirectional tire for temporary use only untilthe regular drive wheel has been repaired orreplaced. Always observe and followapplicable temporary use restrictions andspeed limitations indicated on the sparewheel.
Loading the vehicleTwo labels on your vehicle show how muchweight it may properly carry.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
can be found on the driver’s doorB-pillar. This placard tells you importantinformation about the number of peoplethat can be in the vehicle and the totalweight that can be carried in the vehicle.It also contains information on the propersize and recommended tire inflationpressures for the original equipment tireson your vehicle.
(2) The certification label, also found on thedriver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about thegross weight capacity of your vehicle,called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants, fuel andcargo. The certification label also tellsyou about the front and rear axle weightcapacity, called the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR).The GAWR is the total allowable weightthat can be carried by a single axle (frontor rear). Never exceed the GVWR orGAWR for either the front axle or rearaxle.
Operation
Z
Tires and wheels
250
1 Driver’s door B-pillarFollowing is a discussion on how to work withthe information contained on the Tire andLoading Information placard with regards toloading your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information
G Warning!Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can alsoresult in handling or steering problems, orbrake failure.
Tire and Loading Information placardi Data shown on Tire and Loading
Information placard example are forillustration purposes only. Load limit dataare specific to each vehicle and may varyfrom data shown in the followingillustration. Refer to Tire and LoadingInformation placard on vehicle for actualdata specific to your vehicle.
1 Load limit information on the Tire andLoading Information placard
The Tire and Loading Information placardshowing the load limit information is locatedon the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 250).X Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”
on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.
The combined weight of all occupants,cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (ifapplicable) should never exceed the weightreferenced in that statement.
Seating capacityThe seating capacity gives you importantinformation on the number of occupants thatcan be in the vehicle. Observe front and rearseating capacity. The Tire and LoadingInformation placard showing the seatingcapacity is located on the driver’s doorB-pillar (Y page 250).
i Data shown on Tire and LoadingInformation placard example are forillustration purposes only. Seating capacitydata are specific to each vehicle and mayvary from data shown in the followingillustration. Refer to Tire and LoadingInformation placard on vehicle for actualdata specific to your vehicle.
Operation
Tires and wheels
251
1 Seating capacity information on the Tireand Loading Information placard
Steps for determining correct load limitThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the “National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
X Step 1: Locate the statement “Thecombined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”on your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the “XXX” amountequals 1 400 lbs and there will be five150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs(1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4.
X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle willbe towing a trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle (Y page 253).
The following table shows examples on howto calculate total and cargo load capacitieswith varying seating configurations andnumber and size of occupants. The followingexamples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. Thisis for illustration purposes only. Make sureyou are using the actual load limit for yourvehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire andLoading Information placard (Y page 250).
Operation
Z
Tires and wheels
252
Example Combined weightlimit of occupantsand cargo from Tireand LoadingInformationplacard
Number ofoccupants(driver andpassengers)
Seatingconfiguration
Occupants weight Combinedweight of alloccupants
Available cargo/luggageand trailer tongue weight(total load limit from Tireand Loading Informationplacard minus combinedweight of all occupants)
1 1 500 lbs 5 front: 2rear: 3
Occupant 1: 150 lbsOccupant 2: 180 lbsOccupant 3: 160 lbsOccupant 4: 140 lbsOccupant 5: 120 lbs
750 lbs 1 500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs
2 1 500 lbs 3 front: 1rear: 2
Occupant 1: 200 lbsOccupant 2: 190 lbsOccupant 3: 150 lbs
540 lbs 1 500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs
3 1 500 lbs 1 front: 1 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 150 lbs 1 500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1 350 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, theless cargo and luggage load capacity isavailable.For more information, see “Trailer tongueload” (Y page 253).
Certification labelEven after careful determination of thecombined weight of all occupants, cargo andthe trailer tongue load (if applicable)
(Y page 253) as to not exceed thepermissible load limit, you must make sureyour vehicle never exceeds the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for either the front orrear axle. You can obtain the GVWR andGAWR from the certification label. Thecertification label can be found on the driver’sdoor B-pillar, see the “Technical data” section(Y page 379).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): Thetotal weight of the vehicle, all occupants, allcargo, and the trailer tongue load (ifapplicable) must never exceed the GVWR.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The totalallowable weight that can be carried by asingle axle (front or rear).To assure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible weight limits(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle),
Operation
Tires and wheels
253
have the loaded vehicle (including driver,passengers and all cargo and, if applicable,trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitablecommercial scale.
Trailer tongue loadThe tongue load of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the loadyou can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer istowed, the tongue load must be added to theweight of all occupants riding and any cargoyou are carrying in the vehicle. The tongueload typically is 10% of the trailer weight andeverything loaded in it.Your Mercedes-Benz has been designedprimarily to carry passengers and their cargo.Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailertowing with your vehicle.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
G Warning!Follow recommended tire inflationpressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflatedtires wear excessively and/or unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely to fail frombeing overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tirescan adversely affect handling and ridecomfort, wear unevenly, increase stoppingdistance, and result in sudden deflation(blowout) because they are more likely tobecome punctured or damaged by roaddebris, potholes etc.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can alsoresult in handling or steering problems, orbrake failure.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire andLoading Information placard located on thedriver’s door B-pillar (Y page 249).
The tire inflation pressure should be checkedregularly and should only be adjusted on coldtires. The tires can be considered cold if thevehicle has been parked for at least 3 hoursor driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).Follow recommended cold tire inflationpressures listed on Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver’s doorB-pillar.Keeping the tires properly inflated providesthe best handling, tread life and ridingcomfort.In addition to the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver’s doorB-pillar, also consult the tire inflationpressure label (if available) on the inside ofthe filler flap for any additional informationpertaining to special driving situations. Formore information, see “Important notes ontire inflation pressure” (Y page 254).
i Data shown on Tire and LoadingInformation placard example are forillustration purposes only. Tire data arespecific to each vehicle and may vary fromdata shown in the following illustration.Refer to Tire and Loading Informationplacard on vehicle for actual data specificto your vehicle.
Operation
Z
Tires and wheels
254
1 Tire and Loading Information placard withrecommended cold tire inflationpressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard liststhe recommended cold tire inflationpressures for maximum loaded vehicleweight. The tire inflation pressures listedapply to the tires installed as originalequipment.
Important notes on tire inflationpressure
G Warning!If the tire inflation pressure dropsrepeatedly, check the tires for puncturesfrom foreign objects and/or whether air is
leaking from the valves or from around therim.
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressureare also increased while driving, dependingon the driving speed and the tire load.If you will be driving your vehicle at highspeeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,where it is legal and conditions allow, consultthe tire inflation pressure label on the insideof the fuel filler flap (if available) on how toadjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If youdo not adjust the tire inflation pressure,excessive heat can build up and result insudden tire failure.If your vehicle is not equipped with the tireinflation pressure label on the inside of thefuel filler flap, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for proper tireinflation pressure.
i Driving comfort may be reduced when thetire inflation pressure is adjusted to thevalue for speeds above 100 mph(160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflationpressure label located on the inside of thefuel filler flap.
Make sure to readjust the tire inflationpressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold beforeadjusting the tire inflation pressure.Some vehicles may have supplemental tireinflation pressure information for vehicleloads less than the maximum loaded vehiclecondition. If such information is provided, itcan be found on the tire inflation pressurelabel located on the inside of the fuel fillerflap.Tire inflation pressure changes byapproximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18‡(10†) of air temperature change. Keep thisin mind when checking tire inflation pressurewhere the temperature is different from theoutside temperature.
Potential problems associated withunderinflated and overinflated tires
Underinflated tiresG Warning!Follow recommended tire inflationpressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflatedtires wear excessively and/or unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely to fail frombeing overheated.
Operation
Tires and wheels
255
Underinflated tires canRcause excessive and uneven tire wearRadversely affect fuel economyRlead to tire failure from being overheatedRadversely affect handling characteristics
Overinflated tiresG Warning!Follow recommended tire inflationpressures.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tirescan adversely affect handling and ridecomfort, wear unevenly, increase stoppingdistance, and result in sudden deflation(blowout) because they are more likely tobecome punctured or damaged by roaddebris, potholes etc.
Overinflated tires canRadversely affect handling characteristicsRcause uneven tire wearRbe more prone to damage from road
hazardsRadversely affect ride comfortRincrease stopping distance
Checking tire inflation pressure
Safety notes
G Warning!Follow recommended tire inflationpressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflatedtires wear excessively and/or unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely to fail frombeing overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tirescan adversely affect handling and ridecomfort, wear unevenly, increase stoppingdistance, and result in sudden deflation(blowout) because they are more likely tobecome punctured or damaged by roaddebris, potholes etc.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can alsoresult in handling or steering problems, orbrake failure.
Check the tire inflation pressure at least everyother week.
Check and adjust the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. The tires can beconsidered cold if the vehicle has beenparked for at least 3 hours or driven less than1 mile (1.6 km).If you check the tire inflation pressure whenthe tires are warm (the vehicle has beendriven for several miles or sitting less than3 hours), the reading will be approximately4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than the cold reading.This is normal. Do not let air out to match thespecified cold tire inflation pressure.Otherwise, the tire will be underinflated.
Checking tire inflation pressuremanuallyFollow the steps below to achieve correct tireinflation pressure:X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.X Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.X Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
gauge and check against therecommended tire inflation pressure on theTire and Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar (Y page 250). Ifnecessary, add air to achieve therecommended tire inflation pressure.
X If you have overfilled the tire, release tireinflation pressure by pushing the metal
Operation
Z
Tires and wheels
256
stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen.Then recheck the tire inflation pressurewith the tire gauge.
X Install the valve cap.X Repeat this procedure for each tire.
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only)While the vehicle is being driven, the Run FlatIndicator monitors the set tire inflationpressures by evaluating each wheel’srotational speed. This allows the system todetect a significant loss of pressure in a tire.If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due tofalling tire inflation pressure, you will see acorresponding warning message in themultifunction display.The Run Flat Indicator may function in arestricted manner or with a delayRwhen snow chains are mounted to the
vehicleRin the presence of ice and snowRwhen you are driving on a loose surface
(e.g. sand or gravel)Rwhen you are driving in a very sporty
manner (involving rapid acceleration orhigh speeds in curves)
G Warning!When the multifunction display shows themessage Tire Pressure Check Tires,one or more of your tires are significantlyunderinflated. You should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper tire inflation pressure asindicated on the vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, on thetire inflation pressure label.Driving on a significantly underinflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and may affectthe vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.Each tire, including the spare, should bechecked every other week when cold andset to the recommended tire inflationpressure as specified on the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver’sdoor B-pillar or, if available, on the tireinflation pressure label located on theinside of the fuel filler flap.
i The recommended tire inflation pressuresfor your vehicle can be found on the Tireand Loading Information placard locatedon the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 250)or, if available, on the tire inflation pressure
label on the on the inside of the fuel fillerflap. The tire inflation pressures are notlisted in the Operator’s Manual.
G Warning!The Run Flat Indicator does not provide awarning for wrongly selected tire inflationpressures. Always adjust tire inflationpressure according to the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver’s doorB-pillar or, if available, on the tire inflationpressure label located on the inside of thefuel filler flap.The Run Flat Indicator does not replaceregular checks of the tire inflationpressures since a gradual pressure loss inmore than one tire cannot be detected bythe Run Flat Indicator.The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue awarning due to a sudden dramatic loss oftire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowoutcaused by a foreign object). In this casebring the vehicle to a halt by carefullyapplying the brakes and avoiding abruptsteering maneuvers.
Operation
Tires and wheels
257
Restarting the Run Flat IndicatorThe Run Flat Indicator must be restarted inthe following situations:Rafter you have changed the tire inflation
pressureRafter you have replaced the wheels or tiresRafter you have installed new wheels or tiresX Using the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, ifavailable, the tire inflation pressure label onthe inside of the fuel filler flap, make surethe tire inflation pressure of all four tires iscorrect.
G Warning!The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you ina reliable manner if you have set the correcttire inflation pressures for each tire.If an incorrect tire inflation pressure wasset, the system will monitor the pressureaccording to the incorrect value.
X Switch on the ignition.X Make sure the standard display appears in
the multifunction display (Y page 143).X Press button k or j on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the following message appears in themultifunction display:Run Flat IndicatorActiveMenu: R-Button
X Press the reset button (Y page 138).The following message will appear in themultifunction display:RestartRun Flat Indicator?
X If you wish to confirm: Press buttonæ.The following message will appear in themultifunction display:Run Flat IndicatorRestartedAfter a certain “learning phase”, the RunFlat Indicator checks the set pressurevalues for all four tires.
X If you wish to cancel: Press buttonç.
Tire Pressure Monitoring SystemsYour vehicle may be equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS, USAonly) or the Advanced Tire PressureMonitoring System (Advanced TPMS, Canadaonly). Both systems measure the tire inflation
pressure in the vehicle’s tires and issuewarnings in case of pressure loss.To determine which system your vehicle isequipped with, do the following:X Switch on the ignition.X Press button è or ÿ on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedlyuntil the standard display appears in themultifunction display (Y page 143).
X Press button j or k repeatedly.In vehicles with TPMS, the followingmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay:Tire Pressure MonitorActiveMenu: R-Button
In vehicles with Advanced TPMS, the currenttire inflation pressure for each tire appears inthe multifunction display after a few minutesof driving.
Display in vehicles with Advanced TPMS
Operation
Z
Tires and wheels
258
The TPMS is equipped with a combination lowtire pressure/ TPMS malfunction telltale(USA) or a low tire pressure telltale (Canada)in the instrument cluster. Depending on howthe telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tirepressure condition or a malfunction in theTPMS system itself:RIf the telltale illuminates continuously, one
or more of your tires is significantlyunderinflated. There is no malfunction inthe TPMS.RUSA only: If the telltale flashes for 60
seconds and then stays illuminated, theTPMS system itself is not operatingproperly.
The TPMS only functions on wheels that areequipped with the proper electronic sensors.It monitors the tire inflation pressure, asselected by the driver, in all four tires. Awarning is issued to alert you to a decreasein pressure in one or more of the tires.G Warning!The TPMS does not indicate a warning forwrongly selected inflation pressures.Always adjust tire inflation pressureaccording to the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, on thesupplemental tire inflation pressure
information on the inside of the fuel fillerflap.The TPMS is not able to issue a warning dueto a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g.tire blowout caused by a foreign object). Inthis case bring the vehicle to a halt bycarefully applying the brakes and avoidingabrupt steering maneuvers.
G Warning!Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked every other week whencold and inflated to the inflation pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available,the tire inflation pressure label on the insideof the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tiresof a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or the tire inflationpressure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires are significantlyunderinflated. Accordingly, when the lowtire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantlyunderinflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance, andit is the driver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressure, even if underinflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately 1 minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequencewill continue upon subsequent vehiclestart-ups as long as the malfunction exists.When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to
Operation
Tires and wheels
259
detect or signal low tire pressure asintended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacingone or more tires or wheels on your vehicleto ensure that the replacement or alternatetires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.
i USA only:If a condition causing the TPMS tomalfunction develops, it may take up to10 minutes for the system to signal amalfunction using the TPMS telltaleflashing and illumination sequence.The telltale extinguishes after a fewminutes driving if the malfunction has beencorrected.
i Operating radio transmission equipment(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) inor near the vehicle could cause the TPMSto malfunction.
i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and2. this device must accept any
interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired.
Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.
i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,
and2. this device must accept any
interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.
Advanced TPMS featuresTire pressure inquiries are made using themultifunction display. The current tireinflation pressure for each tire appears in themultifunction display after a few minutes ofdriving.
i Possible differences between thereadings of a tire pressure gauge of an airhose, e.g. gas station equipment, and thevehicle’s control system can occur. The tirepressure displayed by the control systemapply to sea level. In high-altitudelocations, the reading on a tire pressuregauge will be higher than the reading issuedby the vehicle’s control system. Do notreduce the tire inflation pressure undersuch circumstances.
X Switch on the ignition.X Press button è or ÿ on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedlyuntil the standard display appears in themultifunction display (Y page 143).
X Press button j or k until the currentinflation pressures for each tire appear inthe multifunction display.
Operation
Z
Tires and wheels
260
When the vehicle has been parked for longerthan 20 minutes, the message Tirepressure displayed after driving fora few minutes. appears in themultifunction display.
i With a spare wheel mounted, the systemmay still indicate the tire inflation pressureof the removed road wheel for someminutes. If this happens, keep in mind thatthe indicated value where the spare wheelis mounted does not reflect the actualspare tire inflation pressure.
Tire inflation pressure warningsIf the system detects a significant loss of tireinflation pressure in one or more than onetire, a message appears in the multifunctiondisplay. In addition, an acoustic warningsounds and the low tire pressure telltale in theinstrument cluster comes on.
Vehicles with TPMS
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS: Therespective tire is indicated by a red rectangle.
Restarting TPMSG Warning!It is the driver’s responsibility to set the tireinflation pressure to the recommendedcold tire inflation pressure. Underinflatedtires affect the ability to steer or brake thevehicle. You might lose control over thevehicle.
When you restart the TPMS, the system setsnew reference values for each tire.The TPMS must be restarted when you haveadjusted the tire inflation pressure to a newlevel (e.g. because of different load or drivingconditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated tothe current tire inflation pressures.
i Vehicles with Advanced TPMS only:The TPMS usually recognizes tire pressureadjustments and sets new reference valuesautomatically. You can, however, restartthe TPMS manually as described.
Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tireinflation pressure to the inflation pressurerecommended for the vehicle operatingcondition. Tire pressure should only beadjusted on cold tires. Observe therecommended tire inflation pressure on theTire and Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may havesupplemental tire pressure information fordriving at high speeds or for vehicle loads lessthan the maximum loaded vehicle condition.If such information is provided, it can befound on the inside of the fuel filler flap.X Using the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar(Y page 250) or, if available, the
Operation
Tires and wheels
261
supplemental tire inflation pressureinformation on the inside of the fuel fillerflap, make sure the tire inflation pressureof all four tires is correct.
X Switch on the ignition.X Press button è or ÿ on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedlyuntil the standard display appears in themultifunction display (Y page 143).
X Press button j or k repeatedly untilthe current inflation pressure for each tire(Advanced TPMS) or the following message(TPMS) appears in the display :Tire Pressure MonitorActiveMenu: R-Button
i Vehicles with Advanced TPMS: The Tirepressure displayed after drivingfor a few minutes. may appear beforethe tire inflation pressures are displayed.
X Press the reset button (Y page 138).The following message will appear in themultifunction display:Restart tirepressure monitor?
X If you wish to confirm: Press buttonæ.The following message will appear in themultifunction display:Tire Pressure MonitorRestartedAfter driving a few minutes the systemverifies that the current tire inflationpressures are within the system’s specifiedrange. Afterwards the current tire inflationpressures are accepted as reference valuesand then monitored.
X If you wish to cancel: Press buttonç.
i Vehicles with Advanced TPMS:When the wheel positions have beenchanged, the air pressure of a tire may bedisplayed for the wrong positiontemporarily. After driving for a few minutes,the air pressure will be shown for thecorrect position.
Tire labelingBesides tire name (sales designation) andmanufacturer name, a number of markingscan be found on a tire.Following are some explanations for themarkings on your vehicle’s tires:
1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards(Y page 267)
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 265)
3 Maximum tire load (Y page 266)4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
(Y page 266)
Operation
Z
Tires and wheels
262
5 Manufacturer6 Tire ply material (Y page 268)7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (Y page 262)8 Load identification (Y page 264)9 Tire name
i For illustration purposes only. Actual dataon tires are specific to each vehicle andmay vary from data shown in aboveillustration.For more information, see “Rims andtires” (Y page 384).
Tire size designation, load and speedrating
1 Tire width2 Aspect ratio in %
3 Radial tire code4 Rim diameter5 Tire load rating6 Tire speed rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual dataon tires are specific to each vehicle andmay vary from data shown in aboveillustration.
General: Depending on the design standardsused, the tire size molded into the sidewallmay have no letter or a letter preceding thetire size designation.No letter preceding the size designation (asillustrated above): Passenger car tire basedon European design standards.Letter “P” preceding the size designation:Passenger car tire based on U.S. designstandards.Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:Light Truck tire based on U.S. designstandards.Letter “T” preceding the size designation:Temporary spare tires which are highpressure compact spares designed fortemporary emergency use only.
Tire widthTire width 1 indicates the nominal tire widthin millimeters.
Aspect ratioAspect ratio 2 is the dimensionalrelationship between tire section height andsection width and is expressed in percentage.The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividingsection height by section width.
Tire codeTire code 3 indicates the tire constructiontype. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter“D” means diagonal or bias ply construction;letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tirewith a speed capability above 149 mph(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the sizedesignation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). Foradditional information, see “Tire speedrating” (Y page 263).
Rim diameterRim diameter 4 is the diameter of the beadseat, not the diameter of the rim edge. Therim diameter is indicated in inches (in).
Operation
Tires and wheels
263
Tire load ratingG Warning!The tire load rating must always be at leasthalf of the GAWR of your vehicle.Otherwise, tire failure may be the resultwhich may cause an accident and/orserious injury to you or others.Always replace rims and tires with the samedesignation, manufacturer and type asshown on the original part.
G Warning!Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can alsoresult in handling or steering problems, orbrake failure.
Tire load rating 5 is a numerical codeassociated with the maximum load a tire cansupport.For example, a load rating of 91 correspondsto a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) thetire is designed to support. See also“Maximum tire load” (Y page 266) where the
maximum load associated with the load indexis indicated in kilograms and lbs.For additional information on tire load rating,see “Load identification” (Y page 264).
Tire speed ratingG Warning!Even when permitted by law, never operatea vehicle at speeds greater than themaximum speed rating of the tires.Exceeding the maximum speed for whichtires are rated can lead to sudden tirefailure, causing loss of vehicle control andpossibly resulting in an accident and/orserious personal injury and possible death,for you and for others.
Regardless of the tire speed rating, localspeed limits should be obeyed. Use prudentdriving speeds appropriate to prevailingconditions.Tire speed rating 6 indicates the approvedmaximum speed for the tire.Summer tires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
Index Speed rating
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
RAt the tire manufacturer’s option, any tirewith a speed capability above 149 mph(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the sizedesignation (for example: 245/40 ZR18).To determine the maximum speedcapability of the tire, the servicedescription for the tire must be referred to.The service description is comprised of tireload rating 5 and tire speed rating 6.If your tire includes “ZR” in the sizedesignation and no service description isgiven, the tire manufacturer must be
Operation
Z
Tires and wheels
264
consulted for the maximum speedcapability.If a service description is given, the speedcapability is limited by the speed symbol inthe service description. Example:245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y”is the service description. The letter “Y”designates the speed rating and the speedcapability of the tire is limited to 186 mph(300 km/h).RAny tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR”in the size designation AND the servicedescription must be placed in parenthesis.Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)”speed rating in parenthesis designates themaximum speed capability of the tire asbeing above 186 mph (300 km/h). Consultthe tire manufacturer for the actualmaximum permissible speed of the tire.
All-season and winter tires
Index Speed rating
Q M+S15 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S15 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Index Speed rating
H M+S15 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S15 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i Not all M+S rated tires provide specialwinter performance. Make sure the tiresyou use show M+S and the mountain/snowflake.marking on the tiresidewall. These tires meet specific snowtraction performance requirements of theRubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)and the Rubber Association of Canada(RAC) and have been designed specificallyfor use in snow conditions.
An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding a speed of:RAll models except E 63 AMG:
130 mph (210 km/h)RE 63 AMG:
155 mph (250 km/h)RE 63 AMG with increased top speed
E 63 AMG (Performance Package):186 mph (300 km/h)
The factory equipped tires on your vehiclemay have a tire speed rating above the
maximum speed permitted by the electronicspeed limiter.Make sure your tires have the required tirespeed rating as specified for your vehicle inthe “Technical data” section (Y page 384),for example when purchasing new tires.If you are uncertain about the correct readingof the information given on a tire’s sidewall,any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will beglad to assist you.
Load identification
1 Load identification
i For illustration purposes only. Actual dataon tires are specific to each vehicle and
15 or M+S.for winter tires
Operation
Tires and wheels
265
may vary from data shown in aboveillustration.
In addition to tire load rating, special loadidentification 1 may be molded into the tiresidewall following the letter designating thetire speed rating 6 (Y page 262).RNo specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates astandard load (SL) tire.RXL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.RLight Load: designates a light load tire.RC, D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry ata specified pressure.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations require each new tiremanufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TINinto or onto a sidewall of each tire produced.The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitatesefforts by tire manufactures to notifypurchasers in recall situations or other safetymatters concerning tires and givespurchasers the means to easily identify suchtires.The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’sidentification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire typecode” and “Date of manufacture”.
1 DOT2 Manufacturer’s identification mark3 Tire size
4 Tire type code (at the option of the tiremanufacturer)
5 Date of manufacture
i For illustration purposes only. Actual dataon tires are specific to each vehicle andmay vary from data shown in aboveillustration.
DOT (Department of Transportation)Tire branding symbol 1 denotes that the tiremeets requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.
Manufacturer’s identification markManufacturer’s identification mark 2denotes the tire manufacturer.New tires have a mark with two symbols.Retreaded tires have a mark with foursymbols. For more information on retreadedtires, see (Y page 247).
Tire sizeCode 3 indicates the tire size.
Operation
Z
Tires and wheels
266
Tire type codeTire type code 4 may, at the option of themanufacturer, be used as a descriptive codefor identifying significant characteristics ofthe tire.
Date of manufactureThe date of manufacture 5 identifies theweek and year of manufacture.The first two figures identify the week,starting with “01” to represent the first fullweek of the calendar year. The second twofigures represent the year.For example, “3202” represents the 32ndweek of 2002.
Maximum tire load
G Warning!Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can alsoresult in handling or steering problems, orbrake failure.
1 Maximum tire load rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual dataon tires are specific to each vehicle andmay vary from data shown in aboveillustration.
The maximum tire load is the maximumweight the tires are designed to support.For more information on tire load rating, see(Y page 263).For information on calculating total and cargoload capacities, see (Y page 251).
Maximum tire inflation pressure
G Warning!Never exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure. Follow recommended tireinflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflatedtires wear excessively and/or unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely to fail frombeing overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tirescan adversely affect handling and ridecomfort, wear unevenly, increase stoppingdistance, and result in sudden deflation(blowout) because they are more likely tobecome punctured or damaged by roaddebris, potholes etc.
Operation
Tires and wheels
267
1 Maximum permissible tire inflationpressure
i For illustration purposes only. Actual dataon tires are specific to each vehicle andmay vary from data shown in aboveillustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire inflationpressure for the tire.Always follow the recommended tire inflationpressure (Y page 253) for proper tireinflation.
Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S.Government requirement designed to givedrivers consistent and reliable informationregarding tire performance. Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors:treadwear, traction, and temperatureresistance. Although not a Government ofCanada requirement, all tires made for sale inNorth America have these grades branded onthe sidewall.
1 Treadwear2 Traction3 Temperature resistance
i For illustration purposes only. Actual dataon tires are specific to each vehicle andmay vary from data shown in aboveillustration.
Quality grades can be found, whereapplicable, on the tire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum section width. Forexample:
Treadwear Traction Temperature
200 AA A
All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition tothese grades.
TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. Government test course. For example, atire graded 150 would wear one and one-half(1 1/2) times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits,
Operation
Z
Tires and wheels
268
service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.
Traction
G Warning!The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.G Warning!If ice has formed on the road, tire tractionwill be substantially reduced. Under suchweather conditions, drive, steer and brakewith extreme caution.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on a dry road.You should pay particular attention to thecondition of the road whenever the outsidetemperature is close to the freezing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires(Y page 272) with a minimum tread depth ofapproximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheelsfor the winter season to ensure normalbalanced handling characteristics. Onpacked snow, they can reduce your stoppingdistance compared to summer tires.Stopping distance, however, is stillconsiderably greater than when the road isnot covered with snow or ice. Exerciseappropriate caution.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This maycause serious damage to the drivetrainwhich is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.
Temperature
G Warning!The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Excessivespeed, underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination, cancause excessive heat build-up and possibletire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.
Tire ply material
1 Plies in sidewall2 Plies under tread
Operation
Tires and wheels
269
i For illustration purposes only. Actual dataon tires are specific to each vehicle andmay vary from data shown in aboveillustration.
This marking tells you about the type of cordand number of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weightThe combined weight (in excess of thosestandard items which may be replaced) ofautomatic transmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows, power seats,radio, and heater, to the extent that theseitems are available as factory-installedequipment (whether installed or not).
Air pressureThe amount of air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch of the tire. Airpressure is expressed in pounds per squareinch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or bar.
Aspect ratioDimensional relationship between tiresection height and section width expressedin percentage.
BarAnother metric unit for air pressure. There are14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
BeadThe tire bead contains steel wires wrapped bysteel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Cold tire inflation pressureTire inflation pressure when your vehicle hasbeen sitting for at least 3 hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Curb weightThe weight of a motor vehicle with standardequipment including the maximum capacityof fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped,air conditioning and additional optionalequipment, but without passengers andcargo.
DOT (Department of Transportation)A tire branding symbol which denotes the tiremeets requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum permissible axleweight. The gross vehicle weight on each axlemust never exceed the GAWR for the frontand rear axle indicated on the certificationlabel located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicleincluding fuel, tools, spare wheel, installedaccessories, passengers and cargo and, ifapplicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW mustnever exceed the GVWR indicated on thecertification label located on the driver’s doorB-pillar.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)This is the maximum permissible vehicleweight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight ofthe vehicle including all options, passengers,fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer
Operation
Z
Tires and wheels
270
tongue load). It is indicated on certificationlabel located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Kilopascal (kPa)The metric unit for air pressure. There are6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for airpressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals(kPa) to 1 bar.
Maximum load ratingThe maximum load in kilograms and poundsthat can be carried by the tire.
Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe sum of curb weight, accessory weight,total load limit, and production optionsweight.
Maximum permissible tire inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should ever be put in the tire.
Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants the vehicle isdesigned to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lb).
Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.
Production options weightThe combined weight of those installedregular production options weighing over5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of thosestandard items which they replace, notpreviously considered in curb weight oraccessory weight, including heavy dutybrakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy dutybattery, and special trim.
PSI (Pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for air pressure.
Recommended tire inflation pressureThe recommended tire inflation pressure fornormal driving conditions is listed on the Tireand Loading Information placard located onthe driver’s door B-pillar and provides best
handling, tread life and riding comfort. If soequipped, supplemental informationpertaining to special driving situations can befound on the tire inflation pressure label onthe inside of the fuel filler flap.
RimA metal support for a tire or a tire and tubeassembly upon which the tire beads areseated.
SidewallThe portion of a tire between the tread andthe bead.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)Unique identifier which facilitates efforts bytire manufacturers to notify purchasers inrecall situations or other safety mattersconcerning tires and gives purchasers themeans to easily identify such tires. The TIN iscomprised of “Manufacturer’s identificationmark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Dateof manufacture”.
Operation
Tires and wheels
271
Tire load ratingNumerical code associated with themaximum load a tire can support.
Tire ply composition and material usedThis indicates the number of plies or thenumber of layers of rubber-coated fabric inthe tire tread and sidewall. Tiremanufacturers also must indicate the plymaterials in the tire and sidewall, whichinclude steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
Tire speed ratingPart of tire designation; indicates the speedrange for which a tire is approved.
Total load limitRated cargo and luggage load plus68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’sdesignated seating capacity.
TractionForce exerted by the vehicle on the road viathe tires. The amount of grip provided.
TreadThe portion of a tire that comes into contactwith the road.
Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars”that show across the tread of a tire when only1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA tire information system that providesconsumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,temperature and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle maximum load on the tireLoad on an individual tire that is determinedby distributing to each axle its share of themaximum loaded vehicle weight and dividingit by two.
Rotating tires
G Warning!Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tiresare of the same dimension.If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-sizetires (different tire dimensions front vs.rear), tire rotation is not possible.
G Warning!Have the tightening torque checked afterchanging a wheel. Wheels could becomeloose if not tightened with a torque of96 lb-ft (130 Nm).Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheelbolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicleswith tires of the same dimension all around.If your vehicle is equipped with tires of thesame dimension all around, tires can berotated, observing a front-to-rear rotationpattern that will maintain the intendedrotation (spinning) direction of the tire(Y page 249).In some cases, such as when your vehicle isequipped with mixed-size tires (different tiredimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is notpossible.
Operation
Z
Winter driving
272
If applicable to your vehicle’s tireconfiguration, tires can be rotated accordingto the tire manufacturer’s recommendedintervals in the tire manufacturer’s warrantypamphlet located in your vehicle literatureportfolio. If none is available, tires should berotated every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, accordingto the degree of tire wear. The same rotation(spinning) direction must be maintained.Rotate tires before the characteristic tirewear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wearon front tires and tread center wear on reartires).Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheelsand brake disks, i.e. the inner side of thewheels/tires, during each rotation. Check forand ensure proper tire inflation pressure.For information on wheel change, see “Flattire” (Y page 355).
Winter driving
General informationHave your vehicle winterized at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
Winter tires
G Warning!Winter tires with a tread depth of less than1/6 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They areno longer suitable for winter operation.
G Warning!If you use your spare wheel when wintertires are fitted on the other wheels, beaware that the difference in tirecharacteristics may very well impair turningstability and that overall driving stabilitymay be reduced. Adapt your driving styleaccordingly.Have the spare wheel replaced by regularroad wheel with a winter tire at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Always use winter tires at temperaturesbelow 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry roadconditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tiresprovide special winter performance. Make
sure the tires you use show the mountain/snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall.These tires meet specific snow tractionperformance requirements of the RubberManufacturers Association (RMA) and theRubber Association of Canada (RAC) andhave been designed specifically for use insnow conditions. Use of winter tires is theonly way to achieve the maximumeffectiveness of your vehicle’s driving safetysystems such as the ABS and the ESP® inwinter operation.For safe handling, make sure all mountedwinter tires are of the same make and havethe same tread design.For information on winter tires for yourvehicle model, see the “Technical data”section (Y page 384).Always observe the speed rating of the wintertires installed on your vehicle. If the maximumspeed for which your tires are rated is belowthe speed rating of your vehicle, you mustplace a notice to this effect where it will beseen by the driver. Such notices are availableat your tire dealer or any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
Operation
Winter driving
273
Snow chains! When driving with snow chains, always
select the raised level of the vehicle levelcontrol. Other settings may result indamage to your vehicle.
! Some tire sizes do not leave adequateclearance for snow chains. To help avoidserious damage to your vehicle or tires,make sure the use of snow chains ispermissible as specified in the “Technicaldata” section of this Operator’s Manual.
Snow chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soonas possible when driving on roads withoutsnow.Observe the following guidelines when usingsnow chains:RUse of snow chains is not permissible with
all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 384).RUse snow chains in pairs and on rear
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’smounting instructions.
! If snow chains are mounted to the frontwheels, they may scrape against the body
or axle components. The tires or the vehiclecould be damaged as a result.ROnly use snow chains that are approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise you onthis subject.RUse of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check localand state laws before installing snowchains.RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel.
i When driving with snow chains, you maywish to switch off the ESP® (Y page 72)before setting the vehicle in motion. Thiswill improve the vehicle’s traction.
Winter driving instructions
G Warning!If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, makesure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipeand from around the vehicle with the enginerunning. Otherwise, deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicleinterior resulting in unconsciousness anddeath.To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,open a window slightly on the side of thevehicle not facing the wind.
G Warning!The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for thatpurpose.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that theroad surface is free of ice. The road may stillbe icy, especially in wooded areas or onbridges.
G Warning!On slippery road surfaces, never downshiftin order to obtain braking action. This couldresult in drive wheel slip and reduced
Operation
Z
Driving instructions
274
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will notprevent this type of loss of control.
The most important rule for slippery or icyroads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abruptacceleration, braking and steeringmaneuvers. Do not use the cruise controlsystem under such conditions.When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shiftthe automatic transmission to neutralposition N. Try to keep the vehicle undercontrol by corrective steering action.
i For information on driving with snowchains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 273).
Road salts and chemicals can adverselyaffect braking efficiency. Increased pedalforce may become necessary to produce thenormal brake effect.Depressing the brake pedal periodically whentraveling at length on salt-strewn roads canbring road-salt-impaired braking efficiencyback to normal.If the vehicle is parked after being driven onsalt-treated roads, the braking efficiencyshould be tested as soon as possible afterdriving is resumed.
G Warning!Make sure not to endanger any other roadusers when carrying out these brakingmaneuvers.
Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuelTo save fuel you should:RKeep tires at the recommended inflation
pressures.RRemove unnecessary loads.RRemove roof rack when not in use.RAllow engine to warm up under low load
use.RAvoid frequent acceleration and
deceleration.RHave all maintenance work performed at
the intervals specified in the MaintenanceBooklet and as required by theMaintenance system. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by drivingin cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, onshort trips and in mountainous areas.
Operation
Driving instructions
275
Drinking and driving
G Warning!Drinking and driving and/or taking drugsand driving are very dangerouscombinations. Even a small amount ofalcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes,perceptions and judgment.The possibility of a serious or even fatalaccident are greatly increased when youdrink or take drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking ortaking drugs.
Pedals
G Warning!Make sure absolutely no objects areobstructing the pedals’ range of movement.Keep the driver’s footwell clear of allobstacles. If there are any floormats orcarpets in the footwell, make sure that thepedals still have sufficient clearance.During sudden driving or brakingmaneuvers, the objects could get caughtbetween the pedals. You could then no
longer brake or accelerate. This could leadto accidents and injury.
Power assistance
G Warning!There is no power assistance for thesteering and the service brake when theengine is not running.Steering and braking requires significantlymore effort and you could lose control ofthe vehicle and cause an accident as aresult.Do not turn off the engine while the vehicleis in motion.
Brakes
Downhill grades! When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes byshifting into a lower gear to use theengine’s braking power. This helps preventoverheating of the brakes and reduceswear.When using the engine’s braking power, adrive wheel may not spin for an extendedperiod of time, e.g. on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damageto the drivetrain which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Continuous or hard braking
G Warning!Resting your foot on the brake pedal willcause excessive and premature wear of thebrake pads.It can also result in the brakes overheating,thereby significantly reducing theireffectiveness. It may not be possible tostop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoidan accident.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive onfor some time, rather than immediately park,so that the air stream will cool down thebrakes faster.
Wet roads
G Warning!After driving in heavy rain for some timewithout applying the brakes or throughwater deep enough to wet brakecomponents, the first braking action maybe somewhat reduced and increased pedalpressure may be necessary to obtain
Operation
Z
Driving instructions
276
expected brake effect. Maintain a safedistance from vehicles in front.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion afterdriving on wet or salt-covered roads, it isadvisable to brake the vehicle withconsiderable force prior to parking. The heatgenerated serves to dry the brakes.
Salt-covered roads
G Warning!A layer of salt on the brake discs and thebrake linings may cause a delay in thebraking effect, resulting in a significantlyincreased braking distance, which couldlead to an accident.To avoid this danger, you should:Roccasionally brake carefully when you
are driving on salt-covered roads, so thatany layer of salt that may have built upon the brake discs and the brake liningsis removed without putting other roadusers at riskRmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead and drive with particular careRcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a
trip and immediately after commencing a
new trip, so that salt residues areremoved from the brake disc
Brake service! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
be too low if the brake warning lamp in theinstrument cluster comes on and anacoustic warning sounds although theparking brake is released. Observeadditional messages in the multifunctiondisplay that may appear.Brake pad wear or a leak in the system maybe the reason for low brake fluid in thereservoir.Have the brake system inspectedimmediately. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
All checks and service work on the brakesystem should be carried out by qualifiedtechnicians only. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Only install brake pads and use brake fluidrecommended by Mercedes-Benz.G Warning!If other than recommended brake pads areinstalled, or other than recommendedbrake fluid is used, the braking properties
of the vehicle can be degraded to an extentthat safe braking is substantially impaired.This could result in an accident.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC:Only conduct operational or performancetests on a two-axle dynamometer. If suchtests are necessary, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. You couldotherwise seriously damage the brakesystem or the transfer case which is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC:Because the ESP® operates automatically,the engine and ignition must be shut off(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button inposition 0 or 1) when the parking brake isbeing tested on a brake test dynamometer.Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brakesystem which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Vehicles without 4MATIC:Because the ESP® operates automatically,the engine and ignition must be shut off
Operation
Driving instructions
277
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button inposition 0 or 1) when the parking brake isbeing tested on a brake test dynamometeror the vehicle is being towed with the frontaxle raised.Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brakesystem which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
If your brake system is normally onlysubjected to moderate loads, you shouldoccasionally test the effectiveness of thebrakes by applying above-normal brakingpressure at higher speeds. This will alsoenhance the grip of the brake pads.G Warning!Make sure not to endanger any other roadusers when carrying out these brakingmaneuvers.
Refer to the description of the Brake AssistSystem (BAS) (Y page 72).
High-performance brake systemThe high-performance brake system is onlyavailable on E 63 AMG.
G Warning!New vehicle brake pads and discs, andreplacement brake pads and discs maytake several hundred miles of driving untilthey provide optimum braking efficiency.Until that time, you may need to useincreased brake pedal pressure whilebraking. Please be aware of this and adjustyour driving and braking accordingly duringthis break-in period.Excessive high-demand braking will causecorrespondingly high brake wear. Please beattentive to the brake warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and brake conditionmessages in the multifunction display.Especially for high performance driving, itis important to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.
The high-performance brake system isdesigned to operate under the extremely highoperating demands required toaccommodate the performance capabilitiesof the vehicle.
The brakes may produce a squeaking-typenoise depending on theRvehicle speedRbrake force appliedRambient conditions, e.g. temperature and
humidityAs with any brake system, the wear ofindividual brake system components such asbrake pads or disks strongly depends on yourdriving style and the conditions under whichyou operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving stylecalling for high-demand braking will causeyour vehicle’s brakes to wear more quickly.
Driving offWarm up the engine smoothly. Do not placefull load on the engine until the operatingtemperature has been reached.
! When driving off on a slippery surface, donot allow a drive wheel to spin for anextended period with the ESP® switchedoff. Doing so may cause serious damage tothe drivetrain which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Simultaneously depressing theaccelerator pedal and applying the brakes
Operation
Z
Driving instructions
278
reduces engine performance and causespremature brake and drivetrain wear whichis not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.
HydroplaningDepending on the depth of the water layer onthe road, hydroplaning may occur, even at lowspeeds and with new tires. In heavy rain orwhen conditions indicate possiblehydroplaning:X Reduce vehicle speed.X Avoid track grooves in the road.X Apply brakes cautiously.
Standing water! Do not drive through flooded areas.
Before driving through water, determine itsdepth.If you must drive through standing water,drive slowly to prevent water from enteringthe passenger compartment or the enginecompartment. Water in these areas couldcause damage to electrical components orwiring of the engine or transmission, orcould result in water being ingested by theengine through the air intake causingsevere internal engine damage. Any suchdamage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Driving abroadIf you plan to drive the vehicle outside the U.S.or Canada, you should request dealernetwork information for your destination fromany authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Control and operation of radiotransmitter
Safety notes
G Warning!Please do not forget that your primaryresponsibility is to drive the vehicle. Adriver’s attention to the road must alwaysbe his/her primary focus when driving. Foryour safety and the safety of others, werecommend that you pull over to a safelocation and stop before placing or takinga telephone call.If you choose to use the telephone16 whiledriving, please use the hands-free deviceand only use the telephone when road,weather and traffic conditions permit.Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a mobile telephone while driving avehicle.
16 Observe all legal requirements.
Operation
Driving instructions
279
Only operate the COMAND16 (CockpitManagement and Data System) if road,weather and traffic conditions permit.Otherwise, you may not be able to observetraffic conditions and could endangeryourself and others.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet(approximately 14 m) every second.
Telephones and two-way radios
G Warning!Never operate radio transmitters equippedwith a built-in or attached antenna, such asa portable telephone or a citizens band unit,from inside the vehicle while the engine isrunning. Doing so could lead to amalfunction of the vehicle’s electronicsystem, possibly resulting in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. Radiotransmitters should only be used inside thevehicle if they are connected to an antennathat is installed on the outside of thevehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operationinstructions regarding use of an externalantenna.
Emission controlCertain systems of the engine serve to keepthe toxic components of the exhaust gaseswithin permissible limits required by law.These systems will function properly onlywhen maintained strictly according to factoryspecifications. Any adjustments on theengine should, therefore, be carried out onlyby qualified Mercedes-Benz Centerauthorized technicians.Engine adjustments should not be altered inany way. Moreover, the specified serviceprocedures must be carried out regularlyaccording to Mercedes-Benz servicingrequirements. For details refer to theMaintenance Booklet.G Warning!Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous toyour health. All exhaust gas containscarbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it cancause unconsciousness and possibledeath.
Do not run the engine in confined areas(such as a garage) which are not properlyventilated. If you think that exhaust gasfumes are entering the vehicle whiledriving, have the cause determined andcorrected immediately. If you must driveunder these conditions, drive only with atleast one window fully open at all times.
16 Observe all legal requirements.
Operation
Z
Maintenance
280
Maintenance
NotesThe Maintenance System in your vehicletracks the distance driven and the timeelapsed since the last maintenance service,calculates other maintenance service workrequired, and calls for the next maintenanceservice accordingly.We strongly recommend that you have yourvehicle serviced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with theMaintenance Booklet at the times called forby the maintenance service indicator.
i Failure to have the vehicle maintained inaccordance with the Maintenance Bookletand maintenance service indicator at thedesignated times/mileage will result invehicle damage not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Maintenance service indicatormessage
The maintenance service indicator messagewill notify you when the next maintenanceservice is due.Starting approximately 1 month before thenext maintenance service is due, one of thefollowing messages will appear in themultifunction display while you are driving orwhen you switch on the ignition (exampleservice A):Service A Due In XXXX Miles (Km)Service A Due In XXX DaysService A Due In X DayService A Due Now
The maintenance services will be indicated byshowing a service type A through type H in themultifunction display. Types A through H areclassified based on estimated time needed toperform the maintenance service, ranging:from Service A
(approximately 1 hour)to Service H
(approximately 8 hours)Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing ofmaintenance services and intervals they needto be performed at.
Clearing the maintenance serviceindicator messageThe maintenance service indicator messageis cleared automaticallyRafter approximately 10 seconds when you
switch on the ignitionRafter approximately 10 seconds when
reaching the service threshold while drivingRafter approximately 30 seconds, once the
suggested maintenance service term haspassed
Operation
Maintenance
281
1 Reset button
X Clearing the maintenance serviceindicator message manually: Press resetbutton 1 on the instrument cluster.The standard display appears in themultifunction display.
Maintenance service term exceededIf you have exceeded the suggestedmaintenance service term, you will see thefollowing message in the multifunctiondisplay:Service A Exceeded By XXXXX Miles(Km)Service A Exceeded By XXX DaysService A Exceeded By X Day
In addition, a signal sounds when themessage appears.Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreset the maintenance service indicatorfollowing a completed maintenance service.
Calling up the maintenance serviceindicator display
i The menu overview can be found on(Y page 142).
You can call up the maintenance serviceindicator display at any time to check whenthe next maintenance service is due.X Switch on the ignition.X Press button è or ÿ on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedlyuntil the standard display (Y page 143)appears in the multifunction display.
X Press button k or j on themultifunction steering wheel until themaintenance service indicator display withthe service symbol 9 and themaintenance service deadline appears inthe multifunction display.
i If the battery is disconnected, the days ofdisconnection will not be included in thecount shown by the maintenance service
indicator. To arrive at the true maintenanceservice deadline, you will need to subtractthese days from the days shown in themaintenance service indicator message ormaintenance service indicator display.Do not confuse the maintenance serviceindicator with the engine oil level indicatorN.
Resetting the maintenance serviceindicator
In the event that the maintenance service onyour vehicle is not carried out at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, you can have themaintenance service indicator reset.The automotive maintenance facility carryingout the maintenance service will find theinformation for resetting the maintenanceservice indicator in the maintenance-relevantliterature for your vehicle.Such literature is available from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or directlyfrom Mercedes-Benz.
! If the maintenance service indicator wasinadvertently reset, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center correct it.Only reset if the proper maintenanceservice has been performed. Resetting the
Operation
Z
Vehicle care
282
system without performing the propermaintenance service as called for by themaintenance service indicator will result inengine damage and/or other vehicledamage not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
NotesRegular and proper care will help to maintainthe value of your vehicle.G Warning!Many cleaning products can be hazardous.Some are poisonous, others are flammable.Always follow the instructions on theparticular container. Always open yourvehicle’s doors or windows when cleaningthe inside.Never use fluids or solvents that are notdesigned for cleaning your vehicle.Always lock away cleaning products andkeep them out of reach of children.
! When cleaning the vehicle, do not usescouring agents. Never apply strong forceand only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge.Otherwise you may scratch or damage thesurface to be cleaned.
While in operation, even while parked, yourvehicle is subjected to varying externalinfluences which, if gone unchecked, canattack the paintwork as well as the vehicleunderbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extremeand varying climatic conditions, but also by:RAir pollutionRRoad saltRTarRGravel and stone chippingTo avoid paint damage, you shouldimmediately remove:RGrease and oilRFuelRCoolantRBrake fluidRBird droppingsRInsectsRTree resins etc.Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminatesthe aggressiveness and potency of the aboveadverse influences.More frequent washings are necessary todeal with unfavorable conditions:Rnear the oceanRin industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)Rduring winter operation
Operation
Vehicle care
283
You should check your vehicle from time totime for stone chipping or other damage. Anydamage should be repaired as soon aspossible to prevent corrosion.In doing so, do not neglect the underbody ofthe vehicle. A prerequisite for a thoroughcheck is a washing of the underbody followedby a thorough inspection. Damaged areasneed to be re-undercoated.Your vehicle has been treated at the factorywith a wax-base rustproofing in the bodycavities which will last for the lifetime of thevehicle. Post-production treatment is neithernecessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility ofincompatibility between materials used in theproduction process and others applied later.We have selected vehicle-care products andcompiled recommendations which arespecially matched to our vehicles and whichalways reflect the latest technology. You canobtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-careproducts at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion ordamage due to negligent or incorrect carecannot always be removed or repaired withthe vehicle-care products recommended
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The following topics deal with the cleaningand care of your vehicle and give important“how-to” information as well as references toMercedes-Benz approved vehicle-careproducts.
Power washer! Follow the instructions provided by the
power washer manufacturer onmaintaining a distance between the vehicleand the nozzle of the power washer.Never use a round nozzle to power-washtires. The intense jet of water can result indamage to the tire.Always replace a damaged tire.Always keep the jet of water moving acrossthe surface. Do not aim directly at electricalparts, electrical connectors, seals, or otherrubber parts.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:If a door handle is hit by a strong jet ofwater, and a SmartKey is withinapproximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, itcould be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Tar stainsQuickly remove tar stains before they dry andbecome more difficult to remove. A tarremover is recommended.
Paintwork, painted body components! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape
or similar materials to painted bodycomponents may damage the paintwork.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care shouldbe applied when water drops on the paintsurface do not “bead up”. This shouldnormally be done every 3 to 5 months,depending on the climate and washingdetergent used.Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleanershould be applied if the paint surface showssigns of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).Do not apply any of these products or wax ifyour vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hoodis still hot.X Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for
quick and provisional repairs of minor paintdamage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicledoors, etc.).
Operation
Z
Vehicle care
284
Engine cleaningPrior to cleaning the engine compartment,make sure to protect electrical componentsand connectors from contact with water andcleaning agents.Corrosion protection, such as MBAnticorrosion Wax should be applied to theengine compartment after every enginecleaning. Before applying, all control linkagebushings and joints should be lubricated. Thepoly-V-belt and all pulleys should beprotected from any wax.
Vehicle washingIn the winter, thoroughly remove all traces ofroad salt as soon as possible.When washing the vehicle underbody, do notforget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:If a door handle is hit by a strong jet ofwater, and a SmartKey is withinapproximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, itcould be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Hand-washX Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight.X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to
clean the vehicle.X Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent,
such as Mercedes-Benz approved CarShampoo.
X Thoroughly spray the vehicle with adiffused jet of water.
X Do not spray directly towards theventilation intake.
X Use plenty of water and rinse the spongeand chamois frequently.
X Rinse with clean water and thoroughly drywith a chamois.Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on thefinish.
Automatic car washYou can have your vehicle washed in anautomatic car wash from the start. Brushlesscar washes are preferable.X To protect the filter system, activate the air
recirculation mode using button , onthe climate control panel.
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatictouchless car wash which uses causticspray. Caustic spray will damage the paintor ornamental moldings.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it beforerunning it through the automatic car wash.
! Make sure the combination switch is setto wiper setting M. Otherwise, the rainsensor could activate and cause the wipersto move unintentionally. This may lead tovehicle damage.Due to the width of the vehicle, fold inexterior rear view mirrors prior to runningthe vehicle through an automatic car washto prevent damage to the mirrors.
When leaving the automatic car wash, makesure the mirrors are folded out.After running the vehicle through anautomatic car wash, wipe any wax off of thewindshield and the wiper blade inserts. Thiswill prevent smears and reduce wiping noisewhich can be caused by residual wax on thewindshield.
Ornamental moldingsX For regular cleaning and care of ornamental
moldings, use a damp cloth.
Operation
Vehicle care
285
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamentalmoldings. Although ornamental moldingsmay have chrome appearance, they couldbe made of anodized aluminum that will bedamaged when cleaned with chromecleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to cleanthose ornamental moldings.For very dirty ornamental moldings ofwhich you are sure are chrome-plated, usea chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether anornamental molding is chrome-plated,contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps,side markers, turn signal lensesX Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,with plenty of water.
! Only use window cleaning solutions thatare suitable for plastic lamp lenses.Window cleaning solutions which are notsuitable may damage the plastic lamplenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do notuse abrasives, solvents or cleaners thatcontain solvents.
Cleaning the Distronic system sensorcover
1 Distronic system sensor cover
X Switch off the ignition.X Only clean sensor cover 1 by hand.X Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,with plenty of water and a non-scratchingcloth to clean sensor cover 1.
X Restart the engine after cleaning sensorcover 1.
Cleaning the Parktronic system sensorsParktronic system sensors are located in thefront and rear bumper.
1 Parktronic system sensors in frontbumper
X Only clean sensors 1 by hand.X Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,with plenty of water and a soft, non-scratching cloth to clean sensors 1 on thebumpers.
! Applying strong pressure may damagethe sensor covers.
Cleaning the windows and the wiperblades! The windshield wipers must be in a
vertical position before folding them awayfrom the windshield. They could otherwisedamage the hood.
Operation
Z
Vehicle care
286
Never open the hood when the wiper armsare folded forward.
X Make sure the hood is fully closed.X Switch on the ignition.X Turn combination switch to wiper settingu (Y page 118).
X With wiper arms in vertical position, switchoff the ignition.G Warning!For safety reasons, switch off wipers andremove SmartKey from starter switch(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure thevehicle’s on-board electronics have status0) before cleaning the windshield and/orthe wiper blades. Otherwise, the wipermotor could suddenly turn on and causeinjury.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.They could tear.
X Fold the wiper arms forward until they snapinto place.
X Clean the windshield and the wiper bladeinserts with a clean cloth and milddetergent solution.
X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild windowcleaning solution on all outside and insideglass surfaces.An automotive glass cleaner isrecommended.
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back ontothe windshield before turning the SmartKeyin the starter switch or pressing theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button (vehicleswith KEYLESS-GO).Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiperarm back. If released, the force of theimpact from the tensioning spring couldcrack the windshield.
! To clean the window interior, do not usea dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents. Do not touch theinside of the front, rear or side windowswith hard objects such as an ice scraper orring. Doing so may damage the windows.
Cleaning the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel (sedan)X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
cleaning solution.An automotive glass cleaner isrecommended.
! Do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solventsor cleaners containing solvents. Doing somay damage the tilt/sliding panel.
Light alloy wheelsIf possible, clean wheels once a week.X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,
a soft bristle brush and a strong spray ofwater for cleaning the light alloy wheels.
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials.Acid may cause corrosion or damage theclear coat.
! The vehicle should not be parked for anextended period of time immediately afterit has been cleaned, especially not after thewheel rims have been cleaned with wheelrim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners can lead toincreased corrosion of the brake disks andbrake pads. Non-approved wheel cleaners
Operation
Vehicle care
287
may also damage the wheel paint if thevehicle is not driven after cleaning.Therefore, the vehicle’s brake systemshould always be warmed-up before it isparked after cleaning. Drive your vehicle forseveral minutes to allow the brakes to dry.When applying Mercedes-Benz approvedTire Care and Mercedes-Benz approvedWheel Care products, take care not tospray them on the brake disks.
Plastic and rubber partsX Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild
detergent for delicate fabrics as a washingsolution.
X Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarmsolution.The surface may temporarily change color.If this is the case, wait for it to dry.G Warning!Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprayscontaining solvents to clean the cockpit orthe steering wheel. Cleaners containingsolvents will make the surface porous andvehicle occupants could suffer seriousinjuries from plastic parts coming loose inthe event of air bag deployment.
! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.Otherwise you may scratch or damage thesurface.
Hard plastic trim itemsX Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with lightpressure.
COMAND display! You must switch off the COMAND display
and allow it to cool prior to cleaning.
! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents.These can damage or even destroy theaudio display screen.
X Use a standard microfiber cloth and applywith light pressure.
Steering wheel and gear selector leverX Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approvedLeather Care.
CarpetsX Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and
Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.
Headliner and shelf below rear windowX Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo
cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
Seat beltsX Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.
! The seat belts must not be treated withchemical cleaning agents. Do not dry theseat belts at temperatures above 176‡(80†) or in direct sunlight.
G Warning!Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.
UpholsteryUsing aftermarket seat covers or wearingclothing that have the tendency to give offcoloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause theupholstery to become permanentlydiscolored. By lining the seats with a proper
Operation
Z
Vehicle care
288
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration willbe prevented.G Warning!Only use seat or head restraint coverswhich have been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.Using other seat or head restraint coversmay interfere with or prevent the activationof the active head restraints and/or thedeployment of the front side impact airbags.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter for availability.
Leather upholsteryPlease note that leather upholstery is anatural product and is therefore subject to anatural aging process. Leather upholsterymay also react to certain ambient influencessuch as high humidity or high temperature byshowing wrinkles for example.X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:RWipe with light pressure only.RDo not clean with abrasive cleaning
agents such as scouring milk or powder.
RDo not soak the leather upholstery.As leather is a natural product, it couldotherwise harden or become porous.RExercise particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its undersideshould not become wet.
MB Tex upholsteryX Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply withlight pressure for cleaning the upholstery.
Wood trimsX Only use water and a damp cloth to clean
wood trims in your vehicle.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover orwheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes asthese may be abrasive.
Chrome-plated exhaust tipRegular cleaning and care of chrome-platedexhaust tips will help to maintain their shineand the classy appearance.X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome
Polishing Paste each time the vehicle hasbeen washed, especially during the winter.
! Do not use alkaline cleaners such aswheel cleaners as they could causecorrosion.
Operation
289
Vehicle equipment ............................ 290Where will I find ...? .......................... 290Vehicle status messages in themultifunction display ....................... 295What to do if … .................................. 330Unlocking/locking manually ........... 343Resetting activated head restraints 345Replacing SmartKey batteries ......... 346Replacing bulbs ................................. 348Replacing wiper blades .................... 352Flat tire .............................................. 355Bleeding the fuel system (dieselengine only) ....................................... 366Battery ............................................... 367Jump starting .................................... 369Towing the vehicle ............................ 372Fuses .................................................. 375
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
290
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes allfeatures, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit! Always keep the storage compartment
under the front passenger seat closedwhile the vehicle is in motion.
i Check expiration dates and contents forcompleteness at least once a year andreplace missing/expired items.
The first aid kit is located in the storagecompartment under the front passenger seat.
1 Handle
X Pull handle 1 upward.X Fold the lid down.X Remove the first aid kit.
Vehicle tool kitThe vehicle tool kit is locatedRunderneath the trunk floor (sedan)Runderneath the cargo compartment floor
(wagon without third-row seats)Runderneath the third-row seats’ footwell
(wagon with third-row seats)The vehicle tool kit includes:RAlignment boltRCollapsible wheel chockRElectric air pump17
RPair of glovesRPair of universal pliersRTIREFIT kit18
RTowing eye bolt
17 Vehicles with TIREFIT or spare wheel with collapsible tire only.18 E 63 AMG wagon with folding third-row seats only.
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
291
RValve extractor19
RWheel wrench
Vehicle tool kit (sedan)X Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 86).X Lift the trunk floor using the floor handle.X Engage the floor handle on the upper trunk
lip.
! To prevent damage, always disengage thefloor handle from the upper trunk lip andlower the trunk floor before closing thetrunk.
1 Tool bag and jack2 Spare wheel3 Luggage bowl
X To access jack: Remove tool bag 1.
Vehicle tool kit (wagon)X Removing: Open the tailgate (Y page 86).
Wagon without third-row seatsX Open the rear cargo compartment floor
(Y page 214).
Wagon with third-row seatsX Fold out the third-row seats (Y page 103).X Remove the seat cushions of the third-row
seats (Y page 103).
1 Footwell handle2 Footwell
X Opening: Lift footwell 2 using footwellhandle 1.
X Closing: Close footwell 2 and push itdown until it engages.
Vehicles with spare wheel
1 Handle2 Cover
X Turn handle 1 to the right as far as it willgo.
X Remove cover 2.
19 Vehicles with spare wheel with collapsible tire only.
Practical hints
Z
Where will I find ...?
292
Vehicles with TIREFIT
1 Jack and tools2 Electric air pump 3 TIREFIT kit
X To access remaining tools: Remove jack1.
Collapsible wheel chockThe collapsible wheel chock serves to securethe vehicle, e.g. while changing a wheel.X Take the collapsible wheel chock from the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 290).
1 Tilt the plates upward2 Fold the lower plate outward3 Insert the plate
X Setting up: Tilt both plates upward 1.X Fold the lower plate outward 2.X Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way
into the openings of base plate 3.For information on where to place wheelchocks when changing a wheel, see “Liftingthe vehicle” (Y page 360).
Jack
G Warning!Only use the jack supplied with your vehicleto lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes.If you use the jack for any other purpose,
you or others could be injured, as the jackis designed only for the purpose ofchanging a wheel.When using the jack, observe the safetynotes in the “Mounting the spare wheel”section and the notes on the jack.
X Take the jack from the vehicle tool kit(Y page 290).
Storage position
X Turn the crank handle in the direction ofarrow as far as it will go.
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
293
Operational position
X Turn the crank handle clockwise.
Before placing the jack back into the vehicletool kit:X Fully collapse the jack.X Fold in the crank handle (storage position).
Spare wheel
G Observe Safety notes, seepage 355.
The spare wheel is located underneath thetrunk floor (sedan)/cargo compartment floor(wagon).X Removing: To access the spare wheel,
proceed as described in the section on thevehicle tool kit (Y page 290).
Vehicles with Minispare wheelX Sedan: Remove the luggage box
(Y page 294).
Example illustration (sedan)1 Tool bag and jack2 Spare wheel3 Luggage bowl
X Remove luggage bowl 3 by turning itcounterclockwise.
X Remove spare wheel 2.For information on mounting the spare wheel,see “Flat tire” (Y page 355).
Storing the spare wheel after useX Place spare wheel 2 in the spare wheel
well (Y page 293).X Secure spare wheel 2 by turning luggage
bowl 3 clockwise (Y page 293).
Practical hints
Z
Where will I find ...?
294
Vehicles with spare wheel withcollapsible tire
1 Tool bag and jack2 Spare wheel3 Electric air pump4 Protective film/bag5 Storage well casing
i For transporting the damaged road wheel,use protective film/bag 4 (if available).
X Remove storage well casing 5.
6 Retaining screw7 Storage well casing base
X Remove storage well casing base 7.X Remove retaining screw 6 by turning it
counterclockwise.X Remove spare wheel 2.For information on mounting the spare wheel,see “Flat tire” (Y page 355).
Storing the spare wheel after useIf you wish to store the spare wheel after use,carry out the following steps. Otherwise, thespare wheel may not fit the spare wheel well.
! Make sure the spare wheel is dry beforestoring it.
X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of thecollapsible tire.
X Unscrew the valve insert from the valveusing the valve extractor integrated in thevalve cap.
X Allow the air to escape.
i It may take a few minutes for thecollapsible tire to deflate completely.
X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.X Screw the valve cap back onto the valve.X Place spare wheel 2 into the spare wheel
well (Y page 294).X Secure spare wheel 2 by turning retaining
screw 6 clockwise (Y page 294).
Luggage box (sedan)Vehicles with spare wheel with collapsible tireare not equipped with a luggage box.X Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 86).X Lift the trunk floor using the floor handle.X Engage the floor handle on the upper trunk
lip.
! To prevent damage, always disengage thefloor handle from the upper trunk lip and
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
295
lower the trunk floor before closing thetrunk.
1 Fastening clip2 Luggage box
X Turn fastening clips 1 to the left upwardsfrom the fastening bolts.
X Lift luggage box 2 in the area of thefastening bolts and remove it from thetrunk.
X Installing: Insert the luggage box into thetrunk so that the fastening clips are in linewith the fastening bolts.
X Push the front edge of the luggage box indirection of arrows under the cover of thetrunk sill.
X Press the fastening clips onto the fasteningbolts until they lock into place.
Vehicle status messages in themultifunction display
NotesWarning and malfunction messages appear inthe multifunction display located in theinstrument cluster.Certain warning and malfunction messagesare accompanied by an audible signal.Address these messages accordingly andfollow the additional instructions given in thisOperator’s Manual.Selecting the Vehicle status messagememory menu in the control system(Y page 148) displays both cleared anduncleared messages.High-priority messages appear in themultifunction display in red color.Certain messages of high priority cannot becleared from the multifunction display usingthe reset button (Y page 138) or buttonj, k, · or è on themultifunction steering wheel.Other messages of high priority andmessages of less immediate priority can becleared from the multifunction display usingthe reset button or button j, k,· or è on the multifunction steering
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
296
wheel. They are then stored in the Vehiclestatus message memory menu(Y page 148). Remember that clearing amessage will only make the messagedisappear. Clearing a message will notcorrect the condition that caused themessage to appear.G Warning!All categories of messages containimportant information which should betaken note of and, where a malfunction isindicated, addressed as soon as possible atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair the condition noted maycause damage not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or resultin property damage or personal injury.
G Warning!No messages will be displayed if either theinstrument cluster or the multifunctiondisplay is inoperative.As a result, you will not be able to seeinformation about your driving conditions,such as speed or outside temperature,
warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning messages or the failure of anysystems. Driving characteristics may beimpaired.If you must continue to drive, please do sowith added caution. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
On the pages that follow, you will find acompilation of the most important warningand malfunction messages that may appearin the multifunction display.For your convenience the messages aredivided into text messages (Y page 297) andsymbol messages (Y page 312).
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
297
Text messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
ABS ABS, ESPInoperativeSee Operator’sMan.
The brake system is still functioningnormally but due to a malfunction, theABS, the BAS, the ESP® and the PRE-SAFE® system are unavailable.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheelsmay lock during hard braking, reducingsteering capability.
X Have the system checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases therisk of an accident.
ABS ABS, ESPUnavailableSee Operator’sMan.
The brake system still functions normallybut due to insufficient power supply, theABS, the BAS, the ESP® and the PRE-SAFE® system are unavailable.
When the voltage is above the required valueagain, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP® and the PRE-SAFE® system are operational again and themessage should disappear.X If the message does not disappear: Have the
system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
ESP InoperativeSee Operator’sManual
The brake system is still functioningnormally but due to a malfunction theBAS, the ESP® and the PRE-SAFE® systemare unavailable.The ABS may not be operational.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheelsmay lock during hard braking, reducingsteering capability.
X Have the system checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases therisk of an accident.
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
298
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
PRE-SAFE Inoperative SeeOperator’s Manual
The PRE-SAFE® system itself has failed.All other occupant safety systems, suchas the air bags, are still available.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
299
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Front PassengerAirbag EnabledSee Operator’sManual
The front passenger front air bag isactivated while driving even though achild, small individual, or object below thesystem’s weight threshold is on the frontpassenger seat, or the front passengerseat is empty. Objects on the seat orforces acting on the seat may make thesystem sense supplemental weight.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon aspossible.
X Engage the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition.X Open the front passenger door.X Remove child and child restraint from front
passenger seat and properly secure the childin rear seat employing the child restraint ifnecessary.
X Remove any other items from on and aroundthe front passenger seat and make sure thestorage bag on the back of the front passengerseat is empty.
X Make sure no objects which apply forces to theseat are present (e.g. objects such as books,briefcases etc. lodged behind or around theseat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.).The system may recognize such forces assupplemental weight and sense that anoccupant on the front passenger seat is of agreater weight than actually present.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the frontpassenger door and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 75 indicator lamp in thecenter console (Y page 53) and the multifunction
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
300
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solutiondisplay in the instrument cluster (Y page 30) forthe following:With the seat unoccupied and the ignitionswitched on,Rthe 75 indicator lamp in the
center console should illuminate and remainilluminated, indicating that the OCS(Y page 50) has deactivated the frontpassenger front air bag.Rthe message Front Passenger AirbagEnabled See Operator’s Manual or themessage Front Passenger AirbagDisabled See Operator’s Manual shouldnot appear in the multifunction display at anytime the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least60 seconds for the system to complete thenecessary check cycles and to make sureneither message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy thefront passenger seat again. Depending on thefront passenger classification sensed by theOCS, the 75 indicator lamp willremain illuminated or go out.If above conditions are not met, the system is notworking properly. Have the system checked as
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
301
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solutionsoon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
G Warning!If the 75 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any children 12 years oldand under and other small individuals use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
302
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Front PassengerAirbag DisabledSee Operator’sManual
The front passenger front air bag isdeactivated while driving even though anadult or someone larger than a smallindividual is occupying the frontpassenger seat. Forces acting on the seatmay make the system sense a decreasein weight.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon aspossible.
X Engage the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition.X Have the front passenger vacate the seat and
exit the vehicle.X Adjust the seat height to a higher position
(Y page 96).X Make sure no objects which apply forces to the
seat are present (e.g. objects such as books,briefcases etc. lodged underneath, behind oraround the seat). Such forces may cause thesystem to sense that an occupant of a lesserweight than actually present is on the frontpassenger seat.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the frontpassenger door and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 75 indicator lamp in thecenter console (Y page 53) and the multifunctiondisplay in the instrument cluster (Y page 30) forthe following:With the seat unoccupied and the ignitionswitched on,Rthe 75 indicator lamp in the
center console should illuminate and remainilluminated, indicating that the OCS
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
303
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution(Y page 50) has deactivated the frontpassenger front air bag.Rthe message Front Passenger AirbagEnabled See Operator’s Manual or themessage Front Passenger AirbagDisabled See Operator’s Manual shouldnot appear in the multifunction display at anytime the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least60 seconds for the system to complete thenecessary check cycles and to make sureneither message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy thefront passenger seat again. Depending on thefront passenger classification sensed by theOCS, the 75 indicator lamp willremain illuminated or go out.If above conditions are not met, the system is notworking properly. Have the system checked assoon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
G Warning!If the 75 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the front passenger seat even after performing theabove corrective steps, do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
304
Driving systems
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Cruise ControlAnd SPEEDTRONIC
Inoperative The cruise control is malfunctioning. X Have cruise control checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
Cruise Control - - - MPH One of the activation conditions for cruisecontrol has not been fulfilled. Forexample, you have attempted to set aspeed below 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h), if thesituation allows, and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruisecontrol (Y page 161).
DISTRONIC - - - MPH One of the activation conditions forDistronic has not been fulfilled. Forexample, you have attempted to set aspeed below 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h), if thesituation allows, and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for Distronic(Y page 166).
DISTRONIC Inoperative The Distronic or the display aremalfunctioning.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
DISTRONIC Override You have accelerated. The Distronic hasswitched off.
X Stop accelerating.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
305
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
DISTRONIC CurrentlyUnavailableSee Operator’sManual
Distronic is deactivated because:RThe Distronic cover in the radiator grille
is dirty.RThe functionality is impaired by heavy
precipitation or fogRThe system is overheated.
X If necessary, clean the Distronic cover in thearea of the radiator grille (Y page 285).
X If necessary, wait until the system has cooleddown.
X Restart the vehicle.Distronic becomes operational again without theengine being restarted when:Rdirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while
driving (e.g. slush or snow)Rthe system recognizes full sensor availability
(due to lessening rain or the road surfacedrying)Rthe message in the multifunction display
disappearsRthe speed last stored flashes in the display for
5 seconds.You can then operate Distronic as usual again.
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
306
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
DISTRONIC CurrentlyUnavailableSee Operator’sManual
Distronic is deactivated because thefunctionality is impaired by externalinterferences, e.g. high-frequencysources such as toll stations, speedmeasuring systems etc.
X Leave the area of the external interference.X Activate Distronic again (Y page 166) when the
message in the multifunction displaydisappears.
Distronic is deactivated because theDistronic sensor has not sensed any othervehicles or objects, e.g. road sign or such,for a long time.
X Activate Distronic again (Y page 166) when themessage in the multifunction displaydisappears.
G Warning!Distronic cannot take weather conditions into account. Switch off Distronic or do not turn it on if the sensor is dirty or visibility is diminishedas a result of snow, rain or fog. The distance control may be impaired even before the system is able to detect a dirty sensor. The messageDISTRONIC Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual will be displayed in the multifunction display and Distronic will be turnedoff.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
307
Vehicle
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
P Gear SelectorLever In P Position
You have opened the driver’s door whilethe engine was not running and theautomatic transmission was not in parkposition P.
X Shift the automatic transmission into parkposition P.
You have attempted to turn off the enginewith the KEYLESS-GO start/stop buttonwhile the automatic transmission was notin park position P.
X Shift the automatic transmission into parkposition P.
P/N Please Shift To Nor P
You have attempted to start the enginewith the KEYLESS-GO start/stop buttonwhile the automatic transmission was inreverse gear R or drive position D.
X Shift the automatic transmission into parkposition P or neutral position N. Make sure thebrake pedal is depressed.
Tires
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Check tires, then restart RunFlat Indicator.
There has been a warning message abouta loss in the tire inflation pressure and theRun Flat Indicator was not restarted yet.
X Make sure the correct tire inflation pressure isset for each tire.
X Then restart the Run Flat Indicator(Y page 256).
Run FlatIndicator
Inoperative The Run Flat Indicator is malfunctioning. X Have the Run Flat Indicator checked at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
308
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Tire Pressure Check tires The Run Flat Indicator indicates that thepressure is too low in one or more tires.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoidingabrupt steering and braking maneuvers.Observe the traffic situation around you.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, change thewheel (Y page 355).
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure asrequired (Y page 255).
X Restart the Run Flat Indicator after adjustingthe tire inflation pressure values(Y page 256).
Tire pressure is only displayedafter driving for afew minutes.
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS (Canadaonly): The tire inflation pressure is beingchecked.
X Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
Tire PressureMonitor
Inoperative The TPMS (USA only) or Advanced TPMS(Canada only) is malfunctioning.
X Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS checked atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire PressureMonitor
InoperativeNo Wheel Sensors
There are wheels without appropriatewheel sensors mounted (e.g. winter tires).
X Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS checked atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Have the appropriate wheel sensors installedat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
309
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Tire Pres.Monitor
Wheel SensorMissing
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS (Canadaonly):One or more sensors are defect (e.g.battery is empty).The respective tire is indicated by – –instead of the tire inflation pressure in themultifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Have the wheel sensors installed at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
One or more wheels without appropriatewheel sensors mounted (e.g. spare tire).The respective tire is indicated by – –instead of the tire inflation pressure in themultifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Have the wheel sensors installed at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire PressureMonitor
CurrentlyUnavailable
The TPMS (USA only) or Advanced TPMS(Canada only) is unable to monitor the tireinflation pressure due to a nearby radiointerference source or insufficient powersupply.
As soon as the causes of the malfunction havebeen removed, the TPMS or Advanced TPMSbecomes active again automatically after a fewminutes driving.
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
310
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Please correctthe tirepressure.
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS (Canadaonly):The tire pressure is too low in one or moretires.orThe tire pressures of the individual tiresdiffer from each other significantly.The tire pressure values are shown in themultifunction display.
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure asrequired (Y page 255).
CautionTire PressureTire Defect
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS (Canadaonly):One or more tires are deflating.The respective tire is indicated in themultifunction display.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoidingabrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 355).
Check Tires Vehicles with Advanced TPMS (Canadaonly):The tire pressure in one or more tires isalready below the minimum value.The respective tire is indicated in themultifunction display.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoidingabrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire pressure as required.X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 355).
G Warning!Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued drivingwith a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
311
G Warning!Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, andresult in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
312
Symbol messages
Brake
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
2 Brake Wear The brake pads have reached their wearlimit.
X Have the brake pads replaced as soon aspossible.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
;(USA only)3(Canada only)
EBV, ABS, ESPInoperativeSee Operator’sMan.
The brake system is still functioningnormally but due to a malfunction, theABS, the BAS, the EBP, the ESP® and thePRE-SAFE® are unavailable.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheelsmay lock during hard braking, reducingsteering capability.
X Adjust driving to be consistent with reducedbraking responsiveness.
X Have the system checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
;(USA only)!(Canada only)
Release ParkingBrake
You are driving with the parking brakeengaged.
X Release the parking brake.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
313
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
;(USA only)3(Canada only)
Check Brake FluidLevel
There is insufficient brake fluid in thereservoir.
Risk of accident!X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so.X Do not drive any further.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call Roadside Assistance.Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve theproblem.
G Warning!Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately.Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engineparts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked forbrake pad thickness and leaks.
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
314
Safety systems
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
L Tele AidInoperative
One or more main functions of the Tele Aidsystem are malfunctioning.
X Have the Tele Aid system checked at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
1 Restraint SystemMalfunctionService Required
The system is malfunctioning. X Drive with added caution to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center and havethe system checked immediately.
G Warning!In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational.For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked.Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deployunexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Driving systems
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
@ Vehicle Rising Your vehicle is adjusting to your levelselection.
@ Vehicle RisingPlease Wait
The vehicle level is too low. X Wait until the message disappears from themultifunction display.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
315
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
@ STOP Vehicle TooLow
The AIRMATIC DC is malfunctioning. Avoid excessive steering maneuvers. The fendersor tires could otherwise be damaged. Listen forscraping noises.X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).X Drive to the side of the road and select a higher
vehicle level (Y page 172).Depending on the type of malfunction, this mayraise the vehicle’s level.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
@ Malfunction The system is functional only to a limitedextent.The system display or the system ismalfunctioning.
X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).X Have the vehicle checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Ê The trunk is open (sedan). X Close the trunk.
& The tailgate is open (wagon). X Close the tailgate.
Y You are driving with the hood open. X Close the hood (Y page 243).
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
316
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
V You are driving with at least one dooropen. The display symbol shows youwhich doors are open.
X Close all doors.
? Left Rear BackrestNot LockedorRight RearBackrest NotLocked
The rear seat backrest is not engaged. X Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is fullyengaged in position.
I Key Detected InVehicle
A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in thevehicle was recognized while trying to lockthe vehicle from the outside.
X Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
I Please don’tforget your key.
This display appears for a maximum of60 seconds if the driver’s door is openedwith the engine turned off and noSmartKey in the starter switch. Thismessage is only a reminder.
X Take the SmartKey with you when leaving thevehicle.
I Remove Key You have forgotten to remove theSmartKey.
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
I Please get a newkey.
The SmartKey is malfunctioning. X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
I Change KeyBatteries
The batteries in the SmartKey withKEYLESS-GO are discharged.
X Replace the batteries (Y page 346).
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
317
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
I Key Not Detected The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is notdetected while the engine is runningbecause the SmartKey is not in thevehicle.
X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.X Engage the parking brake.X Search for the SmartKey.
The vehicle cannot be locked centrally nor canthe engine be started again after the engine isstopped.
I Key Not Detected The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is notdetected while the engine is runningbecause there is strong radio-frequencyinterference.
X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.X Engage the parking brake.X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the
starter switch.
I Key Not Detected The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO ismomentarily not detected.
X Change the position of the SmartKey in thevehicle.
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in thestarter switch if necessary.
t Bluetooth Ready The telephone has not yet beenconnected to the COMAND system viaBluetooth®.
X Connect the telephone to the COMAND systemvia Bluetooth®.
W Top Up Washer Fluid The fluid level has dropped toapproximately 1/3 of total reservoircapacity.
X Add washer fluid (Y page 246).
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
318
Engine
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
ú(USA only)
±(Canada only)
Engine Service There may be a malfunction in:RThe fuel management systemRThe ignition system (gasoline engine)RThe exhaust systemRThe fuel system
X Have the engine checked as soon as possibleat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
± DisplayMalfunctionService Required
Certain electronic systems are unable torelay information to the control system.The coolant temperature display or thetachometer may have failed.
X Have the electronic systems checked at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
B Top Up CoolantSee Operator’sMan.
The coolant level is too low. X Add coolant (Y page 245).X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the
cooling system checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
G Warning!Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.You could be seriously burned.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious enginedamage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat causing major engine damage.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
319
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Ì CoolantStop Vehicle, turnengine off.
The coolant is too hot. X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it issafe to do so.
X Turn off the engine immediately.X Engage the parking brake.X Only start the engine again after the message
disappears. You could otherwise damage theengine.
X Observe the coolant temperature indicator inthe instrument cluster.
X If the temperature rises again: Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately.
During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature mayrise close to 248‡ (120†).
G Warning!Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You couldbe seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine ifyou see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
320
! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†). Doing so may cause serious damage which is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
321
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Ì CoolantStop Vehicle, turnengine off.
The poly-V-belt could be broken. X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it issafe to do so.
X Turn off the engine immediately.X Check the poly-V-belt.X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive.
Otherwise the engine will overheat due to aninoperative water pump which may result indamage to the engine. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
X If it is intact: Do not continue to drive thevehicle with this message displayed. Doing socould result in serious engine damage that isnot covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.
X Observe the coolant temperature indicator inthe instrument cluster.
X Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter immediately.
Ì The cooling fan for the coolant ismalfunctioning.
X Observe the coolant temperature indicator inthe instrument cluster.
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
322
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solutionIf the coolant temperature is below 248‡(120†), you may continue driving to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g.by driving uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
X Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
# The battery is no longer charging.Possible causes:Ralternator malfunctioningRbroken poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronic system
X Stop immediately in a safe location or as soonas it is safe to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive.Otherwise the engine will overheat due to aninoperative water pump which may result indamage to the engine. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
X If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center immediately. Adjustdriving to be consistent with reduced brakingresponsiveness.
# Low VoltageStart Engine
The battery has insufficient voltage. X Start the engine.
N Check oil level atnext refueling.
The engine oil has dropped to a criticallevel.
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 243) and addengine oil as required (Y page 244).
X If you must add engine oil frequently, have theengine checked for possible leaks.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
323
If the message Check oil level at nextrefueling. appears while the engine isrunning and at operating temperature, theengine oil level has dropped to approximatelythe minimum level.The message will be stored in the vehiclestatus message memory after you havecleared it from the multifunction display.
Visually check for oil leaks. If there are noobvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest servicestation to refill your engine oil to the requiredlevel.For information on approved engine oilscontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeror visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
! Engine oil level warnings should not beignored. Extended driving with the symboldisplayed could result in serious enginedamage that is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
¿ The fuel level is low. X Refuel at the next gas station.
W Reserve Fuel The fuel level has dropped below thereserve mark.
X Refuel at the next gas station.
W Ultra Low-sulfurDiesel Fuel Only
Vehicles with diesel engine only:The fuel level has dropped below thereserve mark.
X Refuel at the next gas station.X Only use commercially available vehicular
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (15 ppmSULFUR MAXIMUM).
W Gas Cap Is Open A loss of pressure has been detected inthe fuel system. The fuel cap may not beclosed properly or the fuel system may beleaky.
X Check the fuel cap (Y page 239).X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
ò Replace Air Filter The air filter is clogged. X Have the air filter checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
324
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
[ Clean Fuel Filter There is water in the fuel filter. X Have the water drained at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Lamps
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
. Active HeadlampsInoperative
The active Bi-Xenon headlamp system ismalfunctioning.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
. Active HeadlampsAuxiliary Bulb On
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps aremalfunctioning. Another light is beingused.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
. Reverse Lamp LeftorReverse Lamp Right
The left or right backup lamp ismalfunctioning.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
. Brake-/Tail LampLeftAuxiliary Bulb OnorBrake-/Tail LampRightAuxiliary Bulb On
The left or right brake/tail lamp ismalfunctioning. This message will onlyappear if all LEDs have stopped working.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
. 3rd Brake Lamp The high-mounted brake lamp ismalfunctioning. This message will onlyappear if all LEDs have stopped working.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
325
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
. Front Foglamp LeftorFront FoglampRight
The left or right front fog lamp ismalfunctioning.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
. Marker Lamp FrontLeftorMarker Lamp FrontRight
The front left side or right side markerlamp is malfunctioning.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
. Parking Lamp FrontLeftAuxiliary Bulb OnorParking Lamp FrontRightAuxiliary Bulb On
The left or right front parking lamp ismalfunctioning. A substitute bulb is beingused.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
. High Beam LeftorHigh Beam Right
The left or right high-beam lamp ismalfunctioning.
X Replace the bulb as soon as possible(Y page 348).
. License Plate LampLeftorLicense Plate LampRight
The left or right license plate lamp ismalfunctioning.
X Replace the bulb as soon as possible(Y page 348).
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
326
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
. AUTO-LightInoperative
The light sensor is malfunctioning. Theheadlamps come on automatically.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):X In the control system, set daytime running
lamp mode to manual (Y page 153).X Switch off the headlamps using the exterior
lamp switch (Y page 111).
. Low Beam LeftorLow Beam Right
The left or right low-beam lamp ismalfunctioning.
X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soonas possible (Y page 348).
X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
. Rear Left Foglamp The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
. Switch Off Lights You have removed the SmartKey from thestarter switch, opened the driver’s doorand left the headlamps on or removed theSmartKey with KEYLESS-GO from thevehicle and left the headlamps on.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to M orU (Y page 111).
orX With the rear fog lamp switched on: Push in
the exterior lamp switch to its stop.
. Tail Lamp LeftAuxiliary Bulb OnorTail Lamp RightAuxiliary Bulb On
The left or right tail lamp ismalfunctioning. A substitute bulb is beingused.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
327
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
. Cornering LampLeftorCornering LampRight
The left or right corner-illuminating frontfog lamp is malfunctioning.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
. Rear Left TurnSignalorRear Right TurnSignal
The left or right rear turn signal lamp ismalfunctioning.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
. Front Left TurnSignalorFront Right TurnSignal
The left or right front turn signal lamp ismalfunctioning.
X Replace the bulb as soon as possible(Y page 348).
. Left Mirror TurnSignalorRight Mirror TurnSignal
The turn signal in the left or right exteriorrear view mirror is malfunctioning. Thismessage will only appear if all LEDs havestopped working.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
Practical hints
Z
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
328
Tires
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
H Please correct thetire pressure.
The tire pressure is too low in one or moretires.orThe tire pressure of the individual tiresdiffer from each other significantly.
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure asrequired (Y page 255).
H Tire PressureCautionTire Defect
One or more tires are deflating. X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoidingabrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 355).
H Tire PressureCheck Tires
The tire pressure in one or more tires isalready below the minimum value.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoidingabrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire pressure as required.X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 355).
G Warning!Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued drivingwith a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
G Warning!Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, andresult in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
329
Practical hints
Z
What to do if …
330
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster
NotesIf any of the following lamps in the instrumentcluster fails to come on during the bulb self-
check when switching on the ignition, havethe respective bulb checked and replaced ifnecessary.When you switch on the ignition, all lamps(except low-beam headlamp indicator lamp,high-beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turnsignal indicator lamps unless activated) in theinstrument cluster come on. If a lamp in theinstrument cluster fails to come on when theignition is switched on, have it checked andreplaced if necessary.
Practical hints
What to do if …
331
Brake
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
- The yellow ABS indicatorlamp comes on while theengine is running.
The ABS has detected amalfunction and switched off.The BAS, ESP®, EBP and PRE-SAFE® are also switched off (seemessages in multifunctiondisplay).The brake system is stillfunctioning normally but withoutthe systems specified aboveavailable.If the ABS control unit ismalfunctioning, other systemssuch as the navigation system orthe automatic transmission mayalso be malfunctioning.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hardbraking, reducing steering capability.
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 295).
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeras soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
- The yellow ABS indicatorlamp comes on while theengine is running.
The ABS has switched off due toinsufficient power supply.The battery might not be chargedsufficiently.
When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS isoperational again and the ABS indicator lamp should go out.X If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: Have the alternator and
the battery checked.
; (USA only)3 (Canada only)The red brake warning lampcomes on while driving and anacoustic warning sounds.
You are driving with the parkingbrake engaged.
X Release the parking brake.
Practical hints
Z
What to do if …
332
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
; (USA only)3 (Canada only)The red brake warning lampcomes on while the engine isrunning and an acoustic warningsounds.
There is insufficient brake fluid inthe reservoir.
X Risk of accident! Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safelocation as soon as it is safe to do so.
X Engage the parking brake.X Read and observe messages that may appear in the multifunction
display (Y page 295).X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake
fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning!Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warninglamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system.Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriouslyburned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked forbrake pad thickness and leaks.
Practical hints
What to do if …
333
Safety systems
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
< The red seat belt telltalecomes on for a maximumof 6 seconds after startingthe engine.
The seat belt telltale reminds youand your passengers to fastenyour seat belts before driving off.
X Fasten your seat belts.Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seatbelt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds afterstarting the engine.
< You hear a warning chimefor a maximum of6 seconds after startingthe engine.
You have forgotten to fasten yourseat belt.
X Fasten your seat belt.The warning chime stops sounding.
< The red seat belt telltalecomes on while the vehicleis standing still and theengine is running or duringdriving.
You and/or your front passengerhave forgotten to fasten your seatbelts.
X Fasten your seat belts.The seat belt telltale goes out.
There are items placed on thefront passenger seat andtherefore the system senses thefront passenger seat as beingoccupied.
X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them ina safe place.The seat belt telltale goes out.
Practical hints
Z
What to do if …
334
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
< During driving the red seatbelt telltale flashes andyou additionally hear anintermittent warningchime with increasingintensity.
The vehicle’s speed onceexceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) andyou and/or your front passengerhave forgotten to fasten your seatbelts.
X Fasten your seat belts.The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stopssounding.
There are items placed on thefront passenger seat andtherefore the system senses thefront passenger seat as beingoccupied.
X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them ina safe place.The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stopssounding.
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. Theseat belt telltale will only go out if both, the driver and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a frontdoor is opened.
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
1 The red SRS indicatorlamp comes on whiledriving.
There is a malfunction in therestraint systems. The air bags orEmergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs) could deployunexpectedly or fail to activate inan accident.
X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
G Warning!In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational.
Practical hints
What to do if …
335
For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked.Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deployunexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
v The yellow ESP® warninglamp comes on while theengine is running.
The ESP® has been switched off.Risk of accident!When the ESP® is switched off itwill not stabilize the vehicle if thesystem recognizes that thevehicle starts to skid or that awheel is spinning.
X Switch the ESP® back on.Exceptions: (Y page 74).
X If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving tothe prevailing road and weather conditions.
X If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system checkedat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
v The yellow ESP® warninglamp comes on while theengine is running.
The ESP® is not operational dueto a malfunction.Risk of accident!
X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in themultifunction display.
X Continue driving with added caution.X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Practical hints
Z
What to do if …
336
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
v The yellow ESP® warninglamp flashes while driving.
The ESP® or Electronic TractionSystem (ETS/4-ETS) has comeinto operation because ofdetected traction loss in at leastone tire.The cruise control and theDistronic system are deactivated.
X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.X Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 74).Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
Driving systems
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
l The red distance warninglamp comes on whiledriving.
You are too close to the vehicle infront of you to maintain selectedspeed.
X Apply the brakes immediately to increase the following distance.
l The red distance warninglamp comes on whiledriving and an acousticwarning sounds.
You are gaining too rapidly on thevehicle ahead of you or thedistance warning system hasrecognized a stationary obstacleon your probable line of travel.
X Apply the brakes immediately.X Carefully observe the traffic situation. You may need to brake or
maneuver to avoid hitting an obstacle.
Practical hints
What to do if …
337
Vehicle
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
A The yellow fuel tankreserve warning lampcomes on when the engineis running.
The fuel level has gone below thereserve mark.
X Refuel at the next gas station.
Practical hints
Z
What to do if …
338
Engine
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
ú (USA only)± (Canada only)The yellow engine malfunctionindicator lamp comes on whenthe engine is running.
There may be a malfunction in:RThe fuel management systemRThe ignition systemRThe emission control systemRSystems which affect
emissionsSuch malfunctions may result inexcessive emissions values andmay switch the engine to limp-home (emergency operation)mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as soonas the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check localrequirements.
ú (USA only)± (Canada only)The yellow engine malfunctionindicator lamp comes on whenthe engine is running.
A loss of pressure has beendetected in the fuel system. Thefuel cap may not be closedproperly or the fuel system maybe leaky.
X Check the fuel cap (Y page 239).X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Diesel engine: Your fuel tank wasdriven empty.
X After refueling, start, turn off and restart the engine three or fourtimes in succession.The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have yourvehicle checked.
Practical hints
What to do if …
339
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
Ì The red coolanttemperature warning lampcomes on when the engineis running.
There is insufficient coolant in thereservoir.If this warning lamp comes onfrequently, there is a leak in thecooling system.If the coolant level is correct, theelectric radiator fan may bebroken.
X Immediately add coolant to prevent engine from overheating(Y page 245).
X Have the cooling system checked.X If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you can
continue driving to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.X Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
Ì The red coolanttemperature warning lampcomes on when the engineis running and an acousticwarning sounds.
The coolant temperature hasexceeded 248‡ (120†).
X Stop in a safe location as soon as possible and allow the engineand coolant to cool down.
G Warning!Driving when your engine is overheated cancause some fluids which may have leakedinto the engine compartment to catch fire.You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine cancause serious burns which can occur justby opening the engine hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hear steamcoming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location awayfrom other traffic. Turn off the engine, getout of the vehicle and do not stand near thevehicle until the engine has cooled down.
Practical hints
Z
What to do if …
340
Tires
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
H USA only:Combination low tirepressure telltale/TPMSmalfunction telltale for theTPMS illuminatescontinuously.Canada only:Low tire pressure telltalefor the Advanced TPMSilluminates continuously.
The TPMS (USA only) orAdvanced TPMS (Canada only)detects a loss of pressure in atleast one tire.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering andbraking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display(Y page 295).
If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) beencorrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunctiontelltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
H USA only:Combination low tirepressure telltale/TPMSmalfunction telltale for theTPMS flashes 60 secondsand then staysilluminated.
There is a malfunction in theTPMS.
X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display(Y page 295).
X Have the TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tirepressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes ofdriving.
G Warning!Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked every other week whencold and inflated to the inflation pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available,the tire inflation pressure label on the insideof the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tiresof a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or the tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressure telltale when one or
Practical hints
What to do if …
341
more of your tires are significantlyunderinflated. Accordingly, when the lowtire pressure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantlyunderinflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance, andit is the driver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately 1 minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequencewill continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure asintended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacingone or more tires or wheels on your vehicleto ensure that the replacement or alternatetires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.
Lamp in center console
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
75
The front passenger front air bagoff indicator lamp illuminates andremains illuminated with theweight of a typical adult orsomeone larger than a smallindividual on the front passengerseat.
The system is malfunctioning. X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and followcorrective steps (Y page 295).
Practical hints
Z
What to do if …
342
G Warning!If the 75 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a smallindividual on the front passenger seat, do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
75
The front passenger front air bagoff indicator lamp does notilluminate and/or does notremain illuminated with theweight of a typical 12-month-oldchild in a standard child restraintor less on the front passengerseat.
The system is malfunctioning. X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seatand check installation of the child seat.
X Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seatare present.
X Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are present(e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind oraround the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). Thesystem may recognize such forces as supplemental weight.
X If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out,have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the frontpassenger seat until the system has been repaired.
X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and followcorrective steps (Y page 295).
G Warning!If the 75 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard childrestraint or less on the front passenger seat, do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking manually
343
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking the vehicleIf you cannot unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, unlock thedriver’s door and the trunk (sedan only) usingthe mechanical key.
i Unlocking the vehicle with themechanical key and opening the driver’sdoor or the trunk (sedan only) will triggerthe anti-theft alarm system.To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey inthe starter switch.
Removing the mechanical key
1 Mechanical key locking tab2 Mechanical key
X Move locking tab 1 in direction of arrow.X Slide mechanical key 2 out of the housing.
Unlocking the driver’s door
$ Unlocking2 Mechanical key
X Insert mechanical key 2 into the driver’sdoor lock until it stops.
X Turn mechanical key 2 counterclockwiseto position $ until the locking knob movesup.The driver’s door is unlocked.
X Pull the door handle to open the driver’sdoor.
X Turn mechanical key 2 back and removeit from the driver’s door lock.
Unlocking the trunk (sedan)A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
1 Mechanical key% Unlocking3 Handle
X Insert mechanical key 1 into the trunk lidlock until it stops.
X Turn mechanical key 1 counterclockwiseto position %.
X Pull trunk lid handle 3 and lift lid.
! Always make sure there is sufficientoverhead clearance.
Practical hints
Z
Unlocking/locking manually
344
X Turn mechanical key 1 back and removeit from the trunk lid lock.
Unlocking the tailgate (wagon)i This feature is available on the E 63 AMG
unless the vehicle is equipped with foldablethird-row seats.
A minimum height clearance of 6.81 ft(2.07 m) is required to open the tailgate.
1 Emergency release lever2 Cover
X Remove cover 2 from the trim on thetailgate.
X Push emergency release lever 1 indirection of arrow.
X Lift the tailgate.
! Always make sure there is sufficientoverhead clearance.
i If the vehicle has previously been lockedusing the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO,opening the tailgate from the inside willtrigger the anti-theft alarm system.To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey inthe starter switch.
Locking the vehicleIf you cannot lock the vehicle with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, lock it asfollows:X Close the front passenger door, the rear
doors, and the trunk/tailgate.X Open the driver’s door.X Press the central locking switch
(Y page 85).The locking knobs of the front passengerdoor and the rear doors move down.
X If the vehicle battery is disconnected ordrained: Press down the locking knobs ofthe front passenger door and the rear doorsmanually.
X Exit the vehicle.X Sedan only: Check whether the trunk is
locked.
X Sedan only: If it is not locked, lock it withthe mechanical key (Y page 93).Except for the driver’s door, the vehicleshould now be locked.
X Close the driver’s door.
$ Locking2 Mechanical key
X Remove mechanical key 2 from theSmartKey (Y page 343).
X Insert mechanical key 2 into the driver’sdoor lock until it stops.
X Turn mechanical key 2 clockwise toposition $.The driver’s door is locked.
X Turn mechanical key 2 back and removeit from the driver’s door lock.
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
345
i This procedure does not arm the anti-theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuelfiller flap.
Manually unlocking the gear selectorlever
If the vehicle’s electrical system ismalfunctioning, the gear selector lever couldremain locked in park position P. In this casethe gear selector lever can be unlockedmanually, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
1 Tool
X Engage the parking brake.X Open the storage compartment in the
center armrest (Y page 219).X Remove the cup holder (Y page 220).
X Insert suitable tool 1 (e.g. a screwdriver)into the opening.
X Simultaneously push tool 1 downwardand move the gear selector lever out ofpark position P.
X Remove tool 1.The gear selector lever is unlocked
i The gear selector lever is locked again assoon as you move it back to park positionP.
Resetting activated head restraints
If the active head restraints have beentriggered in a rear-end collision, the activehead restraints must be reset.You can tell that the active head restraintshave been triggered when they have beenmoved forward and cannot be adjusted.G Warning!For safety reasons, have the active headrestraints checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center after a rear-endcollision.
G Warning!When pushing back the head restraintcushion, make sure your fingers do notbecome caught between the head restraintcushion and the cover. Failing to do so maylead to injury.
! Be careful not to damage upholstery.
i For your convenience, we recommendthat you have this work carried out at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
Z
Replacing SmartKey batteries
346
1 Reset tool 2 Active head restraint cushion3 Rectangular opening
X Take reset tool 1 out of the Mercedes-Benz literature pouch.
X Guide reset tool 1 into rectangularopening 3 between active head restraintcushion 2 and head restraint cover.
X Press reset tool 1 downward in directionof arrow until you hear the head restraintrelease mechanism audibly engage.
X Pull out reset tool 1.X Firmly press the active head restraint
cushion 2 backward towards the headrestraint cover in direction of arrow until itengages.
X Repeat this procedure for the second frontseat.
X After resetting the active head restraintsstore reset tool 1 in the Mercedes-Benzliterature pouch.
For information on active head restraints, see“Active head restraints” (Y page 60).For information on head restraint adjustment,see “Seats” (Y page 95).
Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey aredischarged, the vehicle can no longer belocked or unlocked. It is recommended tohave the batteries replaced at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.G Warning!Batteries contain poisonous and corrosivesubstances. Therefore, keep the batteriesout of reach of children.If a battery is swallowed, seek medical helpimmediately.
G Warning!SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require specialhandling and regard for the environment.Check with your local government’sdisposal guidelines. California residents,see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Batteries contain materials that can harm theenvironment if disposed of improperly.Recycling of batteries is the preferred methodof disposal. Many states/provinces require
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
347
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries forrecycling.When inserting the batteries, make sure theyare clean and free of lint.When replacing batteries, always replaceboth batteries.
i The required replacement batteries areavailable at any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
Replacement batteries: Lithium, typeCR 2025 or equivalent.X Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (Y page 343).
1 Mechanical key2 Battery compartment
X Insert mechanical key 1 into opening.X Press mechanical key 1 in direction of
arrow.Battery compartment 2 is unlatched.
X Pull battery compartment 2 out of theSmartKey housing.
3 Batteries4 Contact springs
X Pull out batteries 3.X Insert new batteries 3 under contact
springs 4 with the positive terminal (+)side facing up.
X Return battery compartment 2 intoSmartKey housing until it locks into place.
X Slide mechanical key 1 back into theSmartKey.
X Check the operation of the SmartKey aswell as the KEYLESS-GO function.
Practical hints
Z
Replacing bulbs
348
Replacing bulbs
Safety notesSafe vehicle operation depends on properexterior lighting and signaling to a largedegree.Correct headlamp adjustment is extremelyimportant. Have headlamps checked andreadjusted at regular intervals and when abulb has been replaced. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center forheadlamp adjustment.G Warning!Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot.Allow the lamp to cool down beforechanging a bulb.Keep bulbs out of reach of children.Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. Abulb can explode if you:Rtouch or move it when hotRdrop the bulbRscratch the bulbWear eye and hand protection.Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, itis dangerous to replace the bulb or repairthe lamp and its components. We
recommend that you have such work doneby a qualified technician.
G Warning!The bulbs in the tail lamps cannot bereplaced individually. The tail lamp bulbsare under pressure and could explodeduring an attempt to replace them.If the tail lamps are malfunctioning, havethem replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Since replacing bulbs is a technicallyhighly demanding process, we recommendto have them replaced at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
i If the headlamps or front fog lamps arefogged up on the inside as a result of highhumidity, driving the vehicle a distance withthe lights on should clear up the fogging.
Bulbs
Example illustration sedan
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
349
Wagon
Front lamps
Lamp Type
1 Additional turn signallamp
LED
2 Turn signal lamp 3547 A
Lamp Type
3 Halogen headlamp:Low beam
H7 (55 W)
Bi-Xenon headlamp:Low and high beam20
D1S-35 W
4 Side marker lamp W 5 W
5 Halogen headlamp:High beam/high-beamflasher
H7 (55 W)
Bi-Xenon headlamp:High-beam flasher
H7 (55 W)
Halogen headlamp:Parking and standinglamp
W 5 WBlue Vision
Bi-Xenon headlamp:Parking and standinglamp
LED
6 Front fog lamp H11 (55 W)
Corner-illuminatingfront fog lamp
H11 (55 W)
Rear lamps
Lamp Type
7 High-mounted brakelamp
LED
8 Tail lamp HiP
Turn signal lamp HiP
Parking and standinglamp
HiP
Backup lamp HiP
Rear fog lamp (driver’sside only)
HiP
Brake lamp Sedan: HiPor LEDWagon: HiP
9 License plate lamps C 5 W
Notes on bulb replacementROnly use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and
with the specified watt rating.RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
20 Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps: Low beam and high beam use the same D1S-35 W lamp. Do not replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
Z
Replacing bulbs
350
RAlways use a clean lint-free cloth whenhandling bulbs.RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and
grease.RIf the newly installed bulb does not come
on, contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
i Mercedes-Benz recommends usingLonglife (LL) bulbs.
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the followinglamps replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:RAdditional turn signal lamps in the exterior
rear view mirrorsRBi-Xenon lampsRFront fog lampsRFront side marker lampsRParking and standing lamps (vehicles with
Bi-Xenon headlamps only)RRear lamps (except license plate lamps)RHigh-mounted brake lamp
! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. Youcould otherwise damage the LEDs or parts
of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs replacedat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Replacing bulbs for front lampsBefore you start to replace a bulb for a frontlamp, do the following:X Switch off the ignition.X Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionM.
X Open the hood (Y page 241).
1 Housing cover for low-beam halogen or Bi-Xenon headlamp
G Warning!Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenonheadlamp. Because of high voltage inXenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the
bulb or repair the lamp and its components.It is recommended to have such work doneby a qualified technician.
2 Bulb socket for high-beam headlamp/high-beam flasher bulb
3 Bulb socket for parking and standing lampbulb
4 Bulb socket for low-beam headlamp bulb(halogen headlamps only)
5 Bulb socket for front turn signal lamp bulb
Low-beam bulb (halogen headlampsonly)X Turn housing cover 1 counterclockwise
and remove it.X Turn bulb socket 4 with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
351
X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 4.X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
4.X Place bulb socket 4 back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.X Align housing cover 1 and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
High-beam and high-beam flasher bulb(halogen headlamps)/high-beamflasher bulb (Bi-Xenon headlamps)X Turn bulb socket 2 with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 2.X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
2.X Place bulb socket 2 back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
Front turn signal lamp bulbX Turn bulb socket 5 with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.X Gently press onto the bulb and turn it
counterclockwise out of bulb socket 5.
X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket5 and turn it clockwise until it engages.
X Place bulb socket 5 back into the housingand turn it clockwise until it engages.
Parking and standing lamp bulb
Halogen headlampsX Turn bulb socket 3 with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 3.X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
3.X Place bulb socket 3 back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
Bi-Xenon headlampsIn vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps, thebulbs of the parking and standing lamps areLEDs.
! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. Youcould otherwise damage the LEDs or partsof the vehicle. Only have the LEDs replacedat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Tail lamp unitThe tail lamps are equipped with HiP bulbsand LEDs. Have them replaced at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.G Observe Safety notes, see
page 348.
License plate lamps
Example illustration: Sedan1 Screws2 Lamp cover
X Switch off the ignition.X Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionM.
X Open the trunk.
Practical hints
Z
Replacing wiper blades
352
X Loosen screws 1 of lamp cover to beremoved.
X Remove lamp cover 2.X Replace the bulb.X Reinstall lamp cover 2.X Retighten screws 1.
Replacing wiper blades
Safety notes
G Warning!For safety reasons, switch off wipers andremove SmartKey from starter switch(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure thevehicle’s on-board electronics have status0) before replacing a wiper blade.Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenlyturn on and cause injury.
G Warning!Wiper blades are components that aresubject to wear and tear. Replace the wiperblades twice a year, preferably in the springand fall. Otherwise the windows will not beproperly wiped. As a result, you may not beable to observe surrounding trafficconditions and could cause an accident.
! To avoid damage to the hood the frontwiper arms should only be folded forwardwhen in the vertical position.
! Never open the hood when a front wiperarm is folded forward.Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiperarm back. If released, the force of the
impact from the tensioning spring couldcrack the windshield or the rear window(wagon only).Do not allow a wiper arm to contact thewindshield glass or the rear window (wagononly) without a wiper blade inserted.For your convenience, we recommend thatyou have this work carried out at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Placing wiper arms in vertical position
Wiper arms in vertical position
X Make sure the hood is fully closed.
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
353
Vehicles with SmartKeyX Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1.X Turn combination switch to wiper settingu.
X With wiper arms in vertical position, turnthe SmartKey in the starter switch toposition 0.
X Remove the SmartKey from the starterswitch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GOX Turn off the engine.
With the driver’s door closed, the starterswitch is now in position 1.
X Turn combination switch to wiper settingu.
X With wiper arms in vertical position, openthe driver’s door.The starter switch is set to position 0, sameas the SmartKey removed from the starterswitch.
X Turn combination switch to wiper settingM.
Removing wiper blades
Front wiper blades! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
They could tear.
X Fold the wiper arms forward until theyengage.
X Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to thewiper arm.
X Slide the wiper blade sideways out of theretainer.
Rear wiper blade (wagon)! Do not pull on the wiper blade insert. It
could tear.
1 Wiper blade2 Tab3 Attachment4 Removing
X Fold the wiper arm away from the rearwindow until it engages.
X Turn wiper blade 1 at a right angle to wiperarm.
X Press tab 2 down and push wiper blade1 downward in direction of arrow 4.
X Remove wiper blade 1.
Practical hints
Z
Replacing wiper blades
354
Installing wiper blades
Front wiper bladesX Slide the wiper blade onto wiper arm until
it locks in place.X Rotate the wiper blade into position parallel
to the wiper arm.X Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the
windshield.Make sure you hold on to the wiper whenfolding the wiper arm back.
! Make sure the wiper blades are properlyinstalled. Improperly installed wiper bladesmay cause windshield damage.
Rear wiper blade (wagon)
1 Wiper blade2 Tab3 Attachment4 Installing
X Slide wiper blade 1 into attachment 3 indirection of arrow 4.
X Let tab 2 latch into attachment 3 until itlocks in place.
X Check whether the wiper blade is securelyfastened.
X Fold the wiper arm to rest on the rearwindow.Make sure to hold on to the wiper whenfolding the wiper arm back.
! Make sure the wiper blade is properlyinstalled. An improperly installed wiperblade may cause rear window damage.
Practical hints
Flat tire
355
Flat tire
Safety notesYour vehicle may be equipped with:Ra TIREFIT kit (your vehicle does not have a
spare wheel)Ra Minispare wheelRa spare wheel with collapsible tireFor information on your vehicle’s equipment,see “Rims and tires” (Y page 384).G Warning!The dimensions of the spare wheel aredifferent from those of the road wheels. Asa result, the vehicle handlingcharacteristics change when driving with aspare wheel mounted. Adapt your drivingstyle accordingly.The spare wheel is for temporary use only.When driving with spare wheel mounted,ensure proper tire inflation pressure and donot exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph(80 km/h).Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible to have thespare wheel replaced with a regular roadwheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more thanone spare wheel mounted.Do not switch off the ESP® when a sparewheel is mounted.
Preparing the vehicleX Vehicles with AIRMATIC DC:
Make sure the vehicle level is set to normallevel (Y page 172).
X Park the vehicle in a safe distance frommoving traffic on a hard, flat surface whenpossible.
X Turn on the hazard warning flasher.X Turn the steering wheel so that the front
wheels are in a straight-ahead position.X Engage the parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.X Turn off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.orX Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch inposition 0, same as with the SmartKeyremoved from the starter switch). Thedriver’s door can then be closed again.
Open doors only when conditions are safeto do so.
X Have any passenger exit the vehicle at asafe distance from the roadway. Opendoors only when conditions are safe to doso.
Sealing tires with TIREFITThis section applies to E 63 AMG (wagon) withthird-row seat only.Small tire punctures, particularly those in thetread, can be sealed with TIREFIT.TIREFIT can be used in ambient temperaturesdown to -4‡ (-20†).G Warning!TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFITcannot be used for cuts or punctures largerthan approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) and tiredamage caused by driving with extremelylow tire inflation pressure, or on a flat tire,or a damaged wheel.Do not drive the vehicle under suchcircumstances.Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for assistance or call RoadsideAssistance.
Practical hints
Z
Flat tire
356
X Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails)should not be removed from the tire.
X Take the TIREFIT kit, the sticker, and theelectric air pump out of the cargocompartment (Y page 290).
Two-part sticker1 Sticker for instrument cluster2 Sticker for wheelX Attach sticker part 1 where it will be easily
seen by the driver on the instrumentcluster.
X Attach sticker part 2 to the damaged tire(close to the tire valve).G Warning!Take care not to allow the contents ofTIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes
or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled,swallowed or absorbed through the skin -causes skin, eye and respiratory irritation.Any contact with eyes or skin should beflushed immediately with plenty of water.If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,change clothing as soon as possible.In case of allergic reaction or rash, consulta physician immediately.
G Warning!Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. Ifswallowed, rinse mouth immediately withplenty of water and drink plenty of water.Do not induce vomiting!Consult a physician immediately.Keep away from open flame or heat source.
i If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. Youcan then peel it off.If clothing has come in contact withTIREFIT, have it dry-cleaned withperchloroethylene as soon as possible.
G Warning!Observe safety instructions on air pumplabel.
Your vehicle may be equipped with either oftwo versions of the electric air pump:RVersion 1: The air hose with pressure
gauge and the electrical plug are locatedbehind a flap.RVersion 2: The pressure gauge is located
in the pump housing. The air hose andelectrical plug are located at the bottom ofthe pump housing.
The following description applies to bothversions. Differences in usage are expresslydeclared.
Version 11 TIREFIT container2 Notch3 Electric air pump switch4 Electrical plug
Practical hints
Flat tire
357
5 Air hose6 Flange7 Flap
Version 21 TIREFIT container2 Notch3 Electric air pump switch4 Electrical plug5 Air hose6 Flange
X Version 1 only: Open flap 7 on theelectric air pump.
X Pull plug 4 and air hose 5 out of the pumphousing.
X Screw the air pump’s air hose 5 ontoflange 6 of TIREFIT container 1.
X Stick TIREFIT container 1 upside downinto notch 2 of the electric air pump.
8 Filler hose9 Tire valveX Unscrew the valve cap of the damaged tire
from tire valve 9.
Version 1a Vent screwb Pressure gaugeX Version 1 only: Close vent screw a on
pressure gauge b.X Screw filler hose 8 onto tire valve 9.X Insert electrical plug 4 into the cigarette
lighter socket (Y page 223) or a poweroutlet (Y page 224).
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch toposition 1.
orX Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. Donot depress the brake pedal.
Practical hints
Z
Flat tire
358
X Press I on electric air pump switch 3.The electric air pump is switched on andinflates the tire.
i First, the sealing is pumped into the tire.The pressure may briefly rise to up to 73 psi(5 bar). This is normal and not an indicationof a malfunction. Do not switch off theelectric air pump.
X Let the electric air pump inflate the tire forapproximately 5 minutes.The pressure gauge must display at least26 psi (1.8 bar).G Warning!The air hose can become hot duringinflation. Please exercise appropriatecaution.
! Do not operate the electric air pumplonger than 8 minutes without interruption.Otherwise it may overheat.You may operate the air pump again afterit has cooled off.
X If the tire inflation pressure of at least26 psi (1.8 bar) is not attained, turn off theelectric air pump by pressing 0 on electricair pump switch 3.
X Detach filler hose 8 from tire valve 9.
X Drive vehicle back or forth very slowlyapproximately 30 ft (10 m).This serves to better distribute the TIREFITsealant material inside the tire.
X Unscrew the air pump’s air hose 5 fromflange 6 of TIREFIT container 1.
X Screw air hose 5 onto tire valve 9.X Inflate the tire again.G Warning!If a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar)is not attained, the tire is too severelydamaged for TIREFIT to provide a reliabletire repair.In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly sealthe tire.Do not drive the vehicle.Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Centeror call Roadside Assistance.
X After attaining a tire inflation pressure of atleast 26 psi (1.8 bar), press 0 on electric airpump switch 3.The electric air pump is switched off.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch toposition 0.
orX Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice. Donot depress brake pedal.
X Detach the electric air pump.G Warning!The air hose may still be hot. Exerciseproper caution to avoid burning yourselfwhen detaching the electric air pump.
X Place the electric air pump back in thecargo compartment.
X Close the cargo compartment.X Drive off immediately.
The TIREFIT sealant will distribute itselfevenly inside the tire.G Warning!Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph(80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designedto operate at higher speeds.
Practical hints
Flat tire
359
The sticker must be attached on theinstrument cluster where it will be easilyseen by the driver.Vehicle handling characteristics of aTIREFIT repaired tire may change. Adaptyour driving accordingly.
X After driving the vehicle for an initial10 minutes, check the tire inflationpressure using pressure gauge on the airpump.G Warning!If tire inflation pressure has fallen below20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive thevehicle.Park your vehicle safely away from theroadway and contact the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center orRoadside Assistance.Have the damaged tire replaced.
If the tire inflation pressure is at least 20 psi(1.3 bar), inflate or deflate the tire to thecorrect tire inflation pressure (see Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver’sdoor B-pillar):
Version 2a Deflate buttonb Pressure gaugeX To increase tire inflation pressure: Switch
on the electric air pump.X Version 1: To decrease tire inflation
pressure, open vent screw a on pressuregauge b (Y page 357).
orX Version 2: To decrease tire inflation
pressure, press yellow deflate button a
located in air pump housing next topressure gauge b.
G Warning!Follow recommend inflation pressures.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tirescan result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes, etc.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflatedtires wear unevenly, adversely affecthandling and fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified vehicle capacity weight (asindicated by the label on the pillar in thedriver’s door opening). Overloading thetires can overheat them, possibly causing ablowout.
X Drive to the nearest qualified workshop,e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,to have the damaged tire replaced.
X Recommended duration of use: Amaximum of 300 miles (500 km) at 50 mph(80 km/h) or below with the recommendedtire inflation pressure.
Practical hints
Z
Flat tire
360
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter as soon as possible to obtain a newTIREFIT kit.
X Bring used TIREFIT materials to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center forproper disposal.
X Replace your TIREFIT container every4 years. Replacement containers areavailable at any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
Mounting the spare wheel
IntroductionX Prepare the vehicle as described
(Y page 355).X Take the following out of the vehicle:Rspare wheelRjackRwheel wrenchRcollapsible wheel chockRalignment boltRelectric air pump (required for vehicles
with spare wheel with collapsible tireonly)
For information on where to find therespective items, see “Where will Ifind ...?” (Y page 290) and (Y page 293).
Lifting the vehicle
G Warning!When jacking up the vehicle, only use thejack which has been specifically approvedby Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.The jack is designed exclusively for jackingup the vehicle at the jack take-up bracketsbuilt into both sides of the vehicle. Makesure the jack arm is fully seated in the jacktake-up bracket. The jack must always bevertical when in use, especially on inclinesor declines.The jack is intended only for lifting thevehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is notsuited for performing maintenance workunder the vehicle. To help avoid personalinjury, use the jack only to lift the vehicleduring a wheel change.Never get beneath the vehicle while it issupported by the jack. Keep hands and feetaway from the area under the lifted vehicle.Always lower the vehicle onto sufficientcapacity jackstands before working underthe vehicle.
Always firmly set the parking brake andblock the wheels with wheel chocks orother sizeable objects before raising thevehicle with the jack. Do not disengage theparking brake while the vehicle is raised.Make sure that the ground on which thevehicle is standing and where you place thejack is solid, level and not slippery. Ifnecessary, use a large underlay. Onslippery surfaces, such as tiled floors, youshould use a non-slip underlay, for examplea rubber mat.Do not use wooden blocks or similarobjects to support the jack. Otherwise thejack may not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity if it is not at its full height.Never start the engine when the vehicle israised.Also observe the notes on the jack.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byblocking wheels with wheel chocks or othersizeable objects.One wheel chock is included with thevehicle tool kit (Y page 290). Forinformation on setting up the collapsiblewheel chock, see (Y page 292).
Practical hints
Flat tire
361
When changing wheel on a level surface:X Place the wheel chock in front of and
another wheel chock or other sizeableobject behind the wheel that is diagonallyopposite to the wheel being changed.
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack ona level surface. However, shouldcircumstances require you to do so on a hill,place the wheel chock and another sizeableobject as follows:X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable
objects on the downhill side blocking bothwheels of the axle not being worked on.G Warning!Only jack up the vehicle on level ground oron slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, thevehicle could fall off the jack and injure youor others.
1 Wheel wrench
X On wheel to be changed, loosen but do notyet remove the wheel bolts (approximatelyone full turn with wrench 1).
The jack take-up brackets are located directlybehind the front wheel housings and in frontof the rear wheel housings.G Warning!The jack is designed exclusively for jackingup the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets.Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in thejack take-up bracket.If you do not position the jack correctly inthe jack take-up bracket, the vehicle canfall off the jack and seriously or fatally injureyou or others.
! Do not position the jack on the body ofthe vehicle, as this may cause damage tothe vehicle.
2 Take-up bracket3 Jack4 Crank
X Place jack 3 on firm ground.X Position jack 3 under take-up bracket
2 so that it is always vertical as seen fromthe side, even if the vehicle is parked on anincline.
Practical hints
Z
Flat tire
362
X Turn crank 4 clockwise until jack 3 isfully seated in take-up bracket 2 and thejack base evenly meets the ground.
X Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is amaximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
Removing the wheel
1 Alignment bolt
X Unscrew uppermost wheel bolt and removeit.
X Replace this wheel bolt with alignment bolt1 supplied with the vehicle tool kit.
X Remove the remaining bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.This could result in damage to the wheelbolts and wheel hub threads.
X Remove the wheel.
Attaching the spare wheel
G Warning!Vehicles with spare wheel with collapsibletire only: Inflate collapsible tire only afterthe wheel is properly attached.Inflate the collapsible tire using the electricair pump before lowering the vehicle.
G Warning!Always replace wheel bolts that aredamaged or rusted.Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.Damaged wheel hub threads should berepaired immediately. Do not continue todrive under these circumstances! Contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center orcall Roadside Assistance.Incorrect wheel bolts or improperlytightened wheel bolts can cause the wheelto come off. This could cause an accident.Be sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
G Warning!Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheelbolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose.Do not tighten the wheel bolts when thevehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehiclecould fall off the jack.
Practical hints
Flat tire
363
X Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheelhub.
! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flatagainst hub and hold it there whileinstalling first wheel bolt.
X Guide the spare wheel onto the alignmentbolt and push it on.
X Insert the wheel bolts and tighten themslightly.
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Install last wheel bolt and tighten it slightly.X Vehicles with spare wheel with
collapsible tire: Continue the procedureby following the instructions under“Inflating the collapsible
tire” (Y page 363) and then “Lowering thevehicle” (Y page 365).
orX Vehicles with Minispare wheel: Continue
the procedure by following the instructionsunder “Lowering thevehicle” (Y page 365).
Inflating the collapsible tire
G Warning!Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheelis properly attached.Inflate the collapsible tire using the electricair pump before lowering the vehicle.
G Warning!Observe safety instructions on air pumplabel.
! Do not lower the vehicle before inflatingthe collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim maybe damaged.
Your vehicle may be equipped with either oftwo versions of the electric air pump:RVersion 1: The air hose with pressure
gauge and the electrical plug are locatedbehind a flap.RVersion 2: The pressure gauge is located
in the pump housing. The air hose andelectrical plug are located at the bottom ofthe pump housing.
The following description applies to bothversions. Differences in usage are expresslydeclared.
Version 11 Flap2 Air pump switch3 Electrical plug
Practical hints
Z
Flat tire
364
4 Air hose with pressure gauge and ventscrew
5 Union nut
Version 22 Air pump switch3 Electrical plug4 Pressure gauge5 Union nut6 Deflate button
X Version 1 only: Open flap 1 on electricair pump.
X Version 1 only: Pull out electrical plug3 and air hose with pressure gauge 4.
X Version 2 only: Pull electrical plug 3 andthe air hose out of the pump housingbottom.
X Version 1 only: Close vent screw on airhose 4.
X Remove the valve cap from the collapsibletire valve.
X Screw union nut 5 onto the collapsible tirevalve.
X Make sure air pump switch 2 is set to 0.X Insert electrical plug 3 into the cigarette
lighter socket (Y page 223) or a poweroutlet (Y page 224).
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch toposition 1.
orX Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gearselector lever once. Do not depress thebrake pedal.
X Press I on electric air pump switch 2.The electric air pump switches on andinflates the collapsible tire.
X Inflate the collapsible tire to therecommended tire inflation pressure asspecified for your vehicle (Y page 389).This should take approximately 5 minutes.G Warning!The air hose and the union nut can becomehot during inflation. Exercise proper
caution to avoid burning yourself whenusing the equipment.
! Do not operate the electric air pumplonger than 8 minutes without interruption.Otherwise it may overheat.You may operate the air pump again afterit has cooled off.
! Compare the recommended tire inflationpressure for your vehicle with the tireinflation pressure on the yellow labellocated on the spare wheel rim.If the tire inflation pressure on the yellowlabel on the spare wheel rim differs fromthe values given in this Operator’s Manual,inflate the tire to the recommended tireinflation pressure given on the yellow labelon the spare wheel rim.
X Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2.X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.orX Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gearselector lever twice. Do not depress thebrake pedal.
Practical hints
Flat tire
365
X Version 1 only: If the tire inflation pressureis above the recommended tire inflationpressure as specified for your vehicle(Y page 389), decrease tire pressure usingthe vent screw on air hose 4.
X Version 2 only: If the tire inflation pressureis above the recommended tire inflationpressure as specified for your vehicle(Y page 389), decrease tire pressure usingdeflate button 6.
G Warning!Follow recommend inflation pressures.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tirescan result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes, etc.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflatedtires wear unevenly, adversely affecthandling and fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.
X Detach the electric air pump.X Reinstall collapsible tire valve cap.X Version 1 only: Store electrical plug 3
and air hose 4 behind flap 1 and placethe electric air pump back in its designatedstorage space.
X Version 2 only: Store electrical plug 3and the air hose back into the pumphousing bottom.
X Place the electric air pump back in itsdesignated storage space.
X Lower the vehicle.
Lowering the vehicle
G Warning!Vehicles with spare wheel with collapsibletire only: Inflate collapsible tire only afterthe wheel is properly attached.Inflate the collapsible tire using the electricair pump before lowering the vehicle.
X Lower the vehicle by turning crankcounterclockwise until the vehicle isresting fully on its own weight.
X Remove the jack.
1 – 5 Wheel bolts
X Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,following the diagonal sequence illustrated(1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. Observea tightening torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).G Warning!Have the tightening torque checked afterchanging a wheel. The wheels could comeloose if they are not tightened to a torqueof 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
X Fully collapse the jack, with handle foldedin (storage position), see (Y page 292).
X Store the jack and the other vehicle toolsin the designated storage space.
For information on storing the spare wheelafter it has been replaced by a regular roadwheel, see (Y page 293).
Practical hints
Z
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel engine only)
366
i Vehicles with spare wheel:Some tire sizes do not allow the damagedroad wheel to be stored in the spare wheelwell in the trunk/cargo compartment. Itshould then be transported in the trunk/cargo compartment wrapped in theprotective film/bag that comes with thespare wheel.
i Vehicles with TPMS or Advanced TPMS:Do not restart the tire inflation pressuremonitor until a full size wheel/tire withfunctioning sensor has been placed backinto service on the vehicle.
Bleeding the fuel system (dieselengine only)
Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is emptyis not recommended. Otherwise, air may besucked into the fuel system. If this happens,the malfunction indicator lamp ú (USAonly) or ± (Canada only) comes on and theengine may not start immediately afterrefueling the vehicle.After refueling:X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.X Do not depress the accelerator.X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 2 for at least 10 seconds.X Return the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0.X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 3 and hold it there for a maximumof 40 seconds or until the engine runssurge-free.
If the engine does not start:X Wait for approximately 2 minutes.X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 3 and hold it there for a maximumof 40 seconds or until the engine runssurge-free.
If the engine still does not start, do not makeany further attempts to start the engine.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeror call Roadside Assistance (Y page 226).
i When the malfunction indicator lampú (USA only) or ± (Canada only) inthe instrument cluster has been illuminatedfor the above condition, it will remainilluminated until the engine was cycled onand off four times in a row.
Practical hints
Battery
367
Battery
Safety notesA battery should always be sufficientlycharged in order to achieve its rated servicelife. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for batterymaintenance intervals.If you use your vehicle mostly for short-distance trips, you will need to have thebattery charge checked more frequently.When replacing a battery, always use abattery approved by Mercedes-Benz.If you do not intend to operate your vehiclefor an extended period of time, contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center aboutsteps you need to observe.G Warning!Observe all safety instructions andprecautions when handling automotivebatteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames andsmoking are prohibitedwhen handling batteries.Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Donot allow it to come intocontact with skin, eyes orclothing.Wear suitable protectiveclothing, especiallygloves, apron andfaceguard.Wear eye protection.Rinse any acid spillsimmediately with clearwater. Contact aphysician if necessary.Keep children away.
Follow the instructions inthis Operator’s Manual.
Batteries contain materials that can harm theenvironment if disposed of improperly. Large12-volt storage batteries contain lead.Recycling of batteries is the preferred methodof disposal. Many states (USA only) orprovinces (Canada only) require sellers ofbatteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
G Warning!Failure to follow these instructions canresult in severe injury or death.Never lean over batteries while connecting.You might get injured.Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do notallow this fluid to come in contact witheyes, skin or clothing. In case it does,immediately flush affected area with waterand seek medical help if necessary.A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,which is flammable and explosive. Keepflames or sparks away from battery, avoidimproper connection of jumper cables,smoking etc.
G Warning!Do not place metal objects on the batteryas this could result in a short circuit.Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid therisk of acid burns in the event of anaccident.Take care that you do not become staticallycharged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothingor rubbing against textiles. For this reason,you also should not pull or push the batteryover carpets or other synthetic materials.
Practical hints
Z
Battery
368
Never touch the battery first. First touchthe outside body of the vehicle in order torelease any possible electrostatic charges.Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths.The battery could explode if touched due toelectrostatic charge or due to sparkformation.
! The battery is a Valve-Regulated LeadAcid (VRLA) battery, also referred to as“fleece” battery.Such batteries do not require topping-up ofthe electrolyte level. VRLA batteriestherefore do not have cell caps and thebattery cover is non-removable. Do notattempt to open the battery as otherwisethe battery will be damaged.Even though VRLA batteries do not requiretopping-up of the electrolyte level andcannot be opened to check the electrolytelevel, the battery condition must bechecked periodically by performing abattery conductance test. Refer toMaintenance Booklet for battery conditiontesting intervals.The factory-equipped VRLA battery is leak-proofed. Only use a battery as replacementthat has the same security features and is
of identical size, voltage, and capacity asthe factory-equipped battery.
! As with any other battery, have thebattery disconnect at a qualified workshopor an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center ifyou do not intend to operate your vehiclefor an extended period of time to preventbattery discharge. You may also connect anaccessory battery charge unit expresslyapproved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle model to maintain the batterycharge. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.The battery, the battery ventilation hoseand the lateral plug must always besecurely installed when the vehicle is inoperation.
! Never loosen or detach battery terminalclamps while the engine is running or theSmartKey is in the starter switch orKEYLESS-GO button is in position 1.Otherwise the alternator and otherelectronic components could be severelydamaged.Have the battery checked regularly at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Refer to Maintenance Booklet formaintenance intervals or contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forfurther information.
i After battery power was interrupted, dothe following:RSynchronize the power windows
(Y page 122).RSynchronize the tilt/sliding sunroof
(Y page 196) or the tilt/sliding panel(Y page 199).
Charging the battery
G Warning!Never charge a battery while still installedin the vehicle unless the accessory batterycharge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz isbeing used. Gases may escape duringcharging and cause explosions that mayresult in paint damage, corrosion orpersonal injury.An accessory battery charge unit speciallyadapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles andtested and approved by Mercedes-Benz isavailable, permitting the charging of thebattery in its installed position. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center forinformation and availability.
Practical hints
Jump starting
369
Charge battery in accordance with theseparate instructions for the accessorybattery charger.
Have batteries charged at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. If you charge thebatteries yourself, follow the operatinginstructions for your charging device.Only use a battery charge unit with amaximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.X Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery chargermanufacturer.
Jump starting
G Warning!Failure to follow these directions will causedamage to the electronic components, andcan lead to a battery explosion and severeinjury or death.Never lean over batteries while connectingor jump starting. You might get injured.Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do notallow this fluid to come in contact witheyes, skin or clothing. In case it does,immediately flush affected area with water,and seek medical help if necessary.A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,which is flammable and explosive. Keepflames or sparks away from battery, avoidimproper connection of jumper cables,smoking, etc.Attempting to jump start a frozen batterycan result in it exploding, causing personalinjury.Read all instructions before proceeding.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle. You couldotherwise seriously damage the automatic
transmission which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Jump starting should only be performedusing the jump-start terminals located inthe engine compartment (wagon).Avoid repeated and lengthy startingattempts.Do not attempt to start the engine using abattery quick-charge unit.If the engine does not run after severalunsuccessful starting attempts, have itchecked at the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Excessive unburned fuel generated byrepeated failed starting attempts maydamage the catalytic converter21 and maypresent a fire risk.Make sure the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation.Make sure the cable clamps do not touchany other metal part while the other end isstill attached to a battery.
21 Vehicles with gasoline engine only.
Practical hints
Z
Jump starting
370
If the battery is discharged, the engine can bestarted with jumper cables and the fullycharged battery of another vehicle or anequivalent starter pack. Observe thefollowing:RAccess to the battery is not possible on all
vehicles. If you cannot access the batteryin your vehicle provide jump start power byan external battery or starter pack.RJump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter22
are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.ROnly jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump startingwith a more powerful battery could damagethe vehicle’s electrical system, which willnot be covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.ROnly use jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminalclamps.RAlways make sure the jumper cables are
not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
that move when an engine is started orrunning.RShould the battery be drained completely,
let the donating power source charge thevehicle for several minutes beforereattempting the starting process.
X Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Engage the parking brake.X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
SedanThe battery is located in the trunk underneaththe luggage box (Y page 294).X Open the trunk.
1 Positive terminal of discharged battery2 Negative terminal of discharged battery3 Positive terminal of charged battery4 Negative terminal of charged battery
! Never invert the terminal connections!
X Connect positive terminals 1 and 3 ofthe batteries with a jumper cable. Clampthe cable to positive terminal 3 of thecharged battery first.
X Start engine of the vehicle with the chargedbattery and run at idle speed.
X Connect negative terminals 4 and 2 ofthe batteries with a jumper cable. Clampthe cable to negative terminal 4 of thecharged battery first.
22 Vehicles with gasoline engine only.
Practical hints
Jump starting
371
X Start engine of the vehicle with thedischarged battery and run at idle speed.You can now turn on the electricalconsumers. Do not switch on theheadlamps under any circumstances.
X Remove the jumper cables first fromnegative terminals 2 and 4 and thenfrom positive terminals 1 and 3.You can now switch on the headlamps.
X Have the battery checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
WagonThe jump-start terminals are located in theengine compartment on the right hand side.X Open the hood.
1 Negative terminal2 Cover of positive terminal
! Never invert the terminal connections!
X Open cover of the positive terminal 2.X Connect positive terminal of the charged
battery with positive terminal 2 with ajumper cable. Clamp the cable to positiveterminal of the charged battery first.
X Start engine of the vehicle with the chargedbattery and run at idle speed.
X Connect negative terminal of the chargedbattery with negative terminal 1 with ajumper cable. Clamp the cable to negativeterminal 1 of the charged battery first.
X Start engine of the vehicle with thedischarged battery and run at idle speed.You can now turn on the electricalconsumers. Do not switch on theheadlamps under any circumstances.
X Remove the jumper cables first fromnegative terminals and then from positiveterminals.You can now switch on the headlamps.
X Have the battery checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
Z
Towing the vehicle
372
Towing the vehicle
Safety notesMercedes-Benz recommends that the vehiclebe transported with all wheels off the groundusing flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dollyequipment. This method is preferable to othertypes of towing.
! To prevent damage during transport, donot tie down vehicle by its chassis orsuspension parts.
If circumstances do not permit therecommended towing methods, the vehiclemay be towed with all wheels on the groundor front axle raised (except vehicles with4MATIC) only so far as necessary to have thevehicle moved to a safe location where therecommended towing methods can beemployed.
! Before towing the vehicle observe thefollowing instructions:RDo not tow-start the vehicle. You could
otherwise seriously damage theautomatic transmission which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.RDo not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment overbumpy roads will damage radiator andsupports.RTowing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed towingeye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, towrope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis,frame or suspension parts.
i If the battery is disconnected ordischargedRthe SmartKey will not turn in the starter
switchRthe automatic transmission will remain in
park position PRFor more information see
“Battery” (Y page 367) or “Jumpstarting” (Y page 369).RFor information on manually unlocking
the gear selector lever, see(Y page 345)
Installing towing eye boltDepending on whether you are towing avehicle or you are being towed, the towing eyebolt can be screwed into threaded holeswhich are located behind covers on eachbumper.The towing eye bolt is supplied with thevehicle tool kit, located in the storagecompartment underneath the trunk/cargocompartment floor (Y page 290).X Take the vehicle tool kit out of the trunk/
cargo compartment.
Removing cover in front bumper
1 Cover
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
373
X Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by thearrow.
X Lift cover 1 off to reveal the threaded holefor the towing eye bolt.
Removing cover in rear bumper
G Warning!In order to avoid possible serious burns orinjury, use extreme caution when removingthe rear cover, because the rear exhaustpipe is extremely hot.
1 Cover
X Press on cover 1 as indicated by thearrow.
X Fold cover 1 down to reveal the threadedhole for the towing eye bolt.
Fixing towing eye bolt
Example illustration front bumper1 Towing eye bolt
X Take the towing eye bolt and the wheelwrench from the vehicle tool kit.
X Screw towing eye bolt 1 clockwise intothreaded hole to its stop.
X Insert wheel wrench into towing eye andtighten towing eye bolt 1 by turning itclockwise.
Removing towing eye boltX Loosen towing eye bolt 1
counterclockwise with wheel wrench.X Unscrew towing eye bolt 1.X Reinstalling cover: Fit cover 1
(Y page 372) and snap it into place.X Store the towing eye bolt and wheel wrench
back into the vehicle tool kit.
Towing with all wheels on the ground
G Warning!If circumstances require towing the vehiclewith all wheels on the ground, always towwith a tow bar if:Rthe engine will not runRthere is a malfunction in the brake
systemRthere is a malfunction in the power
supply or in the vehicle’s electricalsystem
This is necessary to adequately control thetowed vehicle.
Practical hints
Z
Towing the vehicle
374
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheelson the ground, make sure the SmartKey isin starter switch position 2.If the SmartKey is left in the starter switchposition 0 for an extended period of time,it can no longer be turned in the switch. Inthis case, the steering is locked. To unlock,remove SmartKey from starter switch andreinsert.
G Warning!With the engine not running, there is nopower assistance for the brake andsteering systems. In this case, it isimportant to keep in mind that aconsiderably higher degree of effort isnecessary to brake and steer the vehicle.Adapt your driving accordingly.
X Make sure the ignition is switched on.X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and keep it pressed.X Shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N.X Release the brake pedal.X If engaged, release the parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
(Y page 114).
! The vehicle may be towed only fordistances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at aspeed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
i To signal turns while being towed with thehazard warning flasher in use you canactivate the combination switch for the leftor right turn signal in the usual manner –only the selected turn signal will operate.Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazardwarning flasher will operate again.
Towing with front axle raised! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Do not tow with
the front axle raised. Doing so coulddamage the transfer case, which is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.All wheels must be on or off the ground.Observe instructions for towing the vehiclewith all wheels on the ground.
When towing the vehicle with the front axleraised, the wheels on the ground have tomove freely.X Make sure the ignition is switched on.X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
X Shift the automatic transmission intoneutral position N.
X Release the brake pedal.X If engaged, release the parking brake.X Switch off the automatic central locking
(Y page 155).X Switch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the starter switch.X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
(Y page 114).
! Vehicles without 4MATIC:Because the ESP® operates automatically,the engine and ignition must be shut off(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button inposition 0 or 1) when the vehicle is beingtowed with the front axle raised.Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brakesystem which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! The vehicle may be towed only fordistances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at aspeed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Practical hints
Fuses
375
Fuses
IntroductionThe electrical fuses in your vehicle serve toswitch off malfunctioning power circuits.If a fuse is blown, the components andsystems secured by that fuse will stopoperating.G Warning!Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benzwith the specified amperage for the systemin question and do not attempt to repair orbridge a blown fuse. Using other thanapproved fuses or using repaired or bridgedfuses may cause an overload leading to afire, and/or cause damage to electricalcomponents and/or systems. Have thecause determined and remedied by anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
A blown fuse must be replaced by anappropriate spare fuse (recognizable by itscolor or the fuse rating given on the fuse) ofthe amperage recommended in the fusechart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be gladto advise you on this subject.
i In case of a blown fuse contact RoadsideAssistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have thecause determined and rectified by anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.A fuse chart is located in the fuse box in thepassenger compartment. The fuse chartexplains the fuse allocation and fuseamperages.
Before replacing fusesX Engage the parking brake.X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch inposition 0, same as with the SmartKeyremoved from the starter switch). Thedriver’s door then can be closed again.
Fuse box in passenger compartment! Do not use sharp objects such as a
screwdriver to open the fuse box cover inthe dashboard. You could damage the fusebox cover or the dashboard.
1 Fuse box cover2 Recess in the cover
X Open the driver’s door.X Insert flat, blunt object as a lever in recess
2 on the edge of cover 1.X Loosen cover 1 from the dashboard using
the lever.X Using your hands, pull cover 1 in direction
of arrow and remove it.
Practical hints
Z
Fuses
376
X Closing: Hook cover 1 into the opening atthe front.
X Press cover 1 back on until it engages.
! The fuse box cover must be properlypositioned as described to preventmoisture or dirt from entering the fuse boxand possibly impairing fuse operation.
Fuse box in trunk (sedan)Fuse box cover design may vary depending onvehicle equipment.
Cover with turn catches shown1 Catches2 Cover
X Open the trunk.
Opening cover (with turn catches)X Turn catches 1 counterclockwise and
remove cover 2.
Closing cover (with turn catches)X Install cover 2.X Turn catches 1 clockwise.
Opening cover (without turn catches)X Hold cover 2 at recess, press cover 2
slightly together to release tabs frombehind trim panel and then pull off cover2.
Closing cover (without turn catches)X Install cover 2 with tabs on one side of
trim panel, then press cover 2 slightlytogether to install cover 2 on other side oftrim panel.
Fuse box in cargo compartment
1 Button for unlocking trim panel2 Trim panel
X Opening: Open the cargo compartment.X Press button 1.X Fold down trim panel 2.X Closing: Fold up trim panel 2.
Practical hints
377
Vehicle equipment ............................ 378Parts service ..................................... 378Warranty coverage ........................... 378Identification labels .......................... 379Engine ................................................ 381Rims and tires ................................... 384Electrical system .............................. 390Main dimensions ............................... 391Weights .............................................. 393Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. ....... 394
Technical data
Warranty coverage
378
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes allfeatures, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.
Parts service
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersmaintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-BenzParts required for maintenance and repairwork. In addition, strategically located partsdistribution centers provide quick andreliable parts service.More than 300 000 different parts forMercedes-Benz models are available.Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjectedto stringent quality inspections. Each part hasbeen specifically developed, manufactured orselected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benzvehicles.Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Partsshould be installed.
! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benzparts and accessories not authorized byMercedes-Benz. Doing so could damagethe vehicle, which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, itcould compromise the vehicle’s durabilityor safety.
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Car Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island, and Vermont EmissionControl Systems Warranty23
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (LemonLaws)
Replacement parts and accessories arecovered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts andAccessories warranties, copies of which areavailable at any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
23 Applicable to vehicles with gasoline engine only.
Technical data
Identification labels
379
Loss of Service and WarrantyInformation booklet
Should you lose your Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center arrange for areplacement. It will be mailed to you.
Identification labels
1 Certification label (on driver’s doorB-pillar)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) canbe found in the following locations:Ron the certification labelRembossed underneath a cover in the front
passenger footwell (Y page 380)Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 380)
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)2 VIN3 Paintwork code
Example certification label (Canada vehicles)2 VIN3 Paintwork code
Technical data
Z
Identification labels
380
i Data shown on certification label are forillustration purposes only. These data arespecific to each vehicle and may vary fromdata shown in the illustration. Refer tocertification label on vehicle for actual dataspecific to your vehicle.
4 Cover5 VIN
X Move the front passenger seat backwardas far as possible (Y page 96).
X Fold cover 4 backward.VIN 5 is now visible.
6 Emission control information label,includes both federal and Californiacertification exhaust emission standards
7 VIN (on lower edge of windshield)8 Engine number (engraved on engine)
i When ordering parts, please specifyvehicle identification and engine number.
Technical data
Engine
381
Engine
Model E 320 BlueTEC (211.022)24 E 300 4MATIC (211.092)24,25 E 350 (211.056)24,26
E 350 4MATIC (211.087, 211.287)24
Engine 642 272 272
Mode of operation Diesel 4-stroke engine 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 6 6
Bore 3.27 in (83.00 mm) 3.46 in (88.00 mm) 3.66 in (92.90 mm)
Stroke 3.62 in (92.00 mm) 3.23 in (82.10 mm) 3.39 in (86.00 mm)
Total pistondisplacement
182.3 cu in (2 987 cm3) 182.9 cu in (2 996 cm3) 213.5 cu in (3 498 cm3)
Compression ratio 16.5:1 11.3:1 10.7:1
Output acc. toSAE J 1349
209 hp/3 400 rpm(156 kW/3 400 rpm)
228 hp/6 000 rpm(170 kW/6 000 rpm)27
268 hp/6 000 rpm(200 kW/6 000 rpm)27
Maximum torque acc.to SAE J 1349
400 lb-ft/1 600 rpm - 2 400 rpm(543 Nm/1 600 rpm - 2 400 rpm)
221 lb-ft/2 500 rpm - 5 000 rpm(300 Nm/2 500 rpm - 5 000 rpm)
258 lb-ft/2 400 rpm - 5 000 rpm(350 Nm/2 400 rpm - 5 000 rpm)
Maximum enginespeed
4 500 rpm 6 500 rpm 6 500 rpm
24 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.25 Canada only.26 USA only.27 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
Technical data
Z
Engine
382
Model E 320 BlueTEC (211.022)24 E 300 4MATIC (211.092)24,25 E 350 (211.056)24,26
E 350 4MATIC (211.087, 211.287)24
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-4-3-6-2-5
Poly-V-belt 2 035 mm 2 404 mm 2 404 mm
Technical data
Engine
383
Model E 550 (211.072)28,29
E 550 4MATIC (211.090)28E 63 AMG (211.077, 211.27729)28
Engine 273 156
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 8 8
Bore 3.86 in (98.00 mm) 4.02 in (102.20 mm)
Stroke 3.56 in (90.50 mm) 3.72 in (94.60 mm)
Total piston displacement 333.3 cu in (5 461 cm3) 378.8 cu in (6 208 cm3)
Compression ratio 10.7:1 11.3:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 382 hp/6 000 rpm (285 kW/6 000 rpm)30 507 hp/6 800 rpm (378 kW/6 800 rpm)30
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 391 lb-ft/2 800 rpm - 4 800 rpm(530 Nm/2 800 rpm - 4 800 rpm)
465 lb-ft/5 200 rpm (630 Nm/5 200 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6 500 rpm 7 200 rpm
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2 404 mm 2 360 mm
28 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.29 USA only.30 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
Technical data
Z
Rims and tires
384
Rims and tires
Notes! Only use tires which have been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tiresapproved by Mercedes-Benz are developedto provide best possible performance inconjunction with the driving safety systemson your vehicle such as the ABS or theESP®. Tires specially developed for yourvehicle and tested and approved byMercedes-Benz can be identified by findingthe following on the tire’s sidewall:RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
equipment tiresUsing tires other than those approved byMercedes-Benz may result in damage thatis not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.
! Using tires other than those approved byMercedes-Benz can have detrimentaleffects, such asRpoor handling characteristicsRincreased noiseRincreased fuel consumptionMoreover, tires and rims not approved byMercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit
dimensional variations and different tiredeformation characteristics that couldcause them to come into contact with thevehicle body or axle parts. Damage to thetires or the vehicle may be the result.
i Further information on tires and rims isavailable at any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. A placard with the recommendedtire inflation pressures is located on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles mayhave supplemental tire inflation pressureinformation for driving at high speeds or forvehicle loads less than the maximumloaded vehicle condition. If suchinformation is provided, it can be found onthe placard located on the inside of the fuelfiller flap. The tire inflation pressure shouldbe checked regularly and should only beadjusted on cold tires. Follow tiremanufacturer’s maintenancerecommendation included with the vehicle.
For information on recommended tireinflation pressure and supplemental tireinflation pressure information for specialdriving situations, see (Y page 253).
i The following pages also list the approvedwheel rim and tire sizes for equipping yourvehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are
not available as standard or optionalfactory equipment, but can be purchasedfrom an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Equipping your vehicle with winter tiresapproved for your vehicle model mayrequire the purchase of two or four wheelrims of the recommended size for use withthese winter tires. This depends on vehiclemodel and the standard or optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire configuration onyour vehicle. For more information contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Technical data
Rims and tires
385
Same size tires
Sedan
Model E 320 BlueTEC E 35031
E 350 4MATIC31E 300 4MATIC32
Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 16 H2 8.5 J x 17 H2 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.42 in (36 mm) 1.5 in (38 mm) 1.5 in (38 mm)
All season tires33 225/55 R16 95H M+S 245/45 R17 95H M+S 245/40 R18 93V M+S
Winter tires33,34 225/55 R16 95H M+S. 245/45 R17 99V XL (Extra Load)M+S.
245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S.
31 USA only.32 Canada only.33 Radial-ply tires.34 Not available as factory equipment.
Technical data
Z
Rims and tires
386
Model E 350 (AMG Sport Package)35
E 55035
E 63 AMGE 63 AMG (Performance Package)
E 350 4MATIC36
E 350 4MATIC (AMG Sport Package)35
E 550 4MATIC
AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.5 in (38 mm) 1.5 in (38 mm)
All-season tires37 — 245/40 R18 93V M+S
Winter tires37,38 245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S. 245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S.
35 USA only.36 Canada only.37 Radial-ply tires.38 Not available as factory equipment.
Technical data
Rims and tires
387
Wagon
Model E 350 4MATIC E 63 AMG39
Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 17 H2 —
AMG rims (light alloy) — 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.5 in (38 mm) 1.5 in (38 mm)
All-season tires40 245/45 R17 95H M+S —
Winter tires40,41 245/45 R17 99V XL (Extra Load) M+S. 245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S.42
39 USA only.40 Radial-ply tires.41 Not available as factory equipment.42 Permissible vehicle speed of max. 137 mph (220 km/h).
Technical data
Z
Rims and tires
388
Mixed size tires
Model E 350 (AMG Sport Package)43
E 55043E 63 AMG E 63 AMG
(Performance Package)
Frontaxle
AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2 8.5 J x 18 H2 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.5 in (38 mm) 1.5 in (38 mm) 1.5 in (38 mm)
Summer tires44 — 245/40 ZR18 245/40 ZR18
All-season tires44 245/40 R18 93V M+S — —
Rearaxle
AMG rims (light alloy) 9 J x 18 H2 9 J x 18 H2 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.54 in (39 mm) 1.54 in (39 mm) 1.73 in (44 mm)
Summer tires44,45 — 265/35 ZR18 XL (Extra Load) 265/35 ZR18 XL (Extra Load)
All-season tires44,45 265/35 R18 97V XL (Extra Load)M+S
— —
43 USA only.44 Radial-ply tires.45 Must not be used with snow chains.
Technical data
Rims and tires
389
Spare wheel
! Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on the sparewheel rim.If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate thetire to the recommended tire inflation pressure given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel differs from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires.
i The E 63 AMG wagon with folding third-row seat does not have a spare wheel. It is equipped with TIREFIT (Y page 355).
Model All (except E 63 AMG) E 63 AMG
Rim 4 B x 17 6 B x 18
Wheel offset 1.34 in (34 mm) 0.98 in (25 mm)
Minispare tire46 T 155/70 R17 110 M —
Collapsible tire46 — 175/55-18 95P
Recommended tire inflation pressure 61 psi (4.2 bar) 51 psi (3.5 bar)
46 Must not be used with snow chains.
Technical data
Z
Electrical system
390
Electrical system
Model E 320 BlueTEC E 300 4MATIC47 E 350 (all models) E 550 (all models) E 63 AMG
Alternator 14 V/180 A 14 V/180 A 14 V/180 A 14 V/180 A 14 V/180 A
Startermotor
12 V/2.0 kW 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/1.4 kW 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/2.1 kW
Battery 12 V/100 Ah 12 V/100 Ah 12 V/100 Ah 12 V/100 Ah 12 V/95 Ah
Sparkplugs
Type — Bosch Platin Y 7 MPP33 Bosch Platin Y 7 MPP33NGK PLKR 6A
Bosch F8 DPP 332UNGK PFR 5R-11
NGK ILZKAR 7A10
Electrodegap
— 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tighteningtorque
— 15 lb-ft - 18 lb-ft(20 Nm - 25 Nm)
15 lb-ft - 22 lb-ft(20 Nm - 30 Nm)
18 lb-ft - 22 lb-ft(25 Nm - 30 Nm)
15 lb-ft - 18 lb-ft(20 Nm - 25 Nm)
47 Canada only.
Technical data
Main dimensions
391
Main dimensions
Model E 320 BlueTEC E 300 4MATIC48 E 35049 E 350 4MATIC
Overall vehicle length Sedan 191.0 in (4 852 mm) 191.0 in (4 852 mm) 191.0 in (4 852 mm) 191.0 in (4 852 mm)
Wagon — — — 192.3 in (4 884 mm)
Overall vehicle width 81.2 in (2 063 mm) 81.2 in (2 063 mm) 81.2 in (2 063 mm) 81.2 in (2 063 mm)
Overall vehicle height Sedan 58.4 in (1 484 mm) 59.0 in (1 498 mm) 58.4 in (1 484 mm) 59.0 in (1 499 mm)
Wagon — — — 59.4 in (1 509 mm)
Wheelbase 112.4 in (2 854 mm) 112.4 in (2 854 mm) 112.4 in (2 854 mm) 112.4 in (2 854 mm)
Track, front 61.3 in (1 557 mm) 61.6 in (1 565 mm) 61.7 in (1 567 mm) 61.6 in (1 565 mm)
Track, rear 61.1 in (1 552 mm) 61.4 in (1 560 mm) 61.4 in (1 560 mm) 61.4 in (1 560 mm)
48 Canada only.49 USA only.
Technical data
Z
Main dimensions
392
Model E 55050 E 550 4MATIC E 63 AMG
Overall vehicle length Sedan 191.0 in (4 852 mm) 191.0 in (4 852 mm) 192.2 in (4 881 mm)
Wagon50 — — 193.7 in (4 919 mm)
Overall vehicle width 81.2 in (2 063 mm) 81.2 in (2 063 mm) 81.2 in (2 063 mm)
Overall vehicle height Sedan 57.7 in (1 465 mm) 58.1 in (1 475 mm) 56.3 in (1 431 mm)
Wagon50 — — 58.5 in (1 485 mm)
Wheelbase 112.4 in (2 854 mm) 112.4 in (2 854 mm) 112.4 in (2 854 mm)
Track, front 61.7 in (1 567 mm) 61.6 in (1 565 mm) 61.1 in (1 551 mm)
Track, rear 61.4 in (1 560 mm) 61.4 in (1 560 mm) 61.4 in (1 560 mm)
50 USA only.
Technical data
Weights
393
Weights
Model All models
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Technical data
Z
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
394
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
CapacitiesVehicle components and their respectivelubricants must match. Therefore only useproducts tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
For information on tested and approvedproducts, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USAonly).G Warning!Comply with all valid regulations withrespect to handling, storing, and disposingof service fluids. Otherwise you couldendanger persons or the environment.Keep service fluids out of the reach ofchildren.
For health reasons, you should preventservice fluids from coming into directcontact with your skin or clothing.If a service fluid is swallowed, contact aphysician immediately.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil filter E 350 (all models) 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine oils
E 320 BlueTECE 300 4MATIC51
E 550 (all models)
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
E 63 AMG52 9.3 US qt (8.8 l)
51 Canada only.52 Engine with oil cooler.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
395
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Automatic transmission E 320 BlueTECE 35053
E 55053
9.7 US qt (9.2 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
E 300 4MATIC51
E 350 4MATICE 550 4MATIC
8.6 US qt (8.1 l)
E 63 AMG54 9.3 US qt (8.8 l)
Front axle E 300 4MATIC51
E 350 4MATICE 550 4MATIC
1.7 US qt (1.6 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Rear axle E 300 4MATIC51
E 350 4MATICE 550 4MATIC
1.7 US qt (1.6 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
E 320 BlueTECE 55053
1.4 US qt (1.3 l)
E 35053 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)
E 63 AMG 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) Fuchs Titan EG 5010 D
53 USA only.51 Canada only.54 Automatic transmission with oil cooler.
Technical data
Z
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
396
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Transfer case E 300 4MATIC51
E 350 4MATICE 550 4MATIC
0.62 US qt (0.59 l) MB Transfer Case Fluid
Power steering All models except E 63 AMG approx. 1.0 US qt (0.9 l) MB Power Steering Fluid(Chevron Texaco PSF 9109)
E 63 AMG approx. 1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
Brake system 0.63 US qt (0.6 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system E 320 BlueTEC approx. 13.7 US qt (13.0 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
E 300 4MATIC51
E 350 (all models)approx. 10.7 US qt (10.0 l)
E 550 (all models) approx. 11.9 US qt (11.3 l)
E 63 AMG approx. 12.5 US qt (11.8 l)
Fuel tank,including a reserve of
21.1 US gal (80.0 l) Gasoline engine:Premium unleaded gasoline(Minimum Posted Octane 91[Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON])Diesel engine:ULTRA-LOW SULFURHIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL(15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM)
All models except E 63 AMG 2.4 US gal (9.0 l)
E 63 AMG 3.7 US gal (14.0 l)
Air conditioning system — R134a refrigerant and specialPAG lubricant oil (never R 12)
51 Canada only.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
397
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Washer system 4.8 US qt (4.5 l) MB Windshield WasherConcentrate55 (Y page 402)Washer fluid mixing ratio(Y page 402)
Washer system and headlampcleaning system
6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
Approved engine oilsEngine oils are specifically tested for theirsuitability in our engines and durability for ourservice intervals. Therefore, only useapproved engine oils and oil filters requiredfor vehicles with Maintenance System.For a listing of approved engine oils and oilfilters, contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
! Using engine oils and oil filters of aspecification other than those expresslyrequired for the Maintenance System, orchanging of oil and oil filter at changeintervals longer than those called for by theMaintenance System will result in engine oremission control system damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.Please follow Maintenance Systemrecommendations for scheduled oilchanges. Failure to do so will result inengine or emission control system damagenot covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.
Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL.Use the table below to determine theMB sheet number.
Model Enginetype
MB sheetnumber
E 320 BlueTEC 642 229.51
E 300 4MATIC56 272 229.5
Model Enginetype
MB sheetnumber
E 35057 272 229.5
E 350 4MATIC 272 229.5
E 55057 273 229.5
E 550 4MATIC 273 229.5
E 63 AMG 156 229.558
i MB sheet numbers are printed on theoutside of oil containers.
55 Mixed with water or commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze.56 Canada only.57 USA only.58 Restriction: Only SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used.
Technical data
Z
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
398
Viscosity grades for engine oilsUsing the chart below, select oil viscosityaccording to the lowest air temperatureexpected before the next oil change.
Engine oil additives! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine. Damage ormalfunctions resulting from blending oiladditives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerantR134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAGlubricating oil are used in the air conditioningsystem.
! Never use R 12 (CFC) or mineral-basedlubricating oil. Otherwise damage to thesystem will occur.
Brake fluid
G Warning!During vehicle operation, the boiling pointof the brake fluid is continuously reducedthrough the absorption of moisture fromthe atmosphere.Under extremely strenuous operatingconditions, this moisture content can leadto the formation of bubbles in the system,thus reducing the system’s efficiency.Therefore, the brake fluid must be replacedregularly. Refer to your vehicle’sMaintenance Booklet for replacementinterval.
Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benzis recommended. Any authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center will provide you with additionalinformation.
Premium unleaded gasoline (gasolineengine)
G Warning!Gasoline is highly flammable andpoisonous. It burns violently and can causeserious personal injury.Never allow sparks, flames or smokingmaterials near gasoline!Turn off the engine before refueling.Whenever you are around gasoline, avoidinhaling fumes and any skin or clothingcontact. Extinguish all smoking materials.Direct skin contact with fuels and theinhalation of fuel vapors are damaging yourhealth.
! To maintain the engine’s durability andperformance, premium unleaded gasolinemust be used.If premium unleaded gasoline is notavailable and low octane gasoline is used,follow these precautions:RHave the fuel tank only partially filled
with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
399
with premium unleaded gasoline as soonas possible.RAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.RDo not exceed an engine speed of
3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with alight load such as two persons and noluggage.RDo not exceed 2/3 of maximum
accelerator pedal position if the vehicleis fully loaded or operating inmountainous terrain.
Fuel requirements
Gasoline engineOnly use premium unleaded gasoline. Theoctane number (posted at the pump) must be91 min. It is an average of both the ResearchOctane Number (RON) and the Motor OctaneNumber (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is alsoknown as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/orunleaded gasoline containing oxygenatessuch as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, andTBA can be used provided the ratio of any oneof these oxygenates to gasoline does notexceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must notexceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is notallowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can beused.These blends must also meet all other fuelrequirements, such as resistance to sparkknock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Diesel engineOnly use commercially available vehicularULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL(15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM) that meets theASTM D975 standard. Failure to useULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUELcan severely damage the vehicle’s exhaustafter-treatment device.To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel withimproved cold flow characteristics is offeredin the winter months. Check with your fuelretailer.
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do notblend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene.The fuel system and engine will otherwisebe damaged, which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
For further information on diesel fuel pumplabeling, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USAonly).
B5 biodieselMercedes-Benz USA, LLC approves the use ofB5 biodiesel (standard diesel with a maximumof up to 5% biodiesel content) in all CommonRail Injection (CDI) and BlueTEC dieselengines. Diesel fuels containing a higherpercentage of biodiesel content will causedamage to your engine and are not approved.Biodiesel can be refined from a variety of rawmaterials which may result in widely varyingproperties. Only use approved biodiesel.Approved biodiesel meets the ASTM D6751standard and has the necessary oxidationstability (minimum 6 hours, proved withEN14112 method) to prevent deposits and/or corrosion. The use of non-approvedbiodiesel may damage the fuel system.Please ask your service station for furtherinformation. If the B5 biodiesel blend is notsufficiently labeled to clearly indicate that itmeets the above standards, please do not useit. The Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty doesnot cover damage caused by the use of fuels
Technical data
Z
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
400
not meeting Mercedes-Benz approved fuelstandards.
Gasoline additives (gasoline engine)A major concern among enginemanufacturers is carbon build-up caused bygasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends onlythe use of quality gasoline containingadditives that prevent the build-up of carbondeposits.After an extended period of using fuelswithout such additives carbon deposits canbuild up, especially on the intake valves andin the combustion area, leading to engineperformance problems such as:RWarm-up hesitationRUnstable idleRKnocking/pingingRMisfireRPower lossIn areas where carbon deposits may beencountered due to lack of availability ofgasoline which contains these additives,Mercedes-Benz recommends the use ofadditives approved by us for use onMercedes-Benz vehicles.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeror visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for alisting of approved product(s). Followdirections on product label.Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.This only results in unnecessary cost and maybe harmful to the engine operation.
! Damage or malfunction resulting frompoor fuel quality or from blending additionalfuel additives other than those tested andapproved by us for use on Mercedes-Benzvehicles are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by any pre-ownedor Extended Limited warranties.
CoolantsThe engine coolant is a mixture of water andanticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:RCorrosion protectionRFreeze protectionRBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling
point)The cooling system was filled at the factorywith a coolant providing freeze protection toapproximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosionprotection.
! Add premixed coolant solution only.Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze separately from each other,could cause engine damage not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡(-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in thepressurized cooling system is reached atapproximately 266‡ (130†).The coolant solution must be used year roundto provide the necessary corrosion protectionand increase boil-over protection. Refer tothe Maintenance Booklet for replacementinterval.Coolant system design and coolant useddetermine the replacement interval. Thereplacement interval published in theMaintenance Booklet is only applicable ifMB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solutionor other Mercedes-Benz approved productsof equal specification are used to renew thecoolant concentration or bring it back up tothe proper level.For information on other Mercedes-Benzapproved products of equal specification,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeror visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).To provide important corrosion protection,the solution must be at least 50%
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
401
anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent tofreeze protection to approximately -35‡[-37†]).If you use a solution that is more than 55%anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protectionto approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the enginetemperature will increase due to the lowerheat transfer capability of the solution.Therefore, do not use more than this amountof anticorrosion/antifreeze.If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used tobring it up to the proper level (have coolingsystem checked for signs of leakage). Pleasemake sure the mixture is in accordance withlabel instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meetminimum requirements, which are usuallysatisfied by normal drinking water.If you are not sure about the water quality,contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
Anticorrosion/antifreezeYour vehicle contains a number of aluminumparts. The use of aluminum components inmotor vehicle engines necessitates thatanticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used insuch engines be specifically formulated toprotect the aluminum parts. Failure to use
such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant willresult in a significantly shortened service life.Therefore, the following product is stronglyrecommended for use in your vehicle:MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.Before the start of the winter season (or oncea year in hot southern regions), you shouldhave the anticorrosion/antifreezeconcentration checked.The coolant is also regularly checked eachtime you bring your vehicle to an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for service.
Model Approximate freeze protection
-35‡ (-37†) -49‡ (-45†)
Cooling system E 320 BlueTEC 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) 7.6 US qt (7.2 l)
E 300 4MATIC59
E 350 (all models)5.3 US qt (5.0 l) 5.9 US qt (5.5 l)
E 550 (all models) 6.0 US qt (5.7 l) 6.6 US qt (6.2 l)
E 63 AMG 6.2 US qt (5.9 l) 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
59 Canada only.
Technical data
Z
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
402
Washer system and headlampcleaning system
G Warning!Washer solvent/antifreeze is highlyflammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because itmay ignite and burn. You could be seriouslyburned.
X Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate“MB SummerFit”.
X Mix with water for temperatures abovefreezing point.
X Mix with commercially available premixedwasher solvent/antifreeze fortemperatures below freezing point.
Washer fluid mixing ratioFor temperatures above freezing point:1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal[4.0 l] water)For temperatures below freezing point:1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal[4.0 l] solvent)
Technical data
403
404
Service and LiteratureYour authorized Mercedes-Benz Center hastrained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.For expert advice and quality service, contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If you are interested in obtaining serviceliterature for your vehicle, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.We consider this the best way for you toobtain accurate information for your vehicle.For further information you can find us on theMercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca(Canada only).G Warning!To help avoid personal injury, be extremelycareful when performing any service workor repairs. Improper or incomplete serviceor the use of incorrect or inappropriateparts or materials may damage the vehicleor its equipment, which may in turn resultin personal injury.If you have any questions about carryingout any type of service, turn to the adviceof an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to make changes indesign and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations anddescriptions in this Operator’s Manual mightdiffer from your vehicle.Reprinting, translation and copying, even ofexcerpts, is not permitted without our priorauthorization in writing.Press time May 28, 2008GSP/OISPrinted in U. S. A.
Order no. 6515 3416 13 Part no. 211 584 86 97 Edition A 2009
É2115848697~ËÍ2115848697
